ISO Valves Serial Bus Installation Guides
ROSS CONTROLS®
•
ROSS CONTROLS®
•
ROSS CONTROLS®
Installation & Service Instructions
A10330
W66 Size 0 & W66 Size 00
ISO 15407-1
Subbase & Manifold Assembly
ISSUED: August, 2007
Supersedes: None
! WARNING
To avoid unpredictable system behavior that can cause personal injury
and property damage:
• Disconnect electrical supply (when necessary) before installation,
servicing, or conversion.
• Disconnect air supply and depressurize all air lines connected to
this product before installation, servicing, or conversion.
• Operate within the manufacturer’s specified pressure, temperature,
and other conditions listed in these instructions.
• Medium must be moisture-free if ambient temperature is below
freezing.
• Service according to procedures listed in these instructions.
• Installation, service, and conversion of these products must be
performed by knowledgeable personnel who understand how
pneumatic products are to be applied.
• After installation, servicing, or conversion, air and electrical supplies
(when necessary) should be connected and the product tested for
proper function and leakage. If audible leakage is present, or the
product does not operate properly, do not put into use.
• Warnings and specifications on the product should not be
covered by paint, etc. If masking is not possible, contact your local
representative for replacement labels.
Subbase Assembly
Torque: Valve to Base
Size 00 - 10 to 12 in.lb. (1.1 to 1.3 Nm)
Size 0 - 15 to 18 in.lb. (1.7 to 2.0 Nm)
12
! WARNING
FAILURE OR IMPROPER SELECTION OR IMPROPER USE OF THE
PRODUCTS AND/OR SYSTEMS DESCRIBED HEREIN OR RELATED ITEMS
CAN CAUSE DEATH, PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE.
This document and other information from ROSS CONTROLS, its subsidiaries
and authorized distributors provide product and/or system options for further
investigation by users having technical expertise. It is important that you
analyze all aspects of your application, including consequences of any failure
and review the information concerning the product or systems in the current
product catalog. Due to the variety of operating conditions and applications for
these products or systems, the user, through its own analysis and testing, is
solely responsible for making the final selection of the products and systems
and assuring that all performance, safety and warning requirements of the
application are met.
The products described herein, including without limitation, product features,
specifications, designs, availability and pricing, are subject to change by ROSS
CONTROLS and its subsidiaries at any time without notice.
EXTRA COPIES OF THESE INSTRUCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE FOR INCLUSION
IN EQUIPMENT / MAINTENANCE MANUALS THAT UTILIZE THESE PRODUCTS.
CONTACT YOUR LOCAL REPRESENTATIVE.
Pin 2
Pin 4
Pin 3
4-Pin M12
Wiring Type
Pin #1
Pin #2
Pin #3
Pin #4
ISO
N/A
12
Com
14
Service Kits
Kit Number
RPEJ02-02-80
RPEJ02-02-70
RPEJ01-03-80
RPEJ01-03-70
RD02P-01-80
RD01P-02-80
RD02BD0
Introduction
RD01BD0
Follow these instructions when installing, operating, or servicing
the product.
RDX02BLK
RDX01BLK
Application Limits
RDX02M2MB*
These products are intended for use in general purpose
compressed air systems only. Compliance with the rated
pressure, temperature, and voltage is necessary - see Installation
& Service Instructions packed with valve.
14
Pin 1
! WARNING
Air exhausting from one valve into the exhaust gallery of the manifold
assembly may momentarily pressurize other valve circuits open to
the same gallery. Design the circuit such that there is no hazard or
consequence of damage from this action.
4
Wiring - ISO 20401
Safety Guide
For more complete information on recommended application guidelines,
see the Installation Safety Guidelines section of Bulletin 600 (Form
A10309) or you can download the Installation Safety Guidelines at:
www.rosscontrols.com/rosslit.htm.
2
RDX02M2MGSKT
RDX01M2MGSKT
Description
Items Included
(Qty)
18mm End Plate Kit,
1/4" NPT
18mm End Plate Kit,
1/4" BSPP
1 (1), 2 (1), 4 (2)
5 (2), 6 (1), 7 (2)
26mm End Plate Kit,
3/8" NPT
26mm End Plate Kit,
3/8" BSPP
18mm Intermediate
Air Supply Base Kit,
Not Shown
1/8" NPT
26mm Intermediate
Air Supply Base Kit,
Not Shown
1/4" NPT
18mm Manifold Port
Not Shown (3 per Kit)
Isolation Disc Kit
26mm Manifold Port
Not Shown (3 per Kit)
Isolation Disc Kit
18mm Blanking Plate Kit Not Shown
26mm Blanking Plate Kit Not Shown
Manifold to Manifold
4 (10), 5 (10), 7 (10)
Bolt Kit
02 Manifold to Manifold Gasket Kit
01 Manifold to Manifold Gasket Kit
* Use this Number for both sizes, RPJLP02 & RPJLP01.
W66 Size 0 & W66 Size 00 ISO 15407-1 Subbbase & Manifold Installation
4
7
5
7
4
5
5
6
7
5
4
7
4
2
5
1
3
7
4
2
5
3
7
4
2
Size 0 Manifold Assembly
4
Torque - Item Number 5
25 to 35 in-lb (2.82 to 3.95 Nm)
7
5
7
4
5
5
7
4
2
5
6
4
4
1
7
2
5
2
3
4
7
2
4
5
1
3
4
2
7
Size 00 Manifold Assembly
Manifold to Manifold Assembly
1. Lay Right End Plate (when looking at Cylinder Ports) Port
Side down.
2. Place Gasket in gasket track and Retaining Nut in slot.
3. Place Manifold on top and tighten using Screw and Washer
(both sides).
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 until all manifold slices are
assembled.
5. Attach Left End Plate.
6. Lay Manifold on flat surface and check for straightness.
Tighten all bolts per torque specifications.
Item Number
Description
1
Left End Plate
2
Gasket
3
Manifold
4
Retaining Nut
5
Screw
6
Right End Plate
7
Washer
For all Instruction Sheets, go to www.rosscontrols.com
A10326 - W66 Size 0 (26mm) & W66 Size 00 (18mm) ISO 15407 Valve Service
A10327 - W66 Size 0 & W66 Size 00 ISO 15407-2 Interposed Flow Controls
A10329 - W66 Size 0 & W66 Size 00 Interposed Regulators
Printed in U.S.A -0807
A10330 - W66 Size 0 & W66 Size 00 ISO 15407-1 Subbbase & Manifold
Installation
A10331 - W65 Size 1, 2 & 3, ISO 5599-1, 5599-2 Subbase & Manifold
Installation
© Copyright 2007, ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Form A10330
Installation & Service Instructions
A10326
Size 0 (26mm) & Size 00 (18mm)
ISO 15407 Valve Service
ALERT:
Remove Control 12 & 14 Pipe Plugs in Subbase
or Manifold Before Installing Valve.
!
WARNING
To avoid unpredictable system behavior that can cause personal injury
and property damage:
• Disconnect electrical supply (when necessary) before installation,
servicing, or conversion.
• Disconnect air supply and depressurize all air lines connected to this
product before installation, servicing, or conversion.
• Operate within the manufacturer’s specified pressure, temperature,
and other conditions listed in these instructions.
• Medium must be moisture-free if ambient temperature is below
freezing.
• Service according to procedures listed in these instructions.
• Installation, service, and conversion of these products must be
performed by knowledgeable personnel who understand how
pneumatic products are to be applied.
• After installation, servicing, or conversion, air and electrical supplies
(when necessary) should be connected and the product tested for
proper function and leakage. If audible leakage is present, or the
product does not operate properly, do not put into use.
• Warnings and specifications on the product should not be covered by
paint, etc. If masking is not possible, contact your local representative
for replacement labels.
Safety Guide
ISSUED: June, 2013
Supersedes: August, 2007 issue
NOTE: The operator identification describes the ports that are connected
when the operator is energized: operator 12 connects Port 1 to
Port 2; operator 14 connects Port 1 to Port 4. Other ports may
also be connected, or blocked – see symbols on the valve.
! CAUTION: It is recommended that double solenoid and
double remote air pilot operated 2-Position valves be
mounted so that the axis of the valve spool is in the
horizontal plane.
Lubrication
Factory Pre-lubed. If lubricating in service, use paraffin based
mineral oil with 150 to 200 SSU viscosity @100°F.
CAUTION: Do not use oils that are synthetic, reconstituted,
! have an alcohol content or a detergent additive.
Application Limits
These products are intended for use in general purpose
compressed air systems only.
Operating Pressure Range:
For more complete information on recommended application guidelines,
see the Installation Safety Guidelines section of Bulletin 600 (Form
A10309) or you can download the Installation Safety Guidelines at:
www.rosscontrols.com/rosslit.htm.
Maximum: 145 PSIG (1000 kPa)
Minimum: See Chart
! WARNING
Internal Pilot
FAILURE OR IMPROPER SELECTION OR IMPROPER USE OF THE
PRODUCTS AND/OR SYSTEMS DESCRIBED HEREIN OR RELATED ITEMS
CAN CAUSE DEATH, PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE.
This document and other information from ROSS CONTROLS, its subsidiaries
and authorized distributors provide product and/or system options for further
investigation by users having technical expertise. It is important that you
analyze all aspects of your application, including consequences of any failure
and review the information concerning the product or systems in the current
product catalog. Due to the variety of operating conditions and applications for
these products or systems, the user, through its own analysis and testing, is
solely responsible for making the final selection of the products and systems
and assuring that all performance, safety and warning requirements of the
application are met.
The products described herein, including without limitation, product features,
specifications, designs, availability and pricing, are subject to change by ROSS
CONTROLS and its subsidiaries at any time without notice.
EXTRA COPIES OF THESE INSTRUCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE FOR INCLUSION
IN EQUIPMENT / MAINTENANCE MANUALS THAT UTILIZE THESE PRODUCTS.
CONTACT YOUR LOCAL REPRESENTATIVE.
Single Solenoid - 2-Position
Double Solenoid- 2-Position
Single Remote - 2-Position
Double Remote Pilot - 2-Position
Double Solenoid - 3-Position
Double Remote Pilot - 3-Position
Single Solenoid - 2-Position
Air Return / Spring Assist
Single Remote Pilot - 2-Position
Air Return / Spring Assist
External Pilot *
Size 0 & Size 00 Series
Min. PSIG
(kPa)
Size 0
Min. PSIG
(kPa)
Size 00
25
(173)
25
(173)
Vacuum
Vacuum
35
(241)
Vacuum
Vacuum
Vacuum
35
(241)
Vacuum
30
(207
30
(207)
Vacuum
Vacuum
* External Pilot Pressure / Remote Pilot Signal - 45 to 145 PSIG (310 to 1000 kPa).
Introduction
Follow these instructions when installing, operating, or servicing
the product.
Ambient Temperature Range: -15°C to 49°C (5°F to 120°F)
Voltage Range: Rated Voltage +10%, -15%
Port Identification / Connections / Symbols
Port
Single
Dual
No.
Pressure
Pressure
1
Inlet
Exhaust
2
Outlet
Outlet
3
Exhaust
Inlet
4
Outlet
Outlet
5
Exhaust
Inlet
12, 14 Pilot ports for External
Pilot or Remote Pilot
! CAUTION: Solenoid versions of this valve contain solid
4 2
14
4 2
12
51 3
5 Port, 3-Position
Power Center
4 2
4 2
12
14
51 3
5 Port, 3-Position
Closed Center
12
14
5 1 3
5 Port, 2-Position
12
14
5 1 3
5 Port, 3-Position
Open Center
Valves may be used for single outlet (3-Way) by plugging an
outlet Port.
state components that can be damaged by transient
voltage spikes, over-voltage or high temperature. To
protect against premature solenoid failure, please read
and adhere to the following:
If this solenoid operated valve is used in a circuit with other
inductive loads, the solenoid should be electrically protected
with a voltage suppression device (e.g. transient voltage
suppressor or varistor) that has a minimum rating of 1.6
times the rated voltage of the solenoid valve and sufficient
capacity to dissipate the energy of other inductive loads.
www.rosscontrols.com
1
Series W66 Size 0 (26mm) & Series W66 Size 00 (18mm) ISO 15407 Valve Service
8. Install Base Gasket (19) onto pin on bottom of valve. For
! CAUTION: Solenoid versions of this valve are to be earth
Internal Pilot Pressure, be sure the letters “I” are visible. For
grounded through the direct metal to metal contact
External Pilot Pressure, be sure the letters “X” are visible.
of the valve body to an appropriately grounded metal
See the valve to base gasket drawings below.
mounting surface.
Note: After servicing the valve in any way, apply pressure to the valve
and check for leaks. If any leak exists, repeat assembly process
and retest until valve is leak free.
Servicing Valve Body
Refer to Figures 1 and 2 to aid with disassembly and reassembly.
1. Remove Valve from base by removing Body to Base
Screws (20).
2. For ISO 15407-2: Remove Connector (14) by carefully
gripping the pins with a needle nose pliers and pull to
remove.
For ISO 15407-1: Go directly to Step 3.
3. Remove each End Cap (13 / 17 / 18) by removing the
Screws (16).
4. Remove the Pistons (9 or 10), Spool Return Spring (22), if
applicable, and the Spool (3, 5, 6 or 7), being careful not
to scratch the valve body bore.
5. Using a clean, lint free cloth, clean sealing surfaces.
6. Apply a light coating of grease to each part noted in Figure
1 and the mating sealing surface of each of these parts.
7. Reassemble valve in reverse order of disassembly, replacing
the necessary parts. Care must be taken when reassembling
the End Caps. Install Item 14 Connector after Item 13
Operator End Cap is installed on the Body. Note pin kink
orientation in Figure 1.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Description
Item
Body, Single Solenoid
Body, Double Solenoid
Spool - 2-Position
(Seals Assembled)
Seal - Spool
Spool - 3-Position CC
(Seals Assembled)
Spool - 3-Position OC
(Seals Assembled)
Spool - 3-Position PC
(Seals Assembled)
Seal, Operator Piston
Operator Piston, 2-Position
Operator Piston, 3-Position
End Cap Gasket
Solenoid / Circuit Board Assy
13
14
15
16
17
13
12
11
15
9
Note: Pins
with kinks
face away
from body.
16
(See
Torque
Chart)
4
13
14
Remove before
attempting to
remove Item13
from Item 1, Body
12
8
11
1
3
17
22
19
20 (See Torque Chart)
11
21
4
2
11
8
9
8
14
Double
Remove before
attempting to
remove Item13
from Item 1, Body
12
16
(See
Torque
Chart)
Single Solenoid, 2-Position, ISO 15407-2
15
Note: Pins
with kinks
face away
from body.
16
(See
Torque
Chart)
13
3
9
Solenoid, 2-Position, ISO 15407-2
20 (See Torque Chart)
11
2
12
4
5
4
6
4
7
CE
15
10
8
19
8
10
PC
14
Remove before
attempting to
remove Item13
from Item 1, Body
Double Solenoid, 3-Position, ISO 15407-2
Figure 1
2
18
16
(See
Torque
Chart)
19
21
11
12
APB
Note: Pins
with kinks
face away
from body.
19
20
21
22
23
24
Lightly grease with provided lubricant.
Inspect for nicks, scratches, and surface imperfections. If present, reduced
service life is probable and future replacement should be planned.
Clean with lint-free cloth.
20 (See Torque Chart)
16
(See
Torque
Chart)
18
Description
Solenoid Operator End Cap
Connector
O-Ring
Screws, Operator to Body
Return Operator End Cap,
Single Solenoid
Return Operator End Cap,
Double Solenoid
Body to Base Gasket
Screws, Body to Base
Connector, 2-Pin
Spool Return Spring
M12 Insert Assembly
O-Ring
© 2013 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
18
16
(See
Torque
Chart)
Series W66 Size 0 (26mm) & Series W66 Size 00 (18mm) ISO 15407 Valve Service
16
(See
Torque
Chart)
20 (See Torque Chart)
23
18
12
11
4
9
8
16
(See
Torque
Chart)
24
11
1
3
17
22
19
Single Solenoid, ISO 15407-1
16
(See
Torque
Chart)
20 (See Torque Chart)
23
18
12
11
2
4
11
8
9
8
18
16
(See
Torque
Chart)
18
16
(See
Torque
Chart)
24
3
12
9
19
Double Solenoid, ISO 15407-1
16
(See
Torque
Chart)
20 (See Torque Chart)
23
18
12
11
24
2
11
12
APB
4
5
4
6
4
7
CE
10
8
19
8
10
PC
Double Solenoid, 3-Position, ISO 15407-1
Figure 2
Valve Mounting Torque Specifications (Item 20)
Body Service Kits
Valve
Kit Number
Description
Kit Includes (Qty)
Valve to Base
W66 Size 0
W66 Size 00
Size 0
Size 00
RPS5501P
RPS5601P
2-Position
Body Service Kit
All parts below plus
Return Spring (1)
Torque - in.lb.
(Nm)
15 to 18
(1.7 to 2.0)
10 to 12
(1.1 to 1.3)
Size 0
Size 00
RPS5502P
RPS5602P
3-Position CC
Body Service Kit
Spool (1)
Size 0
Size 00
RPS5503P
RPS5603P
3-Position OC
Body Service Kit
Piston Assembly (2)
Grease Tube (1)
Size 0
Size 00
RPS5504P
RPS5604P
3-Position PC
Body Service Kit
Accessory Kits
Operator Cap to Body Torque Specifications (Item 16 )
Cap to Body
W66 Size 0 / W66 Size 00
Torque - in.lb.
(Nm)
5 to 7
(.6 to .80)
Valve to Base Gaskets
Valve
Kit Number
Description
(Qty)
Size 0
Size 00
RPS5587P
RPS5687P
Valve Bolt Kit
12
Size 0
Size 00
RPS5505P
RPS5605P
Body to Base Gasket Kit
– Standard
5
Size
Part Number
Size 0
RPS5605P
Size 00
RPS5505P
“X” Indicates External Pilot
www.rosscontrols.com
“ ”Indicates Internal Pilot
3
Series W66 Size 0 (26mm) & Series W66 Size 00 (18mm) ISO 15407 Valve Service
Remote Pilot Block Installation
!
Warning:
Not following instruction may result in Remote Pilot Block damage
or inadequate thread engagement, which may lead to personal injury,
property damage, or economic loss.
5
Important:
• Remove pressure and electrical connections before installation.
• All threads on tie rods and screws must be free of rust, water or other
debris, which could prevent finger thread engagement.
Valve
Step 1: Install Tie Rods
4
1. Install two Tie Rods (3) to the base, torque finger tight.
2. Adjust tie rod height to 28.5 / 28.0 mm (1.12 / 1.10 inch) as
figure shows.
1
3. If finger tight height exceeds 28.5 mm (1.12 inch), use
mechanical tightening as necessary to get the proper
height.
Remote Pilot
Block Body
Note: “Base” could be a manifold, sub-base or sandwich flow control.
Max: 28.5 mm
(1.12 Inch)
Min: 28.0 mm
(1.10 Inch)
6*
2
2
3
Base
4
2
Step 2: Install Remote Pilot Block
1. Lay the Pilot Block Gasket (2) on the Base. Make sure the
two rubber projections are face up and the orientation of the
gasket is correct.
Base
2. Engage both Tie Rods (3) into mounting holes on the
Remote Pilot Block.
3. Carefully engage the Plug into the Base.
Figure 3
4. Continue to lower the Pilot Block Body by carefully engaging
the two rubber projections on the gasket into the appropriate
holes on the Pilot Block Body.
5. Press the Pilot Block Body by hand firmly. To confirm the
gasket is indeed attached to the Pilot Block Body, lift the
Body by about one half inch. Both rubber projections should
remain in the holes.
6. Lay the Pilot Block Body back on the Base.
Step 3: Install Valve
1. Locate Valve Gasket (4) on bottom of Valve.
2. Install valve onto Pilot Block Body.
3. Carefully engage the Valve Plug.
4. Using hex wrench, tighten two Screws (5) – torque 1.5 to
1.7 Nm (13 to 15 in-lb) for W66 Size 0, 0.9 to 1.1 Nm (8 to
10 in-lb) for W66 Size 00.
Step 4: Leakage Check
1. Apply pressure to base and check for audible leakage at
various joints. If any are present, do not not operate the
valve, repeat the assembly procedure until satisfied.
ISO 15407-2 Size 00 Pilot Block Body Shown
(Valve & Base shown for reference only)
Component List
The components listed below are for identification purposes only,
some of these components are available in various Sandwich
Regulator Kits, some are not available due to special factory
assembly. Individual components are not sold separately since
all kit components should be installed when serviced.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
Description
Remote Pilot Block Body
Pilot Block Gasket
Tie Rods
Valve Gasket
Mounting Screws
Protective Cap*
*Install Item 6, Protective Cap, in manifold over electrical plug if servicing
manifold assembly with valve or remote pilot block removed and power
is on. Remove cap before re-installing valve or remote pilot block.
For all Instruction Sheets, go to www.rosscontrols.com
A10326 - W66 Size 0 (26mm) & W66 Size 00 (18mm) ISO 15407 Valve Service
A10327 - W66 Size 0 & W66 Size 00 ISO 15407-2 Interposed Flow Controls
A10329 - W66 Size 0 & W66 Size 00 Interposed Regulators
Printed in U.S.A -0613
A10330 - W66 Size 0 & W66 Size 00 ISO 15407-1 Subbbase & Manifold
Installation
A10331 - W65 Size 1, 2 & 3, ISO 5599-1, 5599-2 Subbase & Manifold
Installation
© Copyright 2013, ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Form A10326
Installation & Service Instructions
A10321
Serial Bus 24 VDC Analog Input
Modules, Series A (RPSSNACM12A,
RPSSNAVM12A)
ISSUED: August, 2007
Supersedes: None
RPSSNACM12A
! WARNING
To avoid unpredictable system behavior that can cause personal injury
and property damage:
• Disconnect electrical supply (when necessary) before installation,
servicing, or conversion.
• Disconnect air supply and depressurize all air lines connected to
this product before installation, servicing, or conversion.
• Operate within the manufacturer’s specified pressure, temperature,
and other conditions listed in these instructions.
• Medium must be moisture-free if ambient temperature is below
freezing.
• Service according to procedures listed in these instructions.
• Installation, service, and conversion of these products must be
performed by knowledgeable personnel who understand how
pneumatic products are to be applied.
• After installation, servicing, or conversion, air and electrical
supplies (when necessary) should be connected and the product
tested for proper function and leakage. If audible leakage is present,
or the product does not operate properly, do not put into use.
• Warnings and specifications on the product should not be
covered by paint, etc. If masking is not possible, contact your local
representative for replacement labels.
RPSSNACM12A
Analog Current In
Female
Connector
M12-A
Female
Connector
M12-B
1
0
MOD
NET
0
LED
Indicators
1
RPSSNAVM12A
Safety Guide
For more complete information on recommended application guidelines,
see the Installation Safety Guidelines section of Bulletin 600 (Form
A10309) or you can download the Installation Safety Guidelines at:
www.rosscontrols.com/rosslit.htm.
RPSSNAVM12A
Analog Voltage In
Female
Connector
M12-A
0
Female
Connector
M12-B
1
MOD
NET
0
LED
Indicators
1
! WARNING
Introduction
Follow these instructions when installing, operating, or servicing the
product.
Serial Bus 24 VDC Analog Input Modules,
Series A
(RPSSNACM12A, RPSSNAVM12A)
The sealed IP67 housing of these modules requires no enclosure.
(Note that environmental requirements other than IP67 may require
an additional appropriate housing.) I/O connectors are sealed M12
style. The mounting base ships with the module. The RPSSNACM12A
and RPSSNAVM12A modules are shown below.
FAILURE OR IMPROPER SELECTION OR IMPROPER USE OF THE
PRODUCTS AND/OR SYSTEMS DESCRIBED HEREIN OR RELATED
ITEMS CAN CAUSE DEATH, PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY
DAMAGE.
This document and other information from ROSS CONTROLS, its
subsidiaries and authorized distributors provide product and/or system
options for further investigation by users having technical expertise. It
is important that you analyze all aspects of your application, including
consequences of any failure and review the information concerning the
product or systems in the current product catalog. Due to the variety of
operating conditions and applications for these products or systems, the
user, through its own analysis and testing, is solely responsible for making
the final selection of the products and systems and assuring that all
performance, safety and warning requirements of the application are met.
The products described herein, including without limitation, product features,
specifications, designs, availability and pricing, are subject to change by
ROSS CONTROLS and its subsidiaries at any time without notice.
EXTRA COPIES OF THESE INSTRUCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE FOR INCLUSION
IN EQUIPMENT / MAINTENANCE MANUALS THAT UTILIZE THESE PRODUCTS.
CONTACT YOUR LOCAL REPRESENTATIVE.
Serial Bus 24 VDC Analog Input Modules, Series A (RPSSNACM12A, RPSSNAVM12A)
Important User Information
ATTENTION
Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from
those of electromechanical equipment. Safety Guidelines for the
Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls
(Form #A10325) (available online at www.rosscontrols.com/rosslit.
htm), describes some important differences between solid state
equipment and hard-wired electromechanical devices. Because
of these differences, and also because of the wide variety of uses
for solid state equipment, all persons responsible for applying this
equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of
this equipment is acceptable.
In no event will ROSS CONTROLS® be responsible or liable for
indirect or consequential damages to persons or property resulting
from the use or application of this equipment.
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely
for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and
requirements associated with any particular installation, ROSS
CONTROLS cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use
based on the examples and diagrams.
No patent liability is assumed by ROSS CONTROLS with respect
to use of information, circuits, equipment, or software described in
this manual.
Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without
written permission of ROSS CONTROLS is prohibited.
Throughout this manual we use notes to make you aware of safety
considerations.
WARNING
!
Identifies information about practices or
circumstances that can cause an explosion in
a hazardous environment, which may lead to
personal injury or death, property damage, or
economic loss.
IMPORTANT
Identifies information that is critical for successful
application and understanding of the product.
ATTENTION
Identifies information about practices or
circumstances that can lead to personal injury
or death, property damage, or economic loss.
Attentions help you:
• Identify a Hazard
• Avoid a Hazard
• Recognize the Consequence
!
SHOCK HAZARD Labels may be located on or inside the
equipment to alert people that dangerous
voltage may be present.
BURN HAZARD
2
Labels may be located on or inside the
equipment to alert people that surfaces may be
dangerous temperatures.
!
Environment and Enclosure
This equipment is intended for use in overvoltage Category
II applications (as defined in IEC publication 60664-1), at
altitudes up to 2000 meters without derating. This equipment
is considered Group 1, Class A industrial equipment according
to IEC/CISPR Publication 11. Without appropriate precautions,
there may be potential difficulties ensuring electromagnetic
compatibility in other environments due to conducted as well as
radiated disturbance. This equipment is supplied as “enclosed”
equipment. It should not require additional system enclosure
when used in locations consistent with the enclosure type
ratings stated in the Specifications section of this publication.
Subsequent sections of this publication may contain additional
information regarding specific enclosure type ratings, beyond
what this product provides, that are required to comply with
certain product safety certifications.
NOTE: See NEMA Standards publication 250 and IEC
publication 60529, as applicable, for explanations of the
degrees of protection provided by different types of enclosure.
Also, see the appropriate sections in this publication, as well
as the publication A10324 (“Industrial Automation Wiring and
Grounding Guidelines”), for additional installation requirements
pertaining to this equipment.
ATTENTION
!
Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
This equipment is sensitive to electrostatic discharge, which
can cause internal damage and affect normal operation. Follow
these guidelines when you handle this equipment:
• Touch a grounded object to discharge potential static.
• Wear an approved grounding wrist strap.
• Do not touch connectors or pins on component boards.
• Do not touch circuit components inside the equipment.
• If available, use a static-safe workstation.
• When not in use, store the equipment in appropriate staticsafe packaging.
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Serial Bus 24 VDC Analog Input Modules, Series A (RPSSNACM12A, RPSSNAVM12A)
Mount the I/O Base
To mount the I/O base on a wall or panel, use the screw holes
provided in the base.
IMPORTANT
The I/O module must be mounted on a grounded metal mounting
plate or other conductive surface.
A mounting illustration for the base with an adapter is shown below.
1.9
(47.2)
2.0
(50)
0.87
(22)
2.0
(50)
3.13
(79.4)
5.98*
(151.9)
Adapter
2.39
(60.7)
4.02
(102)
4.32
(109.8)
1.81
(46)
Inches
(mm)
Drill and Tap
for M4 Screw
3.02
(76.6)
5.39
(137.0)
Drill and Tap
for M6 Screw
* Depending on the type and number of manifolds, this dimension
may vary. Consult Ross for specific information.
Install the Mounting Base as Follows:
1. Lay out the required points as shown above in the drilling
dimension drawing.
2. Drill the necessary holes for #8 (M4) machine or self-tapping
screws.
3. Mount the base using #8 (M4) screws.
4. Ground the system using the ground lug connection. (The ground
lug connection is also a mounting hole.)
Mounting Base
KeyswitchSet to position 3
for the analog
input modules
Ground Lug
Connection
Latching Mechanism
www.rosscontrols.com
3
Serial Bus 24 VDC Analog Input Modules, Series A (RPSSNACM12A, RPSSNAVM12A)
Install the Analog Input Module
To Install the Analog Input Module, Proceed as Follows:
1. Using a bladed screwdriver, rotate the keyswitch on the mounting
base clockwise until the number 3 aligns with the notch in the
base.
2. Position the module vertically above the mounting base. The
module will bridge two bases.
Module Will Bridge Two Bases
RPSSNACM12A
Analog Current In
0
1
MOD
NET
0
1
3. Push the module down until it engages the latching mechanism. You
will hear a clicking sound when the module is properly engaged.
The locking mechanism will lock the module to the base.
Remove the Analog Input Module From the
Mounting Base
To Remove the Module from the Mounting Base:
1. Put a flat blade screwdriver into the slot of the orange latching
mechanism.
2. Push the screwdriver toward the I/O module to disengage the
latch. The module will lift up off the base.
3. Pull the module off of the base.
4
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Serial Bus 24 VDC Analog Input Modules, Series A (RPSSNACM12A, RPSSNAVM12A)
Wire the Analog Input Modules
Following are wiring instructions for the analog input modules.
RPSSNACM12A and RPSSNAVM12A
(view into connector)
Pin 1 - 24VDC
Pin 2 - Input 0 (M12-A)
Input 1 (M12-B)
Pin 3 - Common
Pin 4 - Common
Pin 5 - No Connect
ATTENTION
!
IMPORTANT
Analog modules have ear th grounded metal rings.
This should be considered when choosing shielded cables and
grounding techniques.
Make sure all connectors and caps are securely tightened to
properly seal the connections against leaks and maintain IP67
requirements.
Communicate With Your Module
I/O messages are sent to (consumed) and received from (produced)
the I/O modules. These messages are mapped into the processor’s
memory. These I/O analog input modules produce 6 bytes of input
data (scanner Rx) and fault status data. They do not consume I/O
data (scanner Tx).
Default Data Map for the Analog Input Modules
RPSSNACM12A and RPSSNAVM12A
Message Size: 6 Bytes
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
Produces
Input Channel 0 High Byte Input Channel 0 Low Byte
(Scanner Rx)
Input Channel 1 High Byte Input Channel 1 Low Byte
Status Byte for Channel 1
Status Byte for Channel 0
O U H L H L C C O U H L H L C C
R R H L A A M F R R H L A A M F
A A
A A
Consumes
(scanner Tx)
No consumed data
Where: CF = Channel Fault Status, 0 = no error, 1 = fault
CM = Calibration Mode; 0 = normal, 1 = calibration mode
LA = Low Alarm; 0 = no error, 1 = fault
HA = High Alarm; 0 = no error, 1 = fault
LLA = Low/Low Alarm; 0 = no error, 1 = fault
HHA = High/High Alarm; 0 = no error, 1 = fault
UR = Underrange; 0 = no error; 1 = fault
OR = Overrange; 0 = no error; 1 = fault
EDS File Requirements
The EDS files are available online at:
www.rosscontrols.com/rosslit.htm
www.rosscontrols.com
5
Serial Bus 24 VDC Analog Input Modules, Series A (RPSSNACM12A, RPSSNAVM12A)
Add Analog Input Modules to RSLogix 5000
I/O Configuration
If your RSLogic 5000 is Version 15.X or greater:
• Choose the RPSSNACM12A module from the list of Parker
modules.
To add your analog input modules to RSLogix 5000 I/O configuration,
follow these steps:
• In RSLogix 5000:
- For ControlNet, highlight the RPSSCCNA or 1738-ACNR
Shown), right click and select New Module.
• Enter a name and click OK.
- For EtherNet/IP, highlight the RPSSCENA or1738-AENT
(Shown), right click and select New Module.
• Notice that the RPSSNACM12A is now under the I/O
configuration.
6
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Serial Bus 24 VDC Analog Input Modules, Series A (RPSSNACM12A, RPSSNAVM12A)
If your RSLogic 5000 is Version 13.X:
• Choose the equivalent Rockwell Automation module from the list
of modules.
Troubleshoot With the Indicators
RPSSNACM12A
RPSSNACM12A
Analog Current In
0
1
Module Status Indicator
MOD
Network Status Indicator
NET
0
1
Indication
I/O Status Indicators
Probable Cause
Module Status
Serial Bus
Modules
Equivalent Rockwell Automation
1738 ArmorPoint Modules
RPSSNACM12A
1738-IE2CM12
RPSSNAVM12A
1738-IE2VM12
• Enter a name (optional), slot number, and comm. format. Make
sure to choose Compatible Module for Electronic Keying
setting.
Off
No power applied to device
Green
Device operating normally
Flashing Green
Device needs commissioning due to
missing, incomplete, or incorrect
configuration
Flashing Red
Recoverable fault
Red
Unrecoverable fault may require device replacement
Flashing Red/Green
Device is in self-test
Indication
Probable Cause
Network Status
• Choose Next to set RPI.
• Choose Finish. Notice that the analog input module is now under
the I/O configuration
Off
Device is not on line:
- Device has not completed
dup_MAC-id test.
- Device not powered - check module
status indicator.
Flashing Green
Device is on line but has no
connections in the established state.
Green
Device is on line and has
connections in the established state.
Flashing Red
One or more I/O connections in
timed-out state.
Red
Critical link failure - failed
communication device. Device
detected error that prevents it from
communicating on the network.
Flashing Red/Green
Communication faulted device - the
device has detected a network access
error and is in communication faulted
state. Device has received and accepted
an Identity Communication Faulted
Request - long protocol message.
Indication
Probable Cause
I/O Status
Off
Module in CAL mode
Solid Green
Normal (channel scanning inputs)
Flashing Green
Channel being calibrated
Solid Red
No power or major channel fault
Flashing Red
Channel at end of range (over or under)
www.rosscontrols.com
7
Serial Bus 24 VDC Analog Input Modules, Series A (RPSSNACM12A, RPSSNAVM12A)
Specifications - Following are specifications for the RPSSNACM12A and RPSSNAVM12A analog input modules.
Analog Input Modules
Inputs per Module
Input Voltage
2 single ended, nonisolated
RPSSNAVM12A only
0-10V (user configurable) (-0.0V under, +0.5V over)
±10V (user configurable) (-0.5V under, +0.5V over)
RPSSNACM12A only
4-20 mA
0-20 mA
RPSSNACM12A - 60Ω
RPSSNAVM12A - 100kΩ
RPSSNACM12A - 16 bits - over 0-21 mA; 0.32μA/cnt
RPSSNAVM12A - 15 bits plus sign; 320μV/cnt in unipolar or bipolar mode
0.1% Full Scale @ 25°C
RPSSNACM12A - 30ppm/°C
RPSSNAVM12A - 5ppm/°C
100 ms @ Notch = 60 Hz (default)
120 ms @ Notch = 50 Hz
24 ms @ Notch = 250 Hz
12 ms @ Notch = 500 Hz
70 ms @ Notch = 60 Hz (default)
80 ms @ Notch = 50 Hz
16 ms @ Notch = 250 Hz
8 ms @ Notch = 500 Hz
0-10,000 ms (default = 0 ms)
RPSSNAVM12A only
200kΩ
Delta Sigma
120 dB
-60 dB
-3 dB
Notch filter
15.7 Hz @ Notch = 60 Hz
13.1 Hz @ Notch = 50 Hz
65.5 Hz @ Notch = 250 Hz
131 Hz @ Notch = 500 Hz
Signed integer
Input Current
Input Impedance
Resolution
Absolute Accuracy1
Accuracy Drift w/Temp.
Input Update Rate (per module)
Step Response (per module)
Digital Filter Time Constant
Input Resistance
Conversion Type
Common Mode Rejection Ratio
Normal Mode Rejection Ratio
Data Format
General Specifications
Maximum Overload
Calibration
Indicators
Keyswitch Position
PointBus Current
Power Dissipation
Thermal Dissipation, Maximum
Isolation Voltage
(continuous voltage withstand rating)
External DC Power
Supply Voltage
Voltage Range
Supply Current
Dimensions
Imperial (Metric)
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity
Shock
Vibration
ESD Immunity
Radiated RF Immunity
EFT/B Immunity
Surge Transient Immunity
Conducted RF Immunity
Emissions
Enclosure Type Rating
Mounting Base Screw Torque
Wiring Category2
Weight
Certifications:
(when product is marked)
Imperial (Metric)
Fault protected to 28.8VDC
Factory calibrated
1 green/red module status indicator, logic side
1 green/red network status indicator, logic side
2 green/red input status indicators, logic side
3
75 mA @ 5VDC
RPSSNACM12A - 0.6W @ 28.8VDC
RPSSNAVM12A - 0.75W @ 28.8VDC
RPSSNACM12A - 2.0 BTU/hr. @ 28.8VDC
RPSSNAVM12A - 2.5 BTU/hr. @ 28.8VDC
50V rms
Tested at 1250VAC rms for 60s
24VDC nominal
10-28.8VDC
RPSSNACM12A - 10 mA @ 24VDC; RPSSNAVM12A - 15 mA @ 24VDC
1.25H x 2.63W x 4.25D (31.75H x 66.80W x 107.95D)
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad, Operating Cold),
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd, Operating Dry Heat),
IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb, Operating Thermal Shock):
-20 to 60°C (-4 to 140°F)
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab, Un-packaged Non-operating Cold),
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb, Un-packaged Non-operating Dry Heat),
-40 to 85°C (-40 to 185°F)
IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db, Un-packaged Non-operating Damp Heat): 5 to 95% non-condensing
IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea, Unpackaged Shock):
Operating 30g
Non-operating 50g
IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc, Operating): 5g @ 10 to 500Hz
IEC 61000-4-2: 6kV contact discharges, 8kV air discharges
IEC 61000-4-3:
10V/m with 1kHz sine-wave 80%AM from 30MHz to 2000MHz
10V/m with 200Hz 50% Pulse 100%AM at 900Mhz
10V/m with 200Hz 50% Pulse 100%AM at 1890Mhz
IEC 61000-4-4: ±3kV at 5kHz on signal ports
IEC 61000-4-5: ±2kV line-earth(CM) on shielded ports
IEC 61000-4-6: 10Vrms with 1kHz sine-wave 80%AM from 150kHz to 80MHz
CSPR 11: Group 1, Class A
Meets IP65/66/67 (when marked)
#8 screw, 7.5 in. lbs. in Aluminum, 16 in. lbs. in Steel
1 - on signal ports
0.637 lb. (0.289 kg)
c-UL-us
UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment, certified for US and Canada
CE
European Union 89/336/EEC EMC Directive, compliant with:
EN 61000-6-4; Industrial Emissions
EN 50082-2; Industrial Immunity
EN 61326; Meas./Control/Lab., Industrial Requirements
EN 61000-6-2; Industrial Immunity
C- Tick
Australian Radiocommunications Act, compliant with:
AS/NZS CISPR 11; Industrial Emissions
1. Includes offset, gain, non-linearity and repeatability error terms.
2. Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing. Refer to Publication A10324, “Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines”.
Printed in U.S.A -0807
© Copyright 2007, ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Form A10321
Installation & Service Instructions
A10322
Serial Bus 24 VDC Analog Output
Modules, Series A (RPSSTACM12A,
RPSSTAVM12A)
ISSUED: August, 2007
Supersedes: None
RPSSTACM12A
! WARNING
To avoid unpredictable system behavior that can cause personal injury
and property damage:
• Disconnect electrical supply (when necessary) before installation,
servicing, or conversion.
• Disconnect air supply and depressurize all air lines connected to
this product before installation, servicing, or conversion.
• Operate within the manufacturer’s specified pressure, temperature,
and other conditions listed in these instructions.
• Medium must be moisture-free if ambient temperature is below
freezing.
• Service according to procedures listed in these instructions.
• Installation, service, and conversion of these products must be
performed by knowledgeable personnel who understand how
pneumatic products are to be applied.
• After installation, servicing, or conversion, air and electrical
supplies (when necessary) should be connected and the product
tested for proper function and leakage. If audible leakage is present,
or the product does not operate properly, do not put into use.
• Warnings and specifications on the product should not be
covered by paint, etc. If masking is not possible, contact your local
representative for replacement labels.
RPSSTACM12A
Analog Current Out
Female
Connector
M12-A
Female
Connector
M12-B
1
0
MOD
NET
0
LED
Indicators
1
RPSSTAVM12A
Safety Guide
RPSSTAVM12A
For more complete information on recommended application guidelines,
see the Installation Safety Guidelines section of Bulletin 600 (Form
A10309) or you can download the Installation Safety Guidelines at:
www.rosscontrols.com/rosslit.htm.
Analog Voltage Out
Female
Connector
M12-A
0
Female
Connector
M12-B
1
MOD
NET
0
LED
Indicators
1
! WARNING
FAILURE OR IMPROPER SELECTION OR IMPROPER USE OF THE
PRODUCTS AND/OR SYSTEMS DESCRIBED HEREIN OR RELATED
ITEMS CAN CAUSE DEATH, PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY
DAMAGE.
Introduction
Follow these instructions when installing, operating, or servicing the
product.
Serial Bus 24 VDC Analog Output Modules,
Series A
(RPSSTACM12A, RPSSTAVM12A)
The sealed IP67 housing of these modules requires no enclosure.
(Note that environmental requirements other than IP67 may require
an additional appropriate housing.) I/O connectors are sealed M12
style. The mounting base ships with the module. The RPSSTACM12A
and RPSSTAVM12A modules are shown below.
This document and other information from ROSS CONTROLS, its
subsidiaries and authorized distributors provide product and/or system
options for further investigation by users having technical expertise. It
is important that you analyze all aspects of your application, including
consequences of any failure and review the information concerning the
product or systems in the current product catalog. Due to the variety of
operating conditions and applications for these products or systems, the
user, through its own analysis and testing, is solely responsible for making
the final selection of the products and systems and assuring that all
performance, safety and warning requirements of the application are met.
The products described herein, including without limitation, product features,
specifications, designs, availability and pricing, are subject to change by
ROSS CONTROLS and its subsidiaries at any time without notice.
EXTRA COPIES OF THESE INSTRUCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE FOR INCLUSION
IN EQUIPMENT / MAINTENANCE MANUALS THAT UTILIZE THESE PRODUCTS.
CONTACT YOUR LOCAL REPRESENTATIVE.
www.rosscontrols.com
1
Serial Bus 24 VDC Analog Output Modules, Series A (RPSSTACM12A, RPSSTAVM12A)
Important User Information
ATTENTION
Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from
those of electromechanical equipment. Safety Guidelines for the
Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls
(Form #A10325) (available online at www.rosscontrols.com/rosslit.
htm), describes some important differences between solid state
equipment and hard-wired electromechanical devices. Because
of these differences, and also because of the wide variety of uses
for solid state equipment, all persons responsible for applying this
equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of
this equipment is acceptable.
In no event will ROSS CONTROLS® be responsible or liable for
indirect or consequential damages to persons or property resulting
from the use or application of this equipment.
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely
for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and
requirements associated with any particular installation, ROSS
CONTROLS cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use
based on the examples and diagrams.
No patent liability is assumed by ROSS CONTROLS with respect
to use of information, circuits, equipment, or software described in
this manual.
Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without
written permission of ROSS CONTROLS is prohibited.
Throughout this manual we use notes to make you aware of safety
considerations.
WARNING
!
Identifies information about practices or
circumstances that can cause an explosion in
a hazardous environment, which may lead to
personal injury or death, property damage, or
economic loss.
IMPORTANT
Identifies information that is critical for successful
application and understanding of the product.
ATTENTION
Identifies information about practices or
circumstances that can lead to personal injury
or death, property damage, or economic loss.
Attentions help you:
• Identify a Hazard
• Avoid a Hazard
• Recognize the Consequence
!
SHOCK HAZARD Labels may be located on or inside the
equipment to alert people that dangerous
voltage may be present.
BURN HAZARD
2
Labels may be located on or inside the
equipment to alert people that surfaces may be
dangerous temperatures.
!
Environment and Enclosure
This equipment is intended for use in overvoltage Category
II applications (as defined in IEC publication 60664-1), at
altitudes up to 2000 meters without derating. This equipment
is considered Group 1, Class A industrial equipment according
to IEC/CISPR Publication 11. Without appropriate precautions,
there may be potential difficulties ensuring electromagnetic
compatibility in other environments due to conducted as well as
radiated disturbance. This equipment is supplied as “enclosed”
equipment. It should not require additional system enclosure
when used in locations consistent with the enclosure type
ratings stated in the Specifications section of this publication.
Subsequent sections of this publication may contain additional
information regarding specific enclosure type ratings, beyond
what this product provides, that are required to comply with
certain product safety certifications.
NOTE: See NEMA Standards publication 250 and IEC
publication 60529, as applicable, for explanations of the
degrees of protection provided by different types of enclosure.
Also, see the appropriate sections in this publication, as well
as the publication A10324 (“Industrial Automation Wiring and
Grounding Guidelines”), for additional installation requirements
pertaining to this equipment.
ATTENTION
!
Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
This equipment is sensitive to electrostatic discharge, which
can cause internal damage and affect normal operation. Follow
these guidelines when you handle this equipment:
• Touch a grounded object to discharge potential static.
• Wear an approved grounding wrist strap.
• Do not touch connectors or pins on component boards.
• Do not touch circuit components inside the equipment.
• If available, use a static-safe workstation.
• When not in use, store the equipment in appropriate staticsafe packaging.
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Serial Bus 24 VDC Analog Output Modules, Series A (RPSSTACM12A, RPSSTAVM12A)
Mount the I/O Base
To mount the I/O base on a wall or panel, use the screw holes
provided in the base.
IMPORTANT
The I/O module must be mounted on a grounded metal mounting
plate or other conductive surface.
A mounting illustration for the base with an adapter is shown below.
1.9
(47.2)
2.0
(50)
0.87
(22)
2.0
(50)
3.13
(79.4)
5.98*
(151.9)
Adapter
2.39
(60.7)
4.02
(102)
4.32
(109.8)
1.81
(46)
Inches
(mm)
Drill and Tap
for M4 Screw
3.02
(76.6)
5.39
(137.0)
Drill and Tap
for M6 Screw
* Depending on the type and number of manifolds, this dimension
may vary. Consult Ross for specific information.
Install the Mounting Base as Follows:
1. Lay out the required points as shown above in the drilling
dimension drawing.
2. Drill the necessary holes for #8 (M4) machine or self-tapping
screws.
3. Mount the base using #8 (M4) screws.
4. Ground the system using the ground lug connection. (The ground
lug connection is also a mounting hole.)
Mounting Base
KeyswitchSet to position 4
for the analog
output
modules
Ground Lug
Connection
Latching Mechanism
www.rosscontrols.com
3
Serial Bus 24 VDC Analog Output Modules, Series A (RPSSTACM12A, RPSSTAVM12A)
Install the Analog Output Module
To Install the Analog Output Module, Proceed as Follows:
1. Using a bladed screwdriver, rotate the keyswitch on the mounting
base clockwise until the number 4 aligns with the notch in the
base.
2. Position the module vertically above the mounting base. The
module will bridge two bases.
Module Will Bridge Two Bases
RPSSTACM12A
Analog Current Out
0
1
MOD
NET
0
1
3. Push the module down until it engages the latching mechanism. You
will hear a clicking sound when the module is properly engaged.
The locking mechanism will lock the module to the base.
Remove the Analog Output Module From the
Mounting Base
To Remove the Module from the Mounting Base:
1. Put a flat blade screwdriver into the slot of the orange latching
mechanism.
2. Push the screwdriver toward the I/O module to disengage the
latch. The module will lift up off the base.
3. Pull the module off of the base.
4
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Serial Bus 24 VDC Analog Output Modules, Series A (RPSSTACM12A, RPSSTAVM12A)
Wire the Analog Output Modules
Following are wiring instructions for the analog output modules.
RPSSTACM12A and RPSSTAVM12A
(view into connector)
Pin 1 - Output 0 (M12-A)
Output 1 (M12-B)
Pin 2 - 24VDC
Pin 3 - Common
Pin 4 - Common
Pin 5 - No Connect
ATTENTION
!
IMPORTANT
Analog modules have ear th grounded metal rings.
This should be considered when choosing shielded cables and
grounding techniques.
Make sure all connectors and caps are securely tightened to
properly seal the connections against leaks and maintain IP67
requirements.
Communicate With Your Module
I/O messages are sent to (consumed) and received from (produced)
the I/O modules. These messages are mapped into the processor’s
memory. These I/O analog output modules produce 2 bytes of input
data (scanner Rx - fault status). They consume 4 bytes of output
data (scanner Tx).
Default Data Map for the Analog Output Modules
RPSSTACM12A and RPSSTAVM12A
Message Size: 2 Bytes
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
Produces
High Byte-Channel 1 Status Low Byte-Channel 0 Status
(Scanner Rx)
Not
H L C C
Not
H L C C
Used
C C M F
Used
C C M F
A A
A A
Where: CF = Channel Fault Status, 0 = no error, 1 = fault
CM = Calibration Mode; 0 = normal, 1 = calibration mode
LCA = Low Clamp Alarm; 0 = no error, 1 = fault
HCA = High Clamp Alarm; 0 = no error, 1 = fault
RPSSTACM12A and RPSSTAVM12A
Message Size: 4 Bytes
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
Consumes
Output Channel 0 High Byte Output Channel 0 Low Byte
(scanner Tx) Output Channel 1 High Byte Output Channel 1 Low Byte
EDS File Requirements
The EDS files are available online at
www.rosscontrols.com/rosslit.htm.
www.rosscontrols.com
5
Serial Bus 24 VDC Analog Output Modules, Series A (RPSSTACM12A, RPSSTAVM12A)
Add Analog Output Modules to RSLogix
5000 I/O Configuration
If your RSLogic 5000 is Version 15.X or greater:
• Choose the RPSSTACM12A module from the list of Parker
modules.
To add your analog output modules to RSLogix 5000 I/O configuration,
follow these steps:
• In RSLogix 5000:
- For ControlNet, highlight the RPSSCCNA or 1738-ACNR
(Shown), right click and select New Module.
• Enter a name and click OK.
- For EtherNet/IP, highlight the RPSSCENA or 1738-AENT
(Shown), right click and select New Module.
• Notice that the RPSSTACM12A is now under the I/O
6
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Serial Bus 24 VDC Analog Output Modules, Series A (RPSSTACM12A, RPSSTAVM12A)
configuration.
If your RSLogic 5000 is Version 13.X:
• Choose the equivalent Rockwell Automation module from the list
of modules.
Troubleshoot With the Indicators
RPSSTACM12A
RPSSTACM12A
Analog Current Out
1
0
Module Status Indicator
MOD
Network Status Indicator
NET
0
1
Indication
I/O Status Indicators
Probable Cause
Module Status
Serial Bus Modules
RPSSTACM12A
RPSSTAVM12A
Off
No power applied to device
Green
Device operating normally
Flashing Green
Device needs commissioning due to
missing, incomplete, or incorrect
configuration
Equivalent Rockwell Automation
1738 ArmorPoint Modules
1738-OE2CM12
Flashing Red
Recoverable fault
1738-OE2VM12
Red
Unrecoverable fault may require device replacement
Flashing Red/Green
Device is in self-test
Indication
Probable Cause
• Enter a name (optional), slot number, and comm. format. Make
sure to choose Compatible Module for Electronic Keying
setting.
Network Status
• Choose Next to set RPI.
• Choose Finish. Notice that the analog output module is now
under the I/O configuration
Off
Device is not on line:
- Device has not completed
dup_MAC-id test.
- Device not powered - check module
status indicator.
Flashing Green
Device is on line but has no
connections in the established state.
Green
Device is on line and has
connections in the established state.
Flashing Red
One or more I/O connections in
timed-out state.
Red
Critical link failure - failed
communication device. Device
detected error that prevents it from
communicating on the network.
Flashing Red/Green
Communication faulted device - the
device has detected a network access
error and is in communication faulted
state. Device has received and accepted
an Identity Communication Faulted
Request - long protocol message.
Indication
Probable Cause
I/O Status
RPSSTAVM12A
Off
RPSSTACM12A
Module in CAL mode
Solid Green
Device operating normally
Flashing Green
Channel being calibrated
Flashing Red
Low or High Clamp
Open wire or no power
Solid Red
No power
Not used
www.rosscontrols.com
7
Serial Bus 24 VDC Analog Output Modules, Series A (RPSSTACM12A, RPSSTAVM12A)
Specifications - Following are specifications for the RPSSTACM12A and RPSSTAVM12A analog output modules.
Analog Output Modules
Outputs per Module
Output Voltage
2 single ended, nonisolated
RPSSTAVM12A
0V output until communication established
0-10V (user configurable) (0.0V under, +5V over)
±10V (user configurable) (-0.5V under, +5V over)
0 mA output until communication established
4-20 mA user configurable
0-20 mA user configurable
RPSSTACM12A
13 bits - over 0-21 mA
2.5μA/cnt (average value - typical range: 2.3-2.7μA/cnt)
RPSSTAVM12A
14 bits (13 plus sign)
1.28μV/cnt in unipolar or bipolar mode
0.1% Full Scale @ 25°C
RPSSTACM12A - 30ppm/°C
RPSSTAVM12A - 5ppm/°C
RPSSTACM12A - 0-750kΩ
RPSSTAVM12A - 3 mA
Digital to analog converter
RPSSTACM12A - 16μs
RPSSTAVM12A - 20μs
Signed integer
Output Current
Resolution
Absolute Accuracy1
Accuracy Drift w/Temp.
Resistive Load on mA Output
Current Load on Output, Maximum
Conversion Type
Conversion Rate
Data Format
General Specifications
Calibration
Step Response to 63% of FS
Indicators
Factory calibrated
24μs
1 green/red module status indicator, logic side
1 green/red network status indicator, logic side
2 green/red output status indicators, logic side
4
75 mA @ 5VDC
RPSSTACM12A
750Ω load on each output - 1.23W
0Ω load on each output - 1.83W
RPSSTAVM12A
1.0W
RPSSTACM12A
750Ω load on each output - 4.19 BTU/hr.
0Ω load on each output - 6.24 BTU/hr.
RPSSTAVM12A
3.4 BTU/hr.
50V rms
Tested at 1250VAC rms for 60s
Keyswitch Position
PointBus Current
Power Dissipation - Maximum at 28.8VDC
Thermal Dissipation - Maximum at 28.8VDC
Isolation Voltage
(continuous voltage withstand rating)
External DC Power
Supply Voltage
Voltage Range
Supply Current
Dimensions
Operating Temperature
Imperial (Metric)
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity
Shock
Vibration
ESD Immunity
Radiated RF Immunity
EFT/B Immunity
Surge Transient Immunity
Conducted RF Immunity
Emissions
Enclosure Type Rating
Mounting Base Screw Torque
Wiring Category2
Weight
Imperial (Metric)
Certifications: (when product is marked)
24VDC nominal
10-28.8VDC
RPSSTACM12A: 70 mA @ 24VDC (including outputs @ 20 mA)
RPSSTAVM12A: 35 mA @ 24VDC (including outputs @ 3 mA)
1.25H x 2.63W x 4.25D (31.75H x 66.80W x 107.95D)
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad, Operating Cold),
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd, Operating Dry Heat),
IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb, Operating Thermal Shock):
-20 to 60°C (-4 to 140°F)
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab, Un-packaged Non-operating Cold),
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb, Un-packaged Non-operating Dry Heat),
-40 to 85°C (-40 to 185°F)
IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db, Un-packaged Non-operating Damp Heat):
5 to 95% non-condensing
IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea, Unpackaged Shock): Operating 30g, Non-operating 50g
IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc, Operating): 5g @ 10 to 500Hz
IEC 61000-4-2:
6kV contact discharges
8kV air discharges
IEC 61000-4-3:
10V/m with 1kHz sine-wave 80%AM from 30MHz to 2000MHz
10V/m with 200Hz 50% Pulse 100%AM at 900Mhz
10V/m with 200Hz 50% Pulse 100%AM at 1890Mhz
IEC 61000-4-4: ±3kV at 5kHz on signal ports
IEC 61000-4-5: ±2kV line-earth(CM) on shielded ports
IEC 61000-4-6: 10Vrms with 1kHz sine-wave 80%AM from 150kHz to 80MHz
CSPR 11: Group 1, Class A
Meets IP65/66/67 (when marked)
#8 screw, 7.5 in. lbs. in Aluminum, 16 in. lbs. in Steel
1 - on signal ports
0.637 lb. (0.289 kg)
c-UL-us
UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment, certified for US and Canada
CE
European Union 89/336/EEC EMC Directive, compliant with:
EN 61000-6-4; Industrial Emissions
EN 50082-2; Industrial Immunity
EN 61326; Meas./Control/Lab., Industrial Requirements
EN 61000-6-2; Industrial Immunity
C- Tick
Australian Radiocommunications Act, compliant with:
AS/NZS CISPR 11; Industrial Emissions
1. Includes offset, gain, non-linearity and repeatability error terms.
2. Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing. Refer to Publication A10324, “Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines”.
Printed in U.S.A -0807
© Copyright 2007, ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Form A10322
Installation & Service Instructions
A10317
Serial Bus 24VDC Expansion Power
Supply, Series A (RPSSSE24A)
ISSUED: August, 2007
Supersedes: None
! WARNING
To avoid unpredictable system behavior that can cause personal injury
and property damage:
• Disconnect electrical supply (when necessary) before installation,
servicing, or conversion.
• Disconnect air supply and depressurize all air lines connected to
this product before installation, servicing, or conversion.
• Operate within the manufacturer’s specified pressure, temperature,
and other conditions listed in these instructions.
• Medium must be moisture-free if ambient temperature is below
freezing.
• Service according to procedures listed in these instructions.
• Installation, service, and conversion of these products must be
performed by knowledgeable personnel who understand how
pneumatic products are to be applied.
• After installation, servicing, or conversion, air and electrical
supplies (when necessary) should be connected and the product
tested for proper function and leakage. If audible leakage is present,
or the product does not operate properly, do not put into use.
• Warnings and specifications on the product should not be
covered by paint, etc. If masking is not possible, contact your local
representative for replacement labels.
RPSSSE24A
24VDC
Expansion
Power Supply
RPSSSE24A
24V dc Power Supply
Wire
Marker
System
Power
Field
Power
Mini 7/8”
Power
Connector
LED
Indicators
P
AO
UW
XE
R
ATTENTION
Safety Guide
For more complete information on recommended application guidelines,
see the Installation Safety Guidelines section of Bulletin 600 (Form
A10309) or you can download the Installation Safety Guidelines at:
www.rosscontrols.com/rosslit.htm.
Introduction
Follow these instructions when installing, operating, or servicing the
product.
Serial Bus 24VDC Expansion Power Supply,
Series A
!
Do not connect 120/240VAC to the RPSSSE24A terminals.
Damage to the supply will result.
ATTENTION
!
You can only use the RPSSSE24A expansion power unit with
the I/O adapters.
(RPSSSE24A)
The 24VDC expansion power supply unit (RPSSSE24A) passes
24VDC field power to the I/O modules to the right of the power supply.
This unit extends the backplane bus power for up to 17 I/O modules to
the right of the supply and creates a new field voltage partition.
The expansion power supply also separates field power from I/O
modules to the left of the unit, effectively providing functional and
logical partitioning for:
• separating field power between input and output modules
• separating field power to the analog and digital modules
• grouping modules to perform a specific task or function
You can use multiple expansion power units with the I/O adapters
to assemble a full system. For instance, if you are using the
RPSSCDM12A or RPSSCDM18PA adapter, you may use a
RPSSSE24A expansion power unit to add additional modules in 5 to
17 module increments. For example, if you had a 36 module system
with a I/O adapter, you would have two RPSSSE24A expansion
power units to provide more PointBus current for modules to the
right of the supply.
! WARNING
FAILURE OR IMPROPER SELECTION OR IMPROPER USE OF THE
PRODUCTS AND/OR SYSTEMS DESCRIBED HEREIN OR RELATED
ITEMS CAN CAUSE DEATH, PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY
DAMAGE.
This document and other information from ROSS CONTROLS, its
subsidiaries and authorized distributors provide product and/or system
options for further investigation by users having technical expertise. It
is important that you analyze all aspects of your application, including
consequences of any failure and review the information concerning the
product or systems in the current product catalog. Due to the variety of
operating conditions and applications for these products or systems, the
user, through its own analysis and testing, is solely responsible for making
the final selection of the products and systems and assuring that all
performance, safety and warning requirements of the application are met.
The products described herein, including without limitation, product features,
specifications, designs, availability and pricing, are subject to change by
ROSS CONTROLS and its subsidiaries at any time without notice.
EXTRA COPIES OF THESE INSTRUCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE FOR INCLUSION
IN EQUIPMENT / MAINTENANCE MANUALS THAT UTILIZE THESE PRODUCTS.
CONTACT YOUR LOCAL REPRESENTATIVE.
Serial Bus 24VDC Expansion Power Supply, Series A (RPSSSE24A)
Important User Information
ATTENTION
Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from
those of electromechanical equipment. Safety Guidelines for the
Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls
(Form #A10325) (available online at www.rosscontrols.com/rosslit.
htm), describes some important differences between solid state
equipment and hard-wired electromechanical devices. Because
of these differences, and also because of the wide variety of uses
for solid state equipment, all persons responsible for applying this
equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of
this equipment is acceptable.
In no event will ROSS CONTROLS® be responsible or liable for
indirect or consequential damages to persons or property resulting
from the use or application of this equipment.
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely
for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and
requirements associated with any particular installation, ROSS
CONTROLS cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use
based on the examples and diagrams.
No patent liability is assumed by ROSS CONTROLS with respect
to use of information, circuits, equipment, or software described in
this manual.
Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without
written permission of ROSS CONTROLS is prohibited.
Throughout this manual we use notes to make you aware of safety
considerations.
WARNING
!
Identifies information about practices or
circumstances that can cause an explosion in
a hazardous environment, which may lead to
personal injury or death, property damage, or
economic loss.
IMPORTANT
Identifies information that is critical for successful
application and understanding of the product.
ATTENTION
Identifies information about practices or
circumstances that can lead to personal injury
or death, property damage, or economic loss.
Attentions help you:
• Identify a Hazard
• Avoid a Hazard
• Recognize the Consequence
!
SHOCK HAZARD Labels may be located on or inside the
equipment to alert people that dangerous
voltage may be present.
BURN HAZARD
2
Labels may be located on or inside the
equipment to alert people that surfaces may be
dangerous temperatures.
!
Environment and Enclosure
This equipment is intended for use in overvoltage Category
II applications (as defined in IEC publication 60664-1), at
altitudes up to 2000 meters without derating. This equipment
is considered Group 1, Class A industrial equipment according
to IEC/CISPR Publication 11. Without appropriate precautions,
there may be potential difficulties ensuring electromagnetic
compatibility in other environments due to conducted as well as
radiated disturbance. This equipment is supplied as “enclosed”
equipment. It should not require additional system enclosure
when used in locations consistent with the enclosure type
ratings stated in the Specifications section of this publication.
Subsequent sections of this publication may contain additional
information regarding specific enclosure type ratings, beyond
what this product provides, that are required to comply with
certain product safety certifications.
NOTE: See NEMA Standards publication 250 and IEC
publication 60529, as applicable, for explanations of the
degrees of protection provided by different types of enclosure.
Also, see the appropriate sections in this publication, as well
as the publication A10324 (“Industrial Automation Wiring and
Grounding Guidelines”), for additional installation requirements
pertaining to this equipment.
ATTENTION
!
Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
This equipment is sensitive to electrostatic discharge, which
can cause internal damage and affect normal operation. Follow
these guidelines when you handle this equipment:
• Touch a grounded object to discharge potential static.
• Wear an approved grounding wrist strap.
• Do not touch connectors or pins on component boards.
• Do not touch circuit components inside the equipment.
• If available, use a static-safe workstation.
• When not in use, store the equipment in appropriate staticsafe packaging.
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Serial Bus 24VDC Expansion Power Supply, Series A (RPSSSE24A)
Mount the I/O Base
To mount the I/O base on a wall or panel, use the screw holes
provided in the base.
IMPORTANT
The I/O module must be mounted on a grounded metal mounting
plate or other conductive surface.
A mounting illustration for the base with an adapter is shown below.
1.9
(47.2)
2.0
(50)
0.87
(22)
2.0
(50)
3.13
(79.4)
5.98*
(151.9)
Adapter
2.39
(60.7)
4.02
(102)
4.32
(109.8)
1.81
(46)
Inches
(mm)
Drill and Tap
for M4 Screw
3.02
(76.6)
5.39
(137.0)
Drill and Tap
for M6 Screw
* Depending on the type and number of manifolds, this dimension
may vary. Consult Ross for specific information.
Install the Mounting Base as Follows:
1. Lay out the required points as shown above in the drilling
dimension drawing.
2. Drill the necessary holes for #8 (M4) machine or self-tapping
screws.
3. Mount the base using #8 (M4) screws.
4. Ground the system using the ground lug connection. (The ground
lug connection is also a mounting hole.)
Mounting Base
KeyswitchSet to position 1
for the RPSSSE24A
dc expansion
power supply
Ground Lug
Connection
Latching Mechanism
www.rosscontrols.com
3
Serial Bus 24VDC Expansion Power Supply, Series A (RPSSSE24A)
Install the 24VDC Expansion Power Supply
Wire the 24VDC Expansion Power Supply
To Install the Power Supply, Proceed as Follows:
1. Using a bladed screwdriver, rotate the keyswitch on the mounting
base clockwise until the number 1 aligns with the notch in the
base.
2. Position the power supply vertically above the mounting base.
The module will bridge two bases.
Following are wiring instructions for the 24VDC Expansion Power
Supply.
Module Will Bridge Two Bases
RPSSSE24A
Male In Connector (Mini 7/8”)
(view into connector)
Pin 1 - User Power +
Pin 2 - Adapter Power +
RPSSSE24A
24V dc Power Supply
Pin 3 - Adapter Power Pin 4 - User Power -
System
Power
Note: User power is the 24VDC power for field devices.
Adapter power is the 24VDC power for RPSSSE24A. It is
converted to 5VDC to power isysNet modules.
Field
Power
P
AO
UW
XE
R
3. Push the power supply down until it engages the orange latching
mechanism. You will hear a clicking sound when the power supply
is properly engaged. The locking mechanism will lock the power
supply to the base.
ATTENTION
!
Make sure all connectors and caps are securely tightened to
properly seal the connections against leaks and maintain IP67
requirements.
Remove the 24VDC Expansion Power Supply
From the Mounting Base
To Remove the Power Supply from the Mounting Base:
1. Put a flat blade screwdriver into the slot of the orange latching
mechanism.
2. Push the screwdriver toward the I/O module to disengage the
latch. The module will lift up off the base.
3. Pull the module off of the base.
Install a Replacement RPSSSE24A to an
Existing System
1. Remove the module to the right of the power supply from the
mounting base.
2. If you have not done so already, remove the existing power supply
from the mounting base.
3. Position the replacement power supply vertically above the
mounting base.
4. Push the power supply down until it engages the orange latching
mechanism. You will hear a clicking sound when the power supply
is properly engaged and locked to the base.
5. Place the module to the right of the power supply back onto the
mounting base.
4
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Serial Bus 24VDC Expansion Power Supply, Series A (RPSSSE24A)
Specifications
Following are specifications for the RPSSSE24A Power Supply.
24VDC Expansion Power Supply - RPSSSE24A
I/O Module Capacity
5 to 17 I/O modules depending on each module's current rating
Power Supply
In order to comply with CE Low Voltage Directives (LVD), you must use a Safety Extra Low
Voltage (SELV) or a Protected Extra Low Voltage (PELV) power supply to power the
adapter.
Inputs Voltage Rating
12VDC, 24VDC nominal
10-28.8VDC range
Operating Voltage
10-28.8VDC
Input Current, Maximum
6A for 10ms
Backplane Output Current
5VDC, 1.3A
Field Side Power Requirements, Maximum
24VDC (+20% = 28.8VDC) @ 400 mA
Indicators
1 Green Field Power Status Indicator
1 Green 5V System Power Indicator
Module Location
Between I/O modules in system
Breaks field power bus
PointBus Output Current
1A at 10-19.2V input; 1.3A at 19.2-28.8V input
Input Overvoltage Protection
Reverse polarity protected
Interruption
Output voltage will stay within specifications when input drops out for
10ms at 10V with maximum load
General Specifications
Power Consumption, Maximum
9.8W @ 28.8VDC
Power Dissipation, Maximum
3.0W @ 28.8VDC
Thermal Dissipation, Maximum
10.0 BTU/hr. @ 28.8VDC
Isolation Voltage
(continuous-voltage withstand rating)
50V rms
Tested at 1250VAC rms for 60s
Field Power Bus
Supply Voltage
Voltage Range
Supply Current
12VDC, 24VDC nominal
10-28.8VDC range
10A maximum
Dimensions
Inches (Millimeters)
1.25H x 2.63W x 4.25D (31.75H x 66.80W x 107.95D)
Operating Temperature
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad, Operating Cold),
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd, Operating Dry Heat),
IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb, Operating Thermal Shock):
-20 to 60°C (-4 to 140°F)
Storage Temperature
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab, Un-packaged Non-operating Cold),
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb, Un-packaged Non-operating Dry Heat),
-40 to 85°C (-40 to 185°F)
Relative Humidity
IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db, Un-packaged Non-operating Damp Heat):
5-95% non-condensing
Shock
IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea, Unpackaged Shock):
Operating 30g
Non-operating 50g
Vibration
IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc, Operating):
5g @ 10-500Hz
ESD Immunity
IEC 61000-4-2:
6kV contact discharges
8kV air discharges
Radiated RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-3:
10V/m with 1kHz sine-wave 80%AM from 30MHz to 2000MHz
10V/m with 200Hz 50% Pulse 100%AM at 900Mhz
10V/m with 200Hz 50% Pulse 100%AM at 1890Mhz
www.rosscontrols.com
5
Serial Bus 24VDC Expansion Power Supply, Series A (RPSSSE24A)
General Specifications (continued)
EFT/B Immunity
IEC 61000-4-4:
±4kV at 5kHz on power ports
Surge Transient Immunity
IEC 61000-4-5:
±1kV line-line(DM) and ±2kV line-earth(CM) on power ports
Conducted RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-6:
10Vrms with 1kHz sine-wave 80%AM from 150kHz to 80MHz
Emissions
CSPR 11:
Group 1, Class A
Enclosure Type Rating
Meets IP65/66/67 (when marked)
Mounting Base Screw Torque
#8 screw, 7.5 in. lbs. in Aluminum, 16 in. lbs. in Steel
Weight
0.637 lb. (0.289 kg)
Imperial (Metric)
1
Wiring Category
1 - on power ports
Keyswitch Position
1
Certifications: (when product is marked)
c-UL-us
UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment, certified for US and Canada
CE
European Union 89/336/EEC EMC Directive, compliant with:
EN 61000-6-4; Industrial Emissions
EN 50082-2; Industrial Immunity
EN 61326; Meas./Control/Lab., Industrial Requirements
EN 61000-6-2; Industrial Immunity
C-Tick
Australian Radiocommunications Act, compliant with:
AS/NZS CISPR 11; Industrial Emissions
1. Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing. Refer to Publication A10324, “Industrial Automation Wiring
and Grounding Guidelines”.
Printed in U.S.A -0807
© Copyright 2007, ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Form A10317
Installation & Service Instructions
A10318
Serial Bus 24 VDC Input Modules,
Series A
(RPSSN8M8A, RPSSN8M12A, RPSSN8M23A,
RPSSP8M8A, RPSSP8M12A, RPSSP8M23A)
ISSUED: August, 2007
Supersedes: None
RPSSN8M12A
! WARNING
To avoid unpredictable system behavior that can cause personal injury
and property damage:
• Disconnect electrical supply (when necessary) before installation,
servicing, or conversion.
• Disconnect air supply and depressurize all air lines connected to
this product before installation, servicing, or conversion.
• Operate within the manufacturer’s specified pressure, temperature,
and other conditions listed in these instructions.
• Medium must be moisture-free if ambient temperature is below
freezing.
• Service according to procedures listed in these instructions.
• Installation, service, and conversion of these products must be
performed by knowledgeable personnel who understand how
pneumatic products are to be applied.
• After installation, servicing, or conversion, air and electrical
supplies (when necessary) should be connected and the product
tested for proper function and leakage. If audible leakage is present,
or the product does not operate properly, do not put into use.
• Warnings and specifications on the product should not be
covered by paint, etc. If masking is not possible, contact your local
representative for replacement labels.
RPSSN8M12A
24V dc In
Female
Connector
M12-A
Female
Connector
M12-BFemale
0
2
1
3 MOD
NET
0
1
2
3
Female
Connector
M12-C
4
6
5
7
LED
Indicators
4
5
6
7
Female
Connector
M12-D
RPSSN8M23A
Safety Guide
RPSSN8M23A
24V dc In
For more complete information on recommended application guidelines,
see the Installation Safety Guidelines section of Bulletin 600 (Form
A10309) or you can download the Installation Safety Guidelines at:
www.rosscontrols.com/rosslit.htm.
Introduction
MOD
Follow these instructions when installing, operating, or servicing the
product.
NET
0
1
2
Serial Bus 24 VDC Input Modules, Series A
(RPSSN8M8A, RPSSN8M12A, RPSSN8M23A,
RPSSP8M8A, RPSSP8M12A, RPSSP8M23A)
The sealed IP67 housing of these modules requires no enclosure.
(Note that environmental requirements other than IP67 may require
an additional appropriate housing.) I/O connectors are sealed M8
(pico) or M12 (micro) or M23 styles. The mounting base ships with
the module.
RPSSN8M8A
Female
Connector
M8-A
Female
Connector
M8-C
Female
Connector
M8-E
1
2
3
Female
Connector
M8-B
MOD
NET
0
5
6
7
3
LED
Indicators
4
5
6
Female
Connector
M8-G
Female
Connector
M8-D
1
2
4
LED
Indicators
4
Female
M23
Connector
5
6
7
! WARNING
RPSSN8M8A
24V dc In
0
3
FAILURE OR IMPROPER SELECTION OR IMPROPER USE OF THE
PRODUCTS AND/OR SYSTEMS DESCRIBED HEREIN OR RELATED
ITEMS CAN CAUSE DEATH, PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY
DAMAGE.
This document and other information from ROSS CONTROLS, its
subsidiaries and authorized distributors provide product and/or system
options for further investigation by users having technical expertise. It
is important that you analyze all aspects of your application, including
consequences of any failure and review the information concerning the
product or systems in the current product catalog. Due to the variety of
operating conditions and applications for these products or systems, the
user, through its own analysis and testing, is solely responsible for making
the final selection of the products and systems and assuring that all
performance, safety and warning requirements of the application are met.
Connector
M8-F
The products described herein, including without limitation, product features,
specifications, designs, availability and pricing, are subject to change by
ROSS CONTROLS and its subsidiaries at any time without notice.
Female
Connector
M8-H
EXTRA COPIES OF THESE INSTRUCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE FOR INCLUSION
IN EQUIPMENT / MAINTENANCE MANUALS THAT UTILIZE THESE PRODUCTS.
CONTACT YOUR LOCAL REPRESENTATIVE.
7
Serial Bus 24 VDC Input Modules, Series A (RPSSN8M8A, RPSSN8M12A, RPSSN8M23A,RPSSP8M8A, RPSSP8M12A, RPSSP8M23A)
Important User Information
ATTENTION
Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from
those of electromechanical equipment. Safety Guidelines for the
Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls
(Form #A10325) (available online at www.rosscontrols.com/rosslit.
htm), describes some important differences between solid state
equipment and hard-wired electromechanical devices. Because
of these differences, and also because of the wide variety of uses
for solid state equipment, all persons responsible for applying this
equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of
this equipment is acceptable.
In no event will ROSS CONTROLS® be responsible or liable for
indirect or consequential damages to persons or property resulting
from the use or application of this equipment.
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely
for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and
requirements associated with any particular installation, ROSS
CONTROLS cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use
based on the examples and diagrams.
No patent liability is assumed by ROSS CONTROLS with respect
to use of information, circuits, equipment, or software described in
this manual.
Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without
written permission of ROSS CONTROLS is prohibited.
Throughout this manual we use notes to make you aware of safety
considerations.
WARNING
!
Identifies information about practices or
circumstances that can cause an explosion in
a hazardous environment, which may lead to
personal injury or death, property damage, or
economic loss.
IMPORTANT
Identifies information that is critical for successful
application and understanding of the product.
ATTENTION
Identifies information about practices or
circumstances that can lead to personal injury
or death, property damage, or economic loss.
Attentions help you:
• Identify a Hazard
• Avoid a Hazard
• Recognize the Consequence
!
SHOCK HAZARD Labels may be located on or inside the
equipment to alert people that dangerous
voltage may be present.
BURN HAZARD
2
Labels may be located on or inside the
equipment to alert people that surfaces may be
dangerous temperatures.
!
Environment and Enclosure
This equipment is intended for use in overvoltage Category
II applications (as defined in IEC publication 60664-1), at
altitudes up to 2000 meters without derating. This equipment
is considered Group 1, Class A industrial equipment according
to IEC/CISPR Publication 11. Without appropriate precautions,
there may be potential difficulties ensuring electromagnetic
compatibility in other environments due to conducted as well as
radiated disturbance. This equipment is supplied as “enclosed”
equipment. It should not require additional system enclosure
when used in locations consistent with the enclosure type
ratings stated in the Specifications section of this publication.
Subsequent sections of this publication may contain additional
information regarding specific enclosure type ratings, beyond
what this product provides, that are required to comply with
certain product safety certifications.
NOTE: See NEMA Standards publication 250 and IEC
publication 60529, as applicable, for explanations of the
degrees of protection provided by different types of enclosure.
Also, see the appropriate sections in this publication, as well
as the publication A10324 (“Industrial Automation Wiring and
Grounding Guidelines”), for additional installation requirements
pertaining to this equipment.
ATTENTION
!
Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
This equipment is sensitive to electrostatic discharge, which
can cause internal damage and affect normal operation. Follow
these guidelines when you handle this equipment:
• Touch a grounded object to discharge potential static.
• Wear an approved grounding wrist strap.
• Do not touch connectors or pins on component boards.
• Do not touch circuit components inside the equipment.
• If available, use a static-safe workstation.
• When not in use, store the equipment in appropriate staticsafe packaging.
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Serial Bus 24 VDC Input Modules, Series A (RPSSN8M8A, RPSSN8M12A, RPSSN8M23A,RPSSP8M8A, RPSSP8M12A, RPSSP8M23A)
Mount the I/O Base
To mount the I/O base on a wall or panel, use the screw holes
provided in the base.
IMPORTANT
The I/O module must be mounted on a grounded metal mounting
plate or other conductive surface.
A drilling dimensions mounting illustration for the base with an
adapter is shown below.
1.9
(47.2)
2.0
(50)
0.87
(22)
2.0
(50)
3.13
(79.4)
5.98*
(151.9)
Adapter
2.39
(60.7)
4.02
(102)
4.32
(109.8)
1.81
(46)
Inches
(mm)
Drill and Tap
for M4 Screw
3.02
(76.6)
5.39
(137.0)
Drill and Tap
for M6 Screw
* Depending on the type and number of manifolds, this dimension
may vary. Consult Ross for specific information.
Install the Mounting Base as Follows:
1. Lay out the required points as shown above in the drilling
dimension drawing.
2. Drill the necessary holes for #8 (M4) machine or self-tapping
screws.
3. Mount the base using #8 (M4) screws.
4. Ground the system using the ground lug connection. (The ground
lug connection is also a mounting hole.)
Mounting Base
KeyswitchSet to position 1
for the IsysNet
24VDC digital
input modules
Ground Lug
Connection
Latching Mechanism
www.rosscontrols.com
3
Serial Bus 24 VDC Input Modules, Series A (RPSSN8M8A, RPSSN8M12A, RPSSN8M23A,RPSSP8M8A, RPSSP8M12A, RPSSP8M23A)
Install the Digital Input Module
To Install the Digital Input Module, Proceed as Follows:
1. Using a bladed screwdriver, rotate the keyswitch on the mounting
base clockwise until the number 1 aligns with the notch in the base.
2. Position the module vertically above the mounting base. The
module will bridge two bases.
Module Will Bridge Two Bases
RPSSN8M12A
24V dc In
0
2
1
3
MOD
NET
0
1
2
3
4
6
5
7
4
5
6
7
3. Push the module down until it engages the latching mechanism. You
will hear a clicking sound when the module is properly engaged.
The locking mechanism will lock the module to the base.
Remove the Digital Input Module From the
Mounting Base
To Remove the Module from the Mounting Base:
1. Put a flat blade screwdriver into the slot of the orange latching
mechanism.
2. Push the screwdriver toward the I/O module to disengage the
latch. The module will lift up off the base.
3. Pull the module off of the base.
4
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Serial Bus 24 VDC Input Modules, Series A (RPSSN8M8A, RPSSN8M12A, RPSSN8M23A,RPSSP8M8A, RPSSP8M12A, RPSSP8M23A)
Wire the Input Modules
Following are wiring instructions for the digital input modules.
RPSSN8M8A
RPSSP8M8A
RPSSN8M23A
RPSSP8M23A
1
8
9
7
2
10
12
6
3
11
4
(view into connector)
Pin 1 - 24VDC
Pin 3 - Common
Pin 4 - Input 0 (M8-A)
Input 1 (M8-B)
Input 2 (M8-C)
Input 3 (M8-D)
Input 4 (M8-E)
Input 5 (M8-F)
Input 6 (M8-G)
Input 7 (M8-H)
Pin 1
Pin 2
Pin 3
Pin 4
Pin 5
Pin 6
-
5
(view into connector)
Pin 7 - Input 6
Pin 8 - Input 7
Pin 9 - Return (Com)
Pin 10 - Return (Com)
Pin 11 - 24VDC
Pin 12 - Chassis
Input 0
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5
RPSSN8M12A
RPSSP8M12A
Sink Input modules (RPSSN8) require PNP type input device.
Source Input modules (RPSSP8) require NPN type input device.
Wiring examples (RPSSN8M8A and RPSSP8M8A shown):
Common
Sink
Input
Module
Input
PNP
24 VDC
2-Wire
Input
Device
Digital Input Module
Common
Source
Input
Module
Input
NPN
24 VDC
2-Wire
Input
Device
Common
Sink
Input
Module
Input
PNP
24 VDC
3-Wire
Input
Device
Common
Source
Input
Module
(view into connector)
Pin 1 - 24VDC
Pin 2 - Input 1 (M12-A)
Pin 4 - Input 0 (M12-A)
Input 3 (M12-B)
Input 2 (M12-B)
Input 5 (M12-C)
Input 4 (M12-C)
Input 7 (M12-D)
Input 6 (M12-D)
Pin 3 - Common
Pin 5 - No Connect
Input Module
Part Number
8 Digital Inputs M12 (NPN Sinking - Requires
PNP Sourcing Input Device)
RPSSN8M12A
8 Digital Inputs M12 (PNP Sourcing -Requires
NPN Sinking Input Device)
RPSSP8M12A
8 Digital Inputs M8 (NPN Sinking - Requires
PNP Sourcing Input Device)
RPSSN8M8A
8 Digital Inputs M8 (PNP Sourcing - Requires
NPN Sinking Input Device)
RPSSP8M8A
8 Digital Inputs M23 12-Pin (PNP Sourcing Requires NPN Sinking Input Device)
RPSSP8M23A
8 Digital Inputs M23 12-Pin (NPN Sinking Requires PNP Sourcing Input Device)
RPSSN8M23A
ATTENTION
Input
NPN
24 VDC
3-Wire
Input
Device
!
Make sure all connectors and caps are securely tightened to
properly seal the connections against leaks and maintain IP67
requirements.
www.rosscontrols.com
5
Serial Bus 24 VDC Input Modules, Series A (RPSSN8M8A, RPSSN8M12A, RPSSN8M23A,RPSSP8M8A, RPSSP8M12A, RPSSP8M23A)
Communicate With Your Module
I/O messages are sent to (consumed) and received from (produced)
the I/O modules. These messages are mapped into the processor’s
memory. These I/O input modules produce 1 byte of input data
(scanner Rx - status). They do not consume I/O data (scanner Tx).
If your RSLogic 5000 is Version 15.X or greater:
• Choose the RPSSN8M8A module from the list of Parker
modules.
Default Data Map for the Input Modules
RPSSN8M8A, RPSSN8M12A, RPSSN8M23A,
RPSSP8M8A, RPSSP8M12A, RPSSP8M23A
Message Size: 1 Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Produces
Channel
Ch7 Ch6 Ch5 Ch4 Ch3 Ch2 Ch1 Ch0
(Scanner Rx)
Status
Where: 0 = OFF, 1 = ON
EDS File Requirements
The EDS files are available online at www.rosscontrols.com/rosslit.
htm.
Add 24 VDC Input Modules to RSLogix 5000
I/O Configuration
• Enter a name and click OK.
To add your input modules to RSLogix 5000 I/O configuration, follow
these steps:
• In RSLogix 5000:
- For ControlNet, highlight the RPSSCCNA or 1738-ACNR
(Shown), right click and select New Module.
- For EtherNet/IP, highlight the RPSSCENA or 1738-AENT
(Shown), right click and select New Module.
6
• Notice that the RPSSN8M8A is now under the I/O
configuration.
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Serial Bus 24 VDC Input Modules, Series A (RPSSN8M8A, RPSSN8M12A, RPSSN8M23A,RPSSP8M8A, RPSSP8M12A, RPSSP8M23A)
If your RSLogic 5000 is Version 13.X:
• Choose the equivalent Rockwell Automation module from the list
of modules.
Troubleshoot With the Indicators
RPSSN8M12A
RPSSN8M12A
24V dc In
0
2
1
3 MOD
NET
Module Status Indicator
Network Status Indicator
0
1
2
3
4
6
5
7
4
I/O Status Indicators
5
6
7
Serial Bus Modules
Equivalent Rockwell Automation
1738 ArmorPoint Modules
RPSSN8M8A
1738-IB8M8
RPSSN8M12A
1738-IB8M12
RPSSN8M23A
1738-IB8M23
RPSSP8M8A
1738-IV8M8
RPSSP8M12A
1738-IV8M12
RPSSP8M23A
1738-IV8M23
Indication
Module Status
Off
Green
Flashing Green
Flashing Red
Red
Flashing Red/Green
• Enter a name (optional), slot number, and communication format.
Make sure to choose Compatible Module for Electronic Keying
setting.
Indication
Network Status
Off
Flashing Green
Green
Flashing Red
Red
• Choose Next to set RPI.
• Choose Finish. Notice that the input module is now under the
I/O configuration
Flashing Red/Green
Indication
I/O Status
Off
Yellow
www.rosscontrols.com
Probable Cause
No power applied to device
Device operating normally
Device needs commissioning due
to missing, incomplete, or incorrect
configuration
Recoverable fault
Unrecoverable fault may require device replacement
Device is in self-test
Probable Cause
Device is not on line:
- Device has not completed
dup_MAC-id test.
- Device not powered
- check module status indicator.
Device is on line but has no
connections in the established state.
Device is on line and has connections
in the established state.
One or more I/O connections in
timed-out state.
Critical link failure - failed
communication device. Device
detected error that prevents it from
communicating on the network.
Communication faulted device - the
device has detected a network access
error and is in communication faulted
state. Device has received and accepted
an Identity Communication Faulted
Request - long protocol message.
Probable Cause
Input is in the off state
Input on
7
Serial Bus 24 VDC Input Modules, Series A (RPSSN8M8A, RPSSN8M12A, RPSSN8M23A,RPSSP8M8A, RPSSP8M12A, RPSSP8M23A)
Specifications - Following are specifications for the digital input modules.
Digital Input Modules
Inputs per Module
Voltage, Off-State Input, Maximum
Voltage, On-State Input,
Maximum
Minimum
Nominal
Current, Off-State Input, Maximum
Current, On-State Input,
Maximum
Minimum
Nominal
Input Impedance,
Maximum
Nominal
Input Delay Time OFF to ON
Input Delay Time, ON to OFF
Input Point Density
Field Power Bus Supply
Voltage Range
Nominal
Keyswitch Position
LED Indicators
RPSSN8M - 8 (1 group of 8) nonisolated, sinking
RPSSP8M - 8 (1 group of 8) nonisolated, sourcing
5VDC
28.8VDC
10VDC
24VDC
1.5 mA
5 mA
2 mA
4 mA @ 24VDC
4.7 kΩ
3.6 kΩ
0.5 ms hardware + (0-63 ms selectable1)
0.5 ms hardware + (0-63 ms selectable1)
2, 4, or 8
10 to 28.8VDC
24VDC
1
2, 4, or 8 yellow input status, logic side
1 green/red network status, logic side
1 green/red module status, logic side
Point Bus Current, Maximum
75 mA @ 5VDC
Power Dissipation, Maximum
RPSSN8M - 1.6W @ 28.8VDC
Thermal Dissipation, Maximum
RPSSN8M - 5.5 BTU/hr. @ 28.8VDC
Isolation Voltage
50V rms
(continuous-voltage withstand rating)
Tested at 1250VAC rms for 60s
Dimensions
Imperial (Metric) 1.25H x 2.63W x 4.25D (31.75H x 66.80W x 107.95D)
Operating Temperature
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad, Operating Cold),
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd, Operating Dry Heat),
IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb, Operating Thermal Shock):
-20 to 60°C (-4 to 140°F)
Storage Temperature
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab, Un-packaged Non-operating Cold),
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb, Un-packaged Non-operating Dry Heat),
-40 to 85°C (-40 to 185°F)
Relative Humidity
IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db, Un-packaged Non-operating Damp Heat): 5 to 95% non-condensing
Shock
IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea, Unpackaged Shock):
Operating 30g
Non-operating 50g
Vibration
IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc, Operating): 5g @ 10 to 500Hz
ESD Immunity
IEC 61000-4-2:
6kV contact discharges
8kV air discharges
Radiated RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-3:
10V/m with 1kHz sine-wave 80%AM from 30MHz to 2000MHz
10V/m with 200Hz 50% Pulse 100%AM at 900Mhz
10V/m with 200Hz 50% Pulse 100%AM at 1890Mhz
EFT/B Immunity
IEC 61000-4-4: ±3kV at 5kHz on signal ports
Surge Transient Immunity
IEC 61000-4-5: ±1kV line-line(DM) and ±2kV line-earth(CM) on signal ports
Conducted RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-6: 10Vrms with 1kHz sine-wave 80%AM from 150kHz to 80MHz
Emissions
CSPR 11: Group 1, Class A
Enclosure Type Rating
Meets IP65/66/67 (when marked)
Mounting Base Screw Torque
#8 screw, 7.5 in. lbs. in Aluminum, 16 in. lbs. in Steel
Weight
Imperial (Metric) 0.64 lb. (0.29 kg)
1 - on signal ports
Wiring Category2
Certifications:
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment,
(when product is marked)
certified for US and Canada
CE
European Union 89/336/EEC EMC Directive, compliant with:
EN 61000-6-4; Industrial Emissions
EN 50082-2; Industrial Immunity
EN 61326; Meas./Control/Lab., Industrial Requirements
EN 61000-6-2; Industrial Immunity
C- Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act, compliant with:
AS/NZS CISPR 11; Industrial Emissions
1. Input OFF to ON or ON to OFF delay is time from a valid input signal to recognition by the module.
2. Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing. Refer to Publication A10324, “Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines”.
Printed in U.S.A -0807
© Copyright 2007, ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Form A10318
Installation & Service Instructions
A10319
Serial Bus 24 VDC Output
Modules, Series A (RPSST8M23A,
RPSST8M12A, RPSST8M8A)
ISSUED: August, 2007
Supersedes: None
! WARNING
RPSST8M12A
To avoid unpredictable system behavior that can cause personal injury
and property damage:
• Disconnect electrical supply (when necessary) before installation,
servicing, or conversion.
• Disconnect air supply and depressurize all air lines connected to
this product before installation, servicing, or conversion.
• Operate within the manufacturer’s specified pressure, temperature,
and other conditions listed in these instructions.
• Medium must be moisture-free if ambient temperature is below
freezing.
• Service according to procedures listed in these instructions.
• Installation, service, and conversion of these products must be
performed by knowledgeable personnel who understand how
pneumatic products are to be applied.
• After installation, servicing, or conversion, air and electrical
supplies (when necessary) should be connected and the product
tested for proper function and leakage. If audible leakage is present,
or the product does not operate properly, do not put into use.
• Warnings and specifications on the product should not be
covered by paint, etc. If masking is not possible, contact your local
representative for replacement labels.
RPSST8M12A
24V dc Out
Female
Connector
M12-A
Female
Connector
M12-B
0
2
1
3 MOD
NET
0
1
2
Female
Connector
M12-C
LED
Indicators
3
4
6
5
7
4
5
6
7
Female
Connector
M12-D
RPSST8M8A
Safety Guide
For more complete information on recommended application guidelines,
see the Installation Safety Guidelines section of Bulletin 600 (Form
A10309) or you can download the Installation Safety Guidelines at:
www.rosscontrols.com/rosslit.htm.
RPSST8M8A
24V dc Out
1
Female
Connector
M8-A
0
Follow these instructions when installing, operating, or servicing the
product.
Female
Connector
M8-C
2
4
5
Serial Bus 24 VDC Output Modules, Series A
Female
Connector
M8-E
Female
Connector
M8-G
6
7
Introduction
Female
Connector
M8-B
Female
Connector
M8-D
MOD
3
NET
0
1
2
(RPSST8M23A, RPSST8M12A, RPSST8M8A)
The sealed IP67 housing of these modules requires no enclosure.
(Note that environmental requirements other than IP67 may require
an additional appropriate housing.) I/O connectors are sealed M8
(pico) or M12 (micro) or M23 styles. The mounting base ships with
the module. The RPSST8M23A, RPSST8M12A, and RPSST8M8A
modules are shown below.
4
5
6
7
Female
Connector
M8-F
Female
Connector
M8-H
! WARNING
RPSST8M23A
FAILURE OR IMPROPER SELECTION OR IMPROPER USE OF THE
PRODUCTS AND/OR SYSTEMS DESCRIBED HEREIN OR RELATED
ITEMS CAN CAUSE DEATH, PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY
DAMAGE.
RPSST8M23A
24V dc Out
MOD
NET
0
Female
Connector
M23
LED
Indicators
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
LED
Indicators
This document and other information from ROSS CONTROLS, its
subsidiaries and authorized distributors provide product and/or system
options for further investigation by users having technical expertise. It
is important that you analyze all aspects of your application, including
consequences of any failure and review the information concerning the
product or systems in the current product catalog. Due to the variety of
operating conditions and applications for these products or systems, the
user, through its own analysis and testing, is solely responsible for making
the final selection of the products and systems and assuring that all
performance, safety and warning requirements of the application are met.
The products described herein, including without limitation, product features,
specifications, designs, availability and pricing, are subject to change by
ROSS CONTROLS and its subsidiaries at any time without notice.
EXTRA COPIES OF THESE INSTRUCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE FOR INCLUSION
IN EQUIPMENT / MAINTENANCE MANUALS THAT UTILIZE THESE PRODUCTS.
CONTACT YOUR LOCAL REPRESENTATIVE.
Serial Bus 24 VDC Output Modules, Series A (RPSST8M23A, RPSST8M12A, RPSST8M8A)
Important User Information
ATTENTION
Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from
those of electromechanical equipment. Safety Guidelines for the
Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls
(Form #A10325) (available online at www.rosscontrols.com/rosslit.
htm), describes some important differences between solid state
equipment and hard-wired electromechanical devices. Because
of these differences, and also because of the wide variety of uses
for solid state equipment, all persons responsible for applying this
equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of
this equipment is acceptable.
In no event will ROSS CONTROLS® be responsible or liable for
indirect or consequential damages to persons or property resulting
from the use or application of this equipment.
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely
for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and
requirements associated with any particular installation, ROSS
CONTROLS cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use
based on the examples and diagrams.
No patent liability is assumed by ROSS CONTROLS with respect
to use of information, circuits, equipment, or software described in
this manual.
Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without
written permission of ROSS CONTROLS is prohibited.
Throughout this manual we use notes to make you aware of safety
considerations.
WARNING
!
Identifies information about practices or
circumstances that can cause an explosion in
a hazardous environment, which may lead to
personal injury or death, property damage, or
economic loss.
IMPORTANT
Identifies information that is critical for successful
application and understanding of the product.
ATTENTION
Identifies information about practices or
circumstances that can lead to personal injury
or death, property damage, or economic loss.
Attentions help you:
• Identify a Hazard
• Avoid a Hazard
• Recognize the Consequence
!
SHOCK HAZARD Labels may be located on or inside the
equipment to alert people that dangerous
voltage may be present.
BURN HAZARD
2
Labels may be located on or inside the
equipment to alert people that surfaces may be
dangerous temperatures.
!
Environment and Enclosure
This equipment is intended for use in overvoltage Category
II applications (as defined in IEC publication 60664-1), at
altitudes up to 2000 meters without derating. This equipment
is considered Group 1, Class A industrial equipment according
to IEC/CISPR Publication 11. Without appropriate precautions,
there may be potential difficulties ensuring electromagnetic
compatibility in other environments due to conducted as well as
radiated disturbance. This equipment is supplied as “enclosed”
equipment. It should not require additional system enclosure
when used in locations consistent with the enclosure type
ratings stated in the Specifications section of this publication.
Subsequent sections of this publication may contain additional
information regarding specific enclosure type ratings, beyond
what this product provides, that are required to comply with
certain product safety certifications.
NOTE: See NEMA Standards publication 250 and IEC
publication 60529, as applicable, for explanations of the
degrees of protection provided by different types of enclosure.
Also, see the appropriate sections in this publication, as well
as the publication A10324 (“Industrial Automation Wiring and
Grounding Guidelines”), for additional installation requirements
pertaining to this equipment.
ATTENTION
!
Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
This equipment is sensitive to electrostatic discharge, which
can cause internal damage and affect normal operation. Follow
these guidelines when you handle this equipment:
• Touch a grounded object to discharge potential static.
• Wear an approved grounding wrist strap.
• Do not touch connectors or pins on component boards.
• Do not touch circuit components inside the equipment.
• If available, use a static-safe workstation.
• When not in use, store the equipment in appropriate staticsafe packaging.
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Serial Bus 24 VDC Output Modules, Series A (RPSST8M23A, RPSST8M12A, RPSST8M8A)
Mount the I/O Base
To mount the I/O base on a wall or panel, use the screw holes
provided in the base.
IMPORTANT
The I/O module must be mounted on a grounded metal mounting
plate or other conductive surface.
A mounting illustration for the base with an adapter is shown below.
1.9
(47.2)
2.0
(50)
0.87
(22)
2.0
(50)
3.13
(79.4)
5.98*
(151.9)
Adapter
2.39
(60.7)
4.02
(102)
4.32
(109.8)
1.81
(46)
Inches
(mm)
Drill and Tap
for M4 Screw
3.02
(76.6)
5.39
(137.0)
Drill and Tap
for M6 Screw
* Depending on the type and number of manifolds, this dimension
may vary. Consult Ross for specific information.
Install the Mounting Base as Follows:
1. Lay out the required points as shown above in the drilling
dimension drawing.
2. Drill the necessary holes for #8 (M4) machine or self-tapping
screws.
3. Mount the base using #8 (M4) screws.
4. Ground the system using the ground lug connection. (The ground
lug connection is also a mounting hole.)
Mounting Base
KeyswitchSet to position 1
for the RPSST8M
digital output
modules
Ground Lug
Connection
Latching Mechanism
www.rosscontrols.com
3
Serial Bus 24 VDC Output Modules, Series A (RPSST8M23A, RPSST8M12A, RPSST8M8A)
Install the Digital Output Module
To Install the Digital Output Module, Proceed as Follows:
1. Using a bladed screwdriver, rotate the keyswitch on the mounting
base clockwise until the number 1 aligns with the notch in the
base.
2. Position the module vertically above the mounting base. The
module will bridge two bases.
Module Will Bridge Two Bases
RPSST8M12A
24V dc Out
0
2
1
3
MOD
NET
0
1
2
3
4
6
5
7
4
5
6
7
3. Push the module down until it engages the latching mechanism. You
will hear a clicking sound when the module is properly engaged.
The locking mechanism will lock the module to the base.
Remove the Digital Output Module From the
Mounting Base
To Remove the Module from the Mounting Base:
1. Put a flat blade screwdriver into the slot of the orange latching
mechanism.
2. Push the screwdriver toward the I/O module to disengage the
latch. The module will lift up off the base.
3. Pull the module off of the base.
4
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Serial Bus 24 VDC Output Modules, Series A (RPSST8M23A, RPSST8M12A, RPSST8M8A)
Wire the Output Modules
Following are wiring instructions for the digital output modules.
RPSST8M23A
1
RPSST8M8A
8
9
7
2
10
12
6
3
11
4
5
(view into connector)
(view into connector)
Pin 1 - Output 0
Pin 7 - Output 6
Pin 1 - 24VDC
Pin 2 - Output 1
Pin 8 - Output 7
Pin 3 - Common
Pin 3 - Output 2
Pin 9 - Return (Com)
Pin 4 - Output 3
Pin 10 - Return (Com)
Pin 5 - Output 4
Pin 11 - 24VDC
Pin 6 - Output 5
Pin 12 - Chassis
Pin 4 - Output 0 (M8-A)
Output 1 (M8-B)
Output 2 (M8-C)
Output 3 (M8-D)
Output 4 (M8-E)
Output 5 (M8-F)
Output 6 (M8-G)
Output 7 (M8-H)
RPSST8M12A
ATTENTION
!
Make sure all connectors and caps are securely tightened to
properly seal the connections against leaks and maintain IP67
requirements.
(view into connector)
Pin 1 - 24VDC
Pin 2 - Output 1 (M12-A)
Output 3 (M12-B)
Output 5 (M12-C)
Output 7 (M12-D)
Pin 4 - Output 0 (M12-A)
Output 2 (M12-B)
Output 4 (M12-C)
Output 6 (M12-D)
Pin 3 - Common
Pin 5 - No Connect
Communicate With Your Module
I/O messages are sent to (consumed) and received from (produced)
the I/O modules. These messages are mapped into the processor’s
memory. These I/O output modules produce 1 byte of input data
(scanner Rx - status). They consume 1 byte of I/O data (scanner Tx).
Default Data Map for the Output Modules
RPSST8M23A, RPSST8M12A, RPSST8M8A
Message Size: 1 Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Produces
Ch7 Ch6 Ch5 Ch4 Ch3 Ch2 Ch1 Ch0 Channel
(Scanner Rx)
Status
Consumes Ch7 Ch6 Ch5 Ch4 Ch3 Ch2 Ch1 Ch0 Output
(Scanner Tx)
State
Where: Channel Status 0 = no error, 1 = error;
Output State 0 = OFF, 1 = ON
EDS File Requirements
The EDS files are available online at www.rosscontrols.com/rosslit.htm.
www.rosscontrols.com
5
Serial Bus 24 VDC Output Modules, Series A (RPSST8M23A, RPSST8M12A, RPSST8M8A)
Add 24 VDC Output Modules to RSLogix
5000 I/O Configuration
If your RSLogic 5000 is Version 15.X or greater:
• Choose the RPSST8M12A module from the list of Parker
modules.
To add your output modules to RSLogix 5000 I/O configuration,
follow these steps:
• In RSLogix 5000:
- For ControlNet, highlight the RPSSCCNA or 1738-ACNR
(Shown), right click and select New Module.
• Enter a name and click OK.
- For EtherNet/IP, highlight the RPSSCENA or 1738-AENT
(Shown), right click and select New Module.
• Notice that the RPSST8M12A is now under the I/O
configuration.
6
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Serial Bus 24 VDC Output Modules, Series A (RPSST8M23A, RPSST8M12A, RPSST8M8A)
Troubleshoot With the Indicators
If your RSLogic 5000 is Version 13.X:
RPSST8M12A
• Choose the equivalent Rockwell Automation module from the list
of modules.
RPSST8M12A
24V dc Out
0
2
1
3 MOD
NET
Module Status Indicator
Network Status Indicator
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
4
I/O Status Indicators
5
6
7
Serial Bus Modules
Equivalent Rockwell Automation
1738 ArmorPoint Modules
RPSST8M8A
1738-OB8EM8
RPSST8M12A
1738-OB8EM12
RPSST8M23A
1738-OB8EM23*
Indication
Module Status
Off
Green
Flashing Green
Flashing Red
Red
* 1738-OB8EM23 profile will be available in RSLogix 5000 v15.
To use 1738-OB8EM23 in RSLogix 5000 v13, choose
1738-OB8EM12 profile and disable keying.
• Enter a name (optional), slot number, and communication format.
Make sure to choose Compatible Module for Electronic Keying
setting.
Flashing Red/Green
Indication
Network Status
Off
Flashing Green
Green
Flashing Red
Red
Flashing Red/Green
• Choose Next to set RPI.
• Choose Finish. Notice that the output module is now under the
I/O configuration
Indication
I/O Status
Off
Yellow
Flashing Red
Red
www.rosscontrols.com
Probable Cause
No power applied to device
Device operating normally
Device needs commissioning due to
missing, incomplete, or incorrect
configuration
Recoverable fault
Unrecoverable fault may require device replacement
Device is in self-test
Probable Cause
Device is not on line:
- Device has not completed
dup_MAC-id test.
- Device not powered - check module
status indicator.
Device is on line but has no
connections in the established state.
Device is on line and has
connections in the established state.
One or more I/O connections in
timed-out state.
Critical link failure - failed
communication device. Device
detected error that prevents it from
communicating on the network.
Communication faulted device - the
device has detected a network access
error and is in communication faulted
state. Device has received and accepted
an Identity Communication Faulted
Request - long protocol message.
Probable Cause
Output is inactive
Output is active and under control
Open circuit detection. No load.
(Off-State only)
Short circuit detected. (On-State only)
7
Serial Bus 24 VDC Output Modules, Series A (RPSST8M23A, RPSST8M12A, RPSST8M8A)
Specifications - Following are specifications for the digital output modules.
Digital Output Modules
Outputs per Module
Voltage Drop, On-State Output, Maximum
Voltage, Off-State Output, Maximum
Voltage, On-State Output,
Maximum
Minimum
Nominal
Current Leakage, Off-State Output, Maximum
Current, On-State Output Minimum
Output Current Rating
Output Delay Time OFF to ON, Maximum1
Output Delay Time, ON to OFF, Maximum1
Output Point Density
Output Surge Current, Maximum
External DC Power Supply Current
External DC Power Supply Voltage Range
External DC Power Supply Voltage Nominal
Keyswitch Position
LED Indicators
PointBus Current, Maximum
Power Dissipation, Maximum
Thermal Dissipation, Maximum
Isolation Voltage
(continuous-voltage withstand rating)
Dimensions (includes I/O module
Inches
and mounting base)
(Millimeters)
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity
Shock
Vibration
ESD Immunity
Radiated RF Immunity
EFT/B Immunity
Surge Transient Immunity
Conducted RF Immunity
Emissions
Enclosure Type Rating
Mounting Base Screw Torque
Wiring Category2
Weight Imperial (Metric)
Certifications:
(when product is marked)
8 (1 group of 8) nonisolated, sourcing
0.2VDC (sourcing modules)
0.7VDC (sinking module)
28.8VDC
28.8VDC
10VDC
24VDC
0.5 mA
1.0 mA per channel
1.0 A per channel, not to exceed 3.0 A maximum per module
0.1 ms
0.1 ms
2, 4, 8
2 A for 10 ms, repeatable every 3 seconds
32 mA
10 to 28.8VDC
24VDC
1
2, 4, or 8 yellow/red output status, logic side
1 green/red network status, logic side
1 green/red module status, logic side
75 mA @ 5VDC
RPSST8M - 2.0W @ 28.8VDC
RPSST8M - 6.8 BTU/hr. @ 28.8VDC
50V rms
Tested at 1250VAC rms for 60s
4.72H x 2.82W x 1.65D
(120H x 72W x 42D)
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad, Operating Cold),
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd, Operating Dry Heat),
IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb, Operating Thermal Shock):
-20 to 60°C (-4 to 140°F)
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab, Un-packaged Non-operating Cold),
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb, Un-packaged Non-operating Dry Heat),
-40 to 85°C (-40 to 185°F)
IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db, Un-packaged Non-operating Damp Heat):
5 to 95% non-condensing
IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea, Unpackaged Shock):
Operating 30g
Non-operating 50g
IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc, Operating):
5g @ 10 to 500Hz
IEC 61000-4-2:
6kV contact discharges
8kV air discharges
IEC 61000-4-3:
10V/m with 1kHz sine-wave 80%AM from 30MHz to 2000MHz
10V/m with 200Hz 50% Pulse 100%AM at 900Mhz
10V/m with 200Hz 50% Pulse 100%AM at 1890Mhz
IEC 61000-4-4: ±3kV at 5kHz on signal ports
IEC 61000-4-5: ±1kV line-line(DM) and ±2kV line-earth(CM) on signal ports
IEC 61000-4-6: 10Vrms with 1kHz sine-wave 80%AM from 150kHz to 80MHz
CSPR 11: Group 1, Class A
Meets IP65/66/67 (when marked)
#8 screw, 7.5 in. lbs. in Aluminum, 16 in. lbs. in Steel
1 - on signal ports
0.64 lb. (0.29 kg)
c-UL-us
UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment,
certified for US and Canada
CE
European Union 89/336/EEC EMC Directive, compliant with:
EN 61000-6-4; Industrial Emissions
EN 50082-2; Industrial Immunity
EN 61326; Meas./Control/Lab., Industrial Requirements
EN 61000-6-2; Industrial Immunity
C- Tick
Australian Radiocommunications Act, compliant with: AS/NZS CISPR 11;
Industrial Emissions
1. OFF to ON or ON to OFF delay is time from a valid output “on” or “off” signal to output energization or de-energization.
2. Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing. Refer to Publication A10324, “Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines”.
Printed in U.S.A -0807
© Copyright 2007, ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Form A10319
Installation & Service Instructions
A10312
Serial Bus 32 Point Valve Driver,
Series A (RPSSV32A)
ISSUED: August, 2007
Supersedes: None
!
WARNING
To avoid unpredictable system behavior that can cause personal injury
and property damage:
• Disconnect electrical supply (when necessary) before installation,
servicing, or conversion.
• Disconnect air supply and depressurize all air lines connected to this
product before installation, servicing, or conversion.
• Operate within the manufacturer’s specified pressure, temperature,
and other conditions listed in these instructions.
• Medium must be moisture-free if ambient temperature is below
freezing.
• Service according to procedures listed in these instructions.
• Installation, service, and conversion of these products must be
performed by knowledgeable personnel who understand how
pneumatic products are to be applied.
• After installation, servicing, or conversion, air and electrical supplies
(when necessary) should be connected and the product tested for
proper function and leakage. If audible leakage is present, or the
product does not operate properly, do not put into use.
• Warnings and specifications on the product should not be covered by
paint, etc. If masking is not possible, contact your local representative
for replacement labels.
Introduction
Follow these instructions when installing, operating, or servicing the
product.
Serial Bus 32 Point Valve Driver, Series A
(RPSSV32A)
The sealed IP67 housing of these modules requires no enclosure.
(Note that environmental requirements other than IP67 may require
an additional appropriate housing.) The RPSSV32A module is shown
below.
The RPSSV32A valve driver module provides an interface between the
serial bus system and the valve assembly. This module will always be
the last module on the serial bus. It controls 32 digital outputs at 24VDC.
Depending on valve selection, it can control up to 32 single solenoid
valves or 16 double solenoid valves.
RPSSV32A
S
A
V32
S
O
PSS
R
Mod
lt
Fau
Net
Safety Guide
For more complete information on recommended application guidelines,
see the Installation Safety Guidelines section of Bulletin 600 (Form
A10309) or you can download the Installation Safety Guidelines at:
www.rosscontrols.com/rosslit.htm.
Outputs
1- 24
Connector
Outputs
25- 32
Connector
! WARNING
FAILURE OR IMPROPER SELECTION OR IMPROPER USE OF THE
PRODUCTS AND/OR SYSTEMS DESCRIBED HEREIN OR RELATED
ITEMS CAN CAUSE DEATH, PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY
DAMAGE.
This document and other information from ROSS CONTROLS, its
subsidiaries and authorized distributors provide product and/or system
options for further investigation by users having technical expertise. It
is important that you analyze all aspects of your application, including
consequences of any failure and review the information concerning the
product or systems in the current product catalog. Due to the variety of
operating conditions and applications for these products or systems, the
user, through its own analysis and testing, is solely responsible for making
the final selection of the products and systems and assuring that all
performance, safety and warning requirements of the application are met.
The products described herein, including without limitation, product features,
specifications, designs, availability and pricing, are subject to change by
ROSS CONTROLS and its subsidiaries at any time without notice.
EXTRA COPIES OF THESE INSTRUCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE FOR INCLUSION
IN EQUIPMENT / MAINTENANCE MANUALS THAT UTILIZE THESE PRODUCTS.
CONTACT YOUR LOCAL REPRESENTATIVE.
Serial Bus 32 Point Valve Driver, Series A (RPSSV32A)
Important User Information
ATTENTION
Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from
those of electromechanical equipment. Safety Guidelines for the
Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls
(Form #A10325) (available online at www.rosscontrols.com/rosslit.
htm), describes some important differences between solid state
equipment and hard-wired electromechanical devices. Because
of these differences, and also because of the wide variety of uses
for solid state equipment, all persons responsible for applying this
equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of
this equipment is acceptable.
In no event will ROSS CONTROLS® be responsible or liable for
indirect or consequential damages to persons or property resulting
from the use or application of this equipment.
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely
for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and
requirements associated with any particular installation, ROSS
CONTROLS cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use
based on the examples and diagrams.
No patent liability is assumed by ROSS CONTROLS with respect
to use of information, circuits, equipment, or software described in
this manual.
Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without
written permission of ROSS CONTROLS is prohibited.
Throughout this manual we use notes to make you aware of safety
considerations.
WARNING
!
Identifies information about practices or
circumstances that can cause an explosion in
a hazardous environment, which may lead to
personal injury or death, property damage, or
economic loss.
IMPORTANT
Identifies information that is critical for successful
application and understanding of the product.
ATTENTION
Identifies information about practices or
circumstances that can lead to personal injury
or death, property damage, or economic loss.
Attentions help you:
• Identify a Hazard
• Avoid a Hazard
• Recognize the Consequence
!
SHOCK HAZARD Labels may be located on or inside the
equipment to alert people that dangerous
voltage may be present.
BURN HAZARD
2
Labels may be located on or inside the
equipment to alert people that surfaces may be
dangerous temperatures.
!
Environment and Enclosure
This equipment is intended for use in overvoltage Category
II applications (as defined in IEC publication 60664-1), at
altitudes up to 2000 meters without derating. This equipment
is considered Group 1, Class A industrial equipment according
to IEC/CISPR Publication 11. Without appropriate precautions,
there may be potential difficulties ensuring electromagnetic
compatibility in other environments due to conducted as well as
radiated disturbance. This equipment is supplied as “enclosed”
equipment. It should not require additional system enclosure
when used in locations consistent with the enclosure type
ratings stated in the Specifications section of this publication.
Subsequent sections of this publication may contain additional
information regarding specific enclosure type ratings, beyond
what this product provides, that are required to comply with
certain product safety certifications.
NOTE: See NEMA Standards publication 250 and IEC
publication 60529, as applicable, for explanations of the
degrees of protection provided by different types of enclosure.
Also, see the appropriate sections in this publication, as well
as the publication A10324 (“Industrial Automation Wiring and
Grounding Guidelines”), for additional installation requirements
pertaining to this equipment.
ATTENTION
!
Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
This equipment is sensitive to electrostatic discharge, which
can cause internal damage and affect normal operation. Follow
these guidelines when you handle this equipment:
• Touch a grounded object to discharge potential static.
• Wear an approved grounding wrist strap.
• Do not touch connectors or pins on component boards.
• Do not touch circuit components inside the equipment.
• If available, use a static-safe workstation.
• When not in use, store the equipment in appropriate staticsafe packaging.
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Serial Bus 32 Point Valve Driver, Series A (RPSSV32A)
Mount the I/O Base
To mount the I/O base on a wall or panel, use the screw holes
provided in the base.
IMPORTANT
The I/O module must be mounted on a grounded metal mounting
plate or other conductive surface.
* Depending on the type and number of manifolds, this dimension
may vary. Consult Ross for specific information.
A mounting illustration for the base with an adapter is shown below.
1.9
(47.2)
2.0
(50)
0.87
(22)
2.0
(50)
3.13
(79.4)
5.98*
(151.9)
Adapter
2.39
(60.7)
4.02
(102)
4.32
(109.8)
1.81
(46)
Inches
(mm)
3.02
(76.6)
Drill and Tap
for M4 Screw
5.39
(137.0)
Drill and Tap
for M6 Screw
Install the 32 Point Valve Driver
To Install the 32 Point Valve Driver, Proceed as Follows:
1. Assemble the valve driver to the manifold interface plate using
four M4 screws, torqued 11 to 13 in. lbs.
2. Plug the 32 point valve driver onto the previous mounting base
or communication adapter.
Wire the 32 Point Valve Driver
Following are wiring instructions for the 32 point valve driver.
Use the appropriate harness assembly based on your manifold
wiring/interconnect system.
Harness Assembly Kit Numbers
Series W66, Size 0
Series W66, Size 00
Series W65, Size 1
Series W65, Size 2
Series W65, Size 3
1 to 24 Outputs
25 to 32 Outputs
RPS5624P
RPS5632P
RPS4024P
RPS4032P
Plug the 2X15 connector into the valve driver module for 1-24 outputs.
If you have more than 24 outputs, plug the 2X5 connector into the
valve driver module for 25-32 outputs.
Outputs
1- 24
Connector
Outputs
25- 32
Connector
Plug the 2X10 and 1X10 connectors into the interconnect board in
the valve manifold.
EDS File Requirements
The EDS file is available online at www.rosscontrols.com/rosslit.htm
ATTENTION
!
Make sure all four screws are securely tightened to properly seal
the connections against leaks and maintain IP67 requirements.
www.rosscontrols.com
3
Serial Bus 32 Point Valve Driver, Series A (RPSSV32A)
Setup the 32 Point Valve Driver in ControlNet
Communicate With Your Module
I/O messages are sent to (consumed) and received from (produced)
the I/O modules. These messages are mapped into the processor’s
memory. The 32 point valve driver produces 1 byte of input data
(scanner Rx - status), and consumes 1 byte of I/O data (scanner
Tx).
Default Data Map for the 32 Point Valve Driver
RPSSV32A
Message Size: 1 Byte
Byte
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Produce 0 Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Produce 1 Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Produce 2 Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Produce 3 Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Produce 4
Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault
28-31 24-27 20-23 16-19 12-15 8-11
Fault
4-7
Fault
0-3
Step 1: Load 32 Point Valve Driver EDS file to RSLinx
• Download EDS file from www.rosscontrols.com/rosslit.htm
• On your computer, follow Start Rockwell Software RSLinx
Tools EDS Hardware Installation Tool to load the EDS file to
RSLinx
Step 2: Add Controller and Communication Module to the
RSLogix 5000 I/O Configuration
• Add a controller and a communication module (Serial Bus
RPSSCCNA or Rockwell 1738-ACNR) to I/O configuration. Reference
pages 4-1 through 4-7 of Rockwell publication 1734-UM008 (follow
www.rockwell.com Support Support Overview Online
manuals and literature I/O 1734 POINT and 1734D POINT
Block I/O and find POINT I/O ControlNet Adapter User Manual) for
a similar setup procedure.
Step 3: Add 32 Point Valve Driver to RSLogix 5000
I/O Configuration.
If your RSLogic 5000 is Version 15.X or greater:
• Highlight the RPSSCCNA under I/O configuration, right click and
select New Module.
• Choose the RPSSV32A module from the list of Parker modules.
Consume 0 Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Consume 1 Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Consume 2 Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Consume 3 Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
• Enter a name (optional) and click OK.
Setup the 32 Point Valve Driver in DeviceNet
Step 1: Load 32 Point Valve Driver EDS file to RSLinx
• Download EDS file from www.rosscontrols.com/rosslit.htm
• On your computer, follow Start Rockwell Software RSLinx
Tools EDS Hardware Installation Tool to load the EDS file to
RSLinx
Step 2: Configure the DeviceNet Scanner Subnet
• Reference Chapter 4 of the Serial Bus DeviceNet Adapters User
Manual Bulletin 601 (Form #A10311) for detailed information. Make
sure to add RPSSV32A to the DeviceNet Adapter’s scanlist.
Step 3: Add the Serial Bus DeviceNet Adapter to the DeviceNet
Scanner’s Scanlist
• Reference Chapter 5 of the Serial Bus DeviceNet Adapters User
Manual Bulletin 601 (Form #A10311) for detailed information.
Step 4: Use 32 Point Valve Driver in RSLogix 5000
• Access RPSSV32A data via DeviceNet Scanner in the ladder logic
program.
4
Notice that the 32 Point Valve Drive Module is now under I/O
Configuration.
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Serial Bus 32 Point Valve Driver, Series A (RPSSV32A)
If your RSLogic 5000 is Version 13.X:
• Highlight the 1738-ACNR under I/O configuration, right click and
select New Module.
• Choose the Generic 1738 module from the list of Allen-Bradley
modules.
Setup the 32 Point Valve Driver in EtherNet/IP
Step 1: Load 32 Point Valve Driver EDS file to RSLinx
• Download EDS file from www.rosscontrols.com/rosslit.htm
• On your computer, follow Start Rockwell Software RSLinx
Tools EDS Hardware Installation Tool to load the EDS file to
RSLinx
Step 2: Set IP Address for EtherNet/IP Scanner and Adapter
• Set IP address using Rockwell BootP/DHCP utility for
EtherNet/IP scanner and PSSCENA or 1738-AENT adapter.
Reference pages 3-7 through 3-10 of Rockwell publication
1734-UM011 (follow www.rockwell.com Support Support
Overview Online manuals and literature I/O 1734 POINT and
1734D POINT Block I/O and find POINT I/O Ethernet Adapter User
Manual) for similar information.
Step 3: Add EtherNet/IP Scanner and Adapter to RSLogix
5000 I/O configuration.
• Add EtherNet/IP scanner and PSSCENA or 1738-AENT adapter to
I/O configuration. Reference pages 4-4 to 4-8 of Rockwell publication
1734-UM011 for similar information.
• Enter a name (optional), an appropriate slot number and the
connection parameters as shown in this screen capture.
Step 4: Add 32 Point Valve Driver to RSLogix 5000
I/O Configuration.
If your RSLogic 5000 is Version 15.X or greater:
• Highlight the PSSCENA under I/O configuration, right click and select
New Module.
• Choose the RPSSV32A module from the list of Ross modules.
• Choose Next to set RPI.
• Choose Finish. Notice that the 32 Point Valve Driver Module is now
under the I/O configuration.
Step 4: Download the Program to the Controller and
Configure the RPSSCCNA or 1738-ACNR Adapter.
• Reference pages 4-11 through 4-15 of Rockwell publication 1734UM008 for similar setup procedure.
• Enter a name (optional) and click OK.
Step 5: Schedule I/O Module Connections
• Reference pages 4-15 through 4-19 of Rockwell publication 1734UM008 for similar setup procedure.
Step 6: Access Module Data via the RPSSCCNA or 1738-ACNR
Adapter.
• Make sure the 32 outputs of RPSSV32A appear in Controller Tags.
Use the information in the ladder logic program to access module
data.
• Reference pages 4-19 through 4-22 of Rockwell publication 1734UM008 for similar information.
Notice that the 32 Point Valve Drive Module is now under I/O
Configuration.
www.rosscontrols.com
5
Serial Bus 32 Point Valve Driver, Series A (RPSSV32A)
If your RSLogic 5000 is Version 13.X:
• Highlight the 1738-AENT under I/O configuration, right click and
select New Module.
• Choose the Generic 1738 module from the list of Allen-Bradley
modules.
Setup the 32 Point Valve Driver in Profibus
Step 1: Configure Valve Driver Module in SST Profibus
Configuration Utility
Note: SST-PFB-CLX is used here for example. For different
Profibus scanners, refer to appropriate documentation for setup
information.
• Download GSD file from www.rosscontrols.com/rosslit.htm
• In SST Profibus Configuration Utility, follow Library Add GSD to
load the GSD file to SST Profibus.
• In SST Profibus Configuration Utility, follow Browse Search for
devices to load the GSD file to SST Profibus
• Right click on the found device, follow GSD files and click on
appropriate GSD for RPSSV32A.
• Add RPSSV32A as slave to SST-PFB-CLX master.
• Detailed information can be found in the SST-PFB-CLX User Guide
(Ver. 1.4 715-0022), which is available on www.woodhead.com.
Step 2: Add SST Profibus Scanner in RSLogix 5000
I/O Configuration
• Add SST-PFB-CLX scanner I/O configuration. Reference pages 36
to 39 of the SST-PFB-CLX User Guide, for detailed information.
• Notice that the SST-PFB-CLX scanner is now under the I/O
configuration.
• Enter a name (optional), an appropriate slot number and the
connection parameters as shown in this screen capture.
Step 3: Access Module Data via the SST-PFB-CLX Scanner
and Create Ladder Program.
• Reference Chapter 7 of the SST-PFB-CLX User Guide for addressing
information.
• Choose Next to set RPI.
• Choose Finish. Notice that the 32 Point Valve Driver Module is now
under the I/O configuration.
Step 5: Access Module Data via the RPSSCENA or 1738-AENT
Adapter and Create Ladder Program.
• Make sure the 32 outputs of RPSSV32A appear in Controller Tags.
Use the information in the ladder logic program to access module
data.
• Reference pages 4-13 through 4-14 of Rockwell publication 1734UM011 for similar information.
Step 6: Download the Program to the Controller
• Reference pages 4-13 through 4-14 of Rockwell publication 1734UM011 for similar information.
6
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Serial Bus 32 Point Valve Driver, Series A (RPSSV32A)
Troubleshoot With the Indicators
RPSSV32A
ROSS
RPSSV32A
Module Status
Indicator
Mod
Net
Fault
Network Status
Indicator
Output Fault Status
Indicator
Indication
Probable Cause
Module Status
Off
No power applied to device
Green
Device operating normally
Flashing Green
Device needs commissioning due to missing, incomplete, or incorrect configuration
Flashing Red
Recoverable fault
Red
Unrecoverable fault - may require device replacement
Flashing Red/Green
Device is in self-test
Indication
Probable Cause
Network Status
Off
Device is not on line:
- Device has not completed dup_MAC-id test.
- Device not powered - check module status indicator.
Flashing Green
Device is on line but has no connections in the established state.
Green
Device is on line and has connections in the established state.
Flashing Red
One or more I/O connections in timed-out state.
Red
Critical link failure - failed communication device. Device detected error that prevents it from
communicating on the network.
Flashing Red/Green
Communication faulted device - the device has detected a network access error and is in
communication faulted state. Device has received and accepted an Identity Communication
Faulted Request - long protocol message.
Indication
Probable Cause
Output Fault Status
Off
Outputs operating normally
Red
Over current, short circuit or over temperature detected on one or more outputs. (On-State only)
www.rosscontrols.com
7
Serial Bus 32 Point Valve Driver, Series A (RPSSV32A)
Specifications – Following are specifications for the 32 point valve driver.
32 Point Valve Driver
Outputs per Module
Voltage Drop, On-State Output, Maximum
Voltage, Off-State Output, Maximum
Voltage, On-State Output,
Maximum
Minimum
Nominal
Output Current Rating
Output Surge Current, Maximum
Current Leakage, Off-State Output, Maximum
Current, On-State Output Minimum
Output Delay Time OFF to ON, Maximum1
Output Delay Time, ON to OFF, Maximum1
External DC Power Supply Voltage Range
External DC Power Supply Voltage Nominal
General Specifications
LED Indicators
PointBus Current, Maximum
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity
Shock
Vibration
ESD Immunity
Radiated RF Immunity
EFT/B Immunity
Surge Transient Immunity
Conducted RF Immunity
Emissions
Enclosure Type Rating
Mounting Base Screw Torque
Wiring Category2
Certifications:
(when product is marked)
32, sourcing
0.2VDC
28.8VDC
28.8VDC
10VDC
24VDC
200 mA per channel, not to exceed 6.0 A per module
0.5 A for 10 ms, repeatable every 3 seconds
0.1 mA
200 mA per channel
0.1 ms
0.1 ms
10 to 28.8VDC
24VDC
1 output status
1 green/red network status, logic side
1 green/red module status, logic side
75 mA @ 5VDC
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad, Operating Cold),
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd, Operating Dry Heat),
IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb, Operating Thermal Shock):
-20 to 60°C (-4 to 140°F)
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab, Un-packaged Non-operating Cold),
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb, Un-packaged Non-operating Dry Heat),
-40 to 85°C (-40 to 185°F)
IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db, Un-packaged Non-operating Damp Heat):
5 to 95% non-condensing
IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea, Unpackaged Shock):
Operating 30g
Non-operating 50g
IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc, Operating):
5g @ 10 to 500Hz
IEC 61000-4-2:
6kV contact discharges
8kV air discharges
IEC 61000-4-3:
10V/m with 1kHz sine-wave 80%AM from 30MHz to 2000MHz
10V/m with 200Hz 50% Pulse 100%AM at 900Mhz
10V/m with 200Hz 50% Pulse 100%AM at 1890Mhz
IEC 61000-4-4:
±3kV at 5kHz on signal ports
IEC 61000-4-5:
±1kV line-line(DM) and ±2kV line-earth(CM) on signal ports
IEC 61000-4-6:
10Vrms with 1kHz sine-wave 80%AM from 150kHz to 80MHz
CSPR 11:
Group 1, Class A
Meets IP65/66/67 (when marked)
#8 screw, 7.5 in. lbs. in Aluminum, 16 in. lbs. in Steel
1 - on signal ports
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment,
certified for US and Canada
CE
European Union 89/336/EEC EMC Directive,
compliant with:
EN 61000-6-4; Industrial Emissions
EN 50082-2; Industrial Immunity
EN 61326; Meas./Control/Lab., Industrial Requirements
EN 61000-6-2; Industrial Immunity
C- Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act, compliant with:
AS/NZS CISPR 11; Industrial Emissions
1. OFF to ON or ON to OFF delay is time from a valid output “on” or “off” signal to output energization or de-energization.
2. Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing. Refer to Publication A10324, “Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines”.
Printed in U.S.A -0807
© Copyright 2007, ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Form A10312
Installation & Service Instructions
A10315
Serial Bus ControlNet Adapter,
Series A (RPSSCCNA)
ISSUED: August, 2007
Supersedes: None
!
WARNING
To avoid unpredictable system behavior that can cause personal injury
and property damage:
• Disconnect electrical supply (when necessary) before installation,
servicing, or conversion.
• Disconnect air supply and depressurize all air lines connected to this
product before installation, servicing, or conversion.
• Operate within the manufacturer’s specified pressure, temperature,
and other conditions listed in these instructions.
• Medium must be moisture-free if ambient temperature is below
freezing.
• Service according to procedures listed in these instructions.
• Installation, service, and conversion of these products must be
performed by knowledgeable personnel who understand how
pneumatic products are to be applied.
• After installation, servicing, or conversion, air and electrical supplies
(when necessary) should be connected and the product tested for
proper function and leakage. If audible leakage is present, or the
product does not operate properly, do not put into use.
• Warnings and specifications on the product should not be covered by
paint, etc. If masking is not possible, contact your local representative
for replacement labels.
Introduction
Follow these instructions when installing, operating, or servicing the
product.
Serial Bus ControlNet Adapter, Series A
(RPSSCCNA)
The sealed IP67 housing of the adapter requires no enclosure.
(Note that environmental requirements other than IP67 may require
an additional appropriate housing.) ControlNet connectors are two
redundant TNC style network connectors and one mini style power
connector. The ControlNet adapter is shown below.
RPSSCCNA
ControlNet A
RPSSCCNA
Safety Guide
For more complete information on recommended application guidelines,
see the Installation Safety Guidelines section of Bulletin 600 (Form
A10309) or you can download the Installation Safety Guidelines at:
www.rosscontrols.com/rosslit.htm.
TNC Style
Connectors
Node
Address
Switches
Mini 7/8"
Auxiliary
Power
Connector
ControlNet B
X10
X1
Adapter
Status
PointBus
Status
ControlNet A
Status
ControlNet B
Status
System
Power
Adapter
Power
PWR
! WARNING
FAILURE OR IMPROPER SELECTION OR IMPROPER USE OF THE
PRODUCTS AND/OR SYSTEMS DESCRIBED HEREIN OR RELATED
ITEMS CAN CAUSE DEATH, PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY
DAMAGE.
Serial Bus ControlNet Adapter User Manual
The Serial Bus ControlNet Adapter User Manual PSS-UM003A-EN-P
is not available at this time. Please refer to Rockwell Automation 1734
POINT I/O ControlNet Adapter User Manual 1734-UM008A-EN-P
for similar setup information, which is available online at
http://literature.rockwellautomation.com/.
This document and other information from ROSS CONTROLS, its
subsidiaries and authorized distributors provide product and/or system
options for further investigation by users having technical expertise. It
is important that you analyze all aspects of your application, including
consequences of any failure and review the information concerning the
product or systems in the current product catalog. Due to the variety of
operating conditions and applications for these products or systems, the
user, through its own analysis and testing, is solely responsible for making
the final selection of the products and systems and assuring that all
performance, safety and warning requirements of the application are met.
The products described herein, including without limitation, product features,
specifications, designs, availability and pricing, are subject to change by
ROSS CONTROLS and its subsidiaries at any time without notice.
EXTRA COPIES OF THESE INSTRUCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE FOR INCLUSION
IN EQUIPMENT / MAINTENANCE MANUALS THAT UTILIZE THESE PRODUCTS.
CONTACT YOUR LOCAL REPRESENTATIVE.
Serial Bus ControlNet Adapter, Series A (RPSSCCNA)
Important User Information
ATTENTION
Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from
those of electromechanical equipment. Safety Guidelines for the
Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls
(Form A10325) (available online at www.rosscontrols.com/rosslit.htm),
describes some important differences between solid state equipment
and hard-wired electromechanical devices. Because of these
differences, and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state
equipment, all persons responsible for applying this equipment must
satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is
acceptable.
In no event will ROSS CONTROLS® be responsible or liable for
indirect or consequential damages to persons or property resulting
from the use or application of this equipment.
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely
for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and
requirements associated with any particular installation, ROSS
CONTROLS cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use
based on the examples and diagrams.
No patent liability is assumed by ROSS CONTROLS with respect
to use of information, circuits, equipment, or software described in
this manual.
Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without
written permission of ROSS CONTROLS is prohibited.
Throughout this manual we use notes to make you aware of safety
considerations.
WARNING
!
Identifies information about practices or
circumstances that can cause an explosion in
a hazardous environment, which may lead to
personal injury or death, property damage, or
economic loss.
IMPORTANT
Identifies information that is critical for successful
application and understanding of the product.
ATTENTION
Identifies information about practices or
circumstances that can lead to personal injury
or death, property damage, or economic loss.
Attentions help you:
• Identify a Hazard
• Avoid a Hazard
• Recognize the Consequence
!
SHOCK HAZARD Labels may be located on or inside the
equipment to alert people that dangerous
voltage may be present.
BURN HAZARD
2
Labels may be located on or inside the
equipment to alert people that surfaces may be
dangerous temperatures.
!
Environment and Enclosure
This equipment is intended for use in overvoltage Category
II applications (as defined in IEC publication 60664-1), at
altitudes up to 2000 meters without derating. This equipment
is considered Group 1, Class A industrial equipment according
to IEC/CISPR Publication 11. Without appropriate precautions,
there may be potential difficulties ensuring electromagnetic
compatibility in other environments due to conducted as well as
radiated disturbance. This equipment is supplied as “enclosed”
equipment. It should not require additional system enclosure
when used in locations consistent with the enclosure type
ratings stated in the Specifications section of this publication.
Subsequent sections of this publication may contain additional
information regarding specific enclosure type ratings, beyond
what this product provides, that are required to comply with
certain product safety certifications.
NOTE: See NEMA Standards publication 250 and IEC
publication 60529, as applicable, for explanations of the
degrees of protection provided by different types of enclosure.
Also, see the appropriate sections in this publication, as well
as the publication A10324 (“Industrial Automation Wiring and
Grounding Guidelines”), for additional installation requirements
pertaining to this equipment.
ATTENTION
!
Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
This equipment is sensitive to electrostatic discharge, which
can cause internal damage and affect normal operation. Follow
these guidelines when you handle this equipment:
• Touch a grounded object to discharge potential static.
• Wear an approved grounding wrist strap.
• Do not touch connectors or pins on component boards.
• Do not touch circuit components inside the equipment.
• If available, use a static-safe workstation.
• When not in use, store the equipment in appropriate staticsafe packaging.
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Serial Bus ControlNet Adapter, Series A (RPSSCCNA)
Before You B egin
Configure Autobaud
To effectively use your adapter, note the following considerations.
The adapter cannot reconfigure an I/O module that you previously
configured to operate at a fixed baud rate. When you reuse a Serial
Bus I/O module from another Serial Bus I/O system, configure the
module to autobaud before using it with the adapter.
Understanding Messaging
Class 3 (Explicit Message) requests through the adapter to a specific
I/O module may not always receive a response from the I/O module.
In the case where the I/O module does not reply to the request, the
adapter responds with an error code indicating a time-out.
Establish I/O Connections
When you power up a Serial Bus I/O system and establish I/O
connections, the outputs transition to the Idle state, applying Idle
state data before going to RUN mode. This occurs even when the
controller making the connection is already in RUN mode.
Mount the Adapter and I/O Base
To mount the adapter on a wall or panel, use the screw holes
provided in the adapter.
A mounting illustration for the adapter with I/O bases is shown
below.
1.9
(47.2)
Adapter
2.0
(50)
0.87
(22)
I/O Module
Ground
2.0
(50)
3.13
(79.4)
5.98*
(151.9)
I/O Module
Ground
2.39
(60.7)
4.02
(102)
4.32
(109.8)
1.81
(46)
Inches
(mm)
3.02
(76.6)
Drill and Tap
for M4 Screw
5.39
(137.0)
Drill and Tap
for M6 Screw
* Depending on the type and number of manifolds, this dimension
may vary. Consult Ross for specific information.
Grounding
Each Serial Bus base has two mounting holes, with the one on the
right being the means to ground each module. Each module must
be grounded.
Install the Mounting Base as Follows:
1. Lay out the required points as shown above in the drilling
dimension drawing.
2. Drill the necessary holes for #8 (M4) machine or self-tapping
screws.
3. Mount the adapter using #8 (M4) screws.
4. Ground the system using the ground lug connection in the I/O
base. (The ground lug connection is also a mounting hole.)
www.rosscontrols.com
3
Serial Bus ControlNet Adapter, Series A (RPSSCCNA)
Set the Node Address
To set the node address, adjust the switches on the front of the
module (refer to the illustration on page 1). Use a small blade
screwdriver to rotate the switches. Line up the small notch on the
switch with the number setting you wish to use. The two switches
are most significant digit (MSD) and least significant digit (LSD).
The switches can be set from 01 through 99. The module reads the
switches at power-up only.
This example shows the
node address set at 63.
The rotary switches are read periodically. If the switches have been
changed since the last time they were read and they no longer match
the on line address, a minor fault will occur, which is indicated by a
flashing red Adapter Status LED.
• Choose Next to set RPI.
• Choose Finish. Notice that the RPSSCCNA is now under the I/O
configuration.
If your RSLogic 5000 is Version 13.X:
• Choose the 1738-ACNR/A from the list of modules.
EDS File Requirements
The EDS file is available online at www.rosscontrols.com/rosslit.htm.
Add ControlNet Adapter to RSLogix 5000
I/O Configuration
To add your RPSSCCNA to RSLogix 5000 I/O configuration, follow
these steps:
• In RSLogix 5000, highlight the ControlNet Scanner, right click
and select New Module.
If your RSLogic 5000 is Version 15.X or greater:
• Choose the RPSSCCNA module from the list of Parker
modules.
• Enter a name, an appropriate node address, and chassis size.
Make sure to choose Compatible Module for Electronic Keying
setting.
• Choose Next to set RPI.
• Choose Finish. Notice that the 1738-ACNR is now under the
I/O configuration
• Enter a name, an appropriate address and chassis size.
4
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Serial Bus ControlNet Adapter, Series A (RPSSCCNA)
Wire the ControlNet Adapter
Following are wiring instructions for the ControlNet Adapter.
TNC Cables
• Connect TNC cables to Channel A or B for single media.
• Connect TNC cables to Channel A and B for redundant media.
RPSSCCNA Auxiliary Power (Mini 7/8")
Male In Connector
(view into connector)
Pin 1 - User Power +
Pin 2 - Adapter Power +
Pin 3 - Adapter Power Pin 4 - User Power -
NOTE: User power is the 24VDC power for field devices.
Adapter power is the 24VDC power for adapter. It is converted to
5VDC to power Serial Bus modules.
ATTENTION
!
Make sure all connectors and caps are securely tightened to
properly seal the connections against leaks and maintain IP67
requirements.
www.rosscontrols.com
5
Serial Bus ControlNet Adapter, Series A (RPSSCCNA)
Troubleshoot with the Indicators
RPSSCCNA
ControlNet A
RPSSCCNA
ControlNet B
X10
X1
Adapter
Status
PointBus
Status
ControlNet A
Status
ControlNet B
Status
System
Power
Adapter
Power
PWR
Adapter Status
Indicator
PointBus Status
Indicator
ControlNet A
Status Indicator
ControlNet B
Status Indicator
System Power
Indicator
Adapter Power
Indicator
Indication
Adapter Status
Off
Alternating
Red/Green
Flashing Red
Solid Red
Flashing Green
Solid Green
No power applied to device
LED powerup test (module self-test)
Recoverable fault has occurred:
- Firmware (NVS) update
- MAC ID changed
- CPU load exceeded
Unrecoverable fault has occurred:
- Self-test failure (checksum failure
at powerup, ramtest failure) at
powerup
- Firmware fatal error
Waiting for connection or ControlNet
cable break
Module is operating correctly
(normal mode)
Indication
PointBus Status
Off
Probable Cause
Alternating
Red/Green
Flashing Red
LED powerup test
Red
Flashing Green
Green
6
Probable Cause
Device is not powered check module status indicator
Recoverable fault has occurred:
- At power up the number of
expected modules does not equal
the number of modules present
- A module is missing
- Node fault (I/O connection timeout)
Unrecoverable fault has occurred:
- The adapter is bus off
- The adapter has failed its
dup_MAC_ID check
Adapter is on line with no connections
established:
- Adapter chassis size has not
been configured
- Controller in program/idle mode
- ControlNet cable break
Adapter is on line with connections
established (normal operation, in
run mode)
Indication
Probable Cause
ControlNet A/B Status (Viewed Together)
Both Steady Off
Reset, no power or entire network
interface deactivated
Alternating
Self-test mode
Red/Green
Alternating Red/Off
Bad/invalid node configuration
(such as dup_MAC_ID)
Both Steady Red
Failed link interface
Indication
Probable Cause
ControlNet A/B Status (Viewed Individually)
Steady Off
Channel disabled or
channel not supported
Flashing Red/Green Invalid link configuration
Flashing Red/Off
Severe link error - link fault or
no MAC frames received
Flashing Green/Off
Temporary channel error or listen-only
Steady Green
Normal operation - MAC frames are
being received without detected error
Indication
System Power*
Off
Green
Indication
Adapter Power**
Off
Green
Probable Cause
Not active - Field power is off,
overloaded backplane or
dc-dc converter problem
Power on - dc-dc converter active (5V)
Probable Cause
Not active - Field power is off
Power on - 24V present
* System Power Indicator shows the 5V power output from the dc-dc converter.
** Adapter Power Indicator shows the 24V power input to the dc-dc converter.
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Serial Bus ControlNet Adapter, Series A (RPSSCCNA)
Specifications
Following are specifications for the RPSSCCNA ControlNet adapter.
ControlNet Adapter - RPSSCCNA
Expansion I/O Capacity
• Maximum of 63 modules
• Maximum of 5 Rack Optimized connections (for digital modules only)
• Maximum of 25 Direct connections
• RPSSCCNA backplane current output = 1.0A maximum. See the list below for
backplane current consumption for each I/O catalog number and the current
consumption for each of the modules connected to the RPSSCCNA. Verify that it is
below 1.0A.
• Backplane current can be extended beyond 1.0A with a RPSSSE24A Backplane
Extension Power Supply. The RPSSSE24A can supply up to an additional 1.3A of
backplane current.
• Multiple RPSSSE24A modules can be used to reach the maximum of 63 modules.
Cat. No.
PointBus Current Requirements
RPSSN8xxx
RPSSP8xxx
RPSST8xxx
RPSSTR4M12A
RPSSNACM12A
RPSSNAVM12A
RPSSTACM12A
RPSSTAVM12A
RPSSS23A
RPSSV32A
ControlNet Communication Rate
75 mA
75 mA
75 mA
90 mA
75 mA
75 mA
75 mA
75 mA
75 mA
75 mA
5Mbits /s (fixed value)
Power Supply Specifications
Power Supply
Note: In order to comply with CE Low Voltage Directives (LVD), you must use either a
NEC Class 2, a Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) or a Protected Extra Low Voltage (PELV)
power supply to power this adapter. A SELV supply cannot exceed 30V rms, 42.4V peak
or 60VDC under normal conditions and under single fault conditions. A PELV supply has
the same rating and is connected to protected earth.
Input Voltage Rating
24VDC
10-28.8VDC range
Inrush Current
6A maximum for 10ms
Field Side Power Requirements, Maximum
24VDC (+20% = 28.8VDC) @ 425 mA
Interruption
Output voltage will stay within specifications when input drops out for
10ms at 10V with maximum load
General Specifications
LED Indicators
1 green/red Adapter status
2 green/red ControlNet status
1 green/red PointBus status
1 green System Power (PointBus 5V power)
1 green Adapter Power (24V from field supply)
Power Consumption, Maximum
10.2W @ 28.8VDC
Power Dissipation, Maximum
5.0W @ 28.8VDC
Thermal Dissipation, Maximum
16.9 BTU/hr. @ 28.8VDC
Isolation Voltage
(continuous-voltage withstand rating)
50V rms
Tested at 1250VAC for 60s
Field Power Bus
Nominal Voltage
Supply Voltage
Supply Current
24VDC
10-28.8VDC range
10A maximum
Dimensions
Inches (Millimeters)
4.41H x 2.83W x 2.56D (112H x 72W x 65D)
www.rosscontrols.com
7
Serial Bus ControlNet Adapter, Series A (RPSSCCNA)
General Specifications (continued)
Operating Temperature
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad, Operating Cold),
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd, Operating Dry Heat),
IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb, Operating Thermal Shock):
-20 to 60°C (-4 to 140°F)
Storage Temperature
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab, Un-packaged Non-operating Cold),
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb, Un-packaged Non-operating Dry Heat),
-40 to 85°C (-40 to 185°F)
Relative Humidity
IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db, Un-packaged Non-operating Damp Heat):
5-95% non-condensing
Shock
IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea, Unpackaged Shock):
Operating 30g
Non-operating 50g
Vibration
IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc, Operating):
5g @ 10-500Hz
ESD Immunity
IEC 61000-4-2:
6kV contact discharges
8kV air discharges
Radiated RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-3:
10V/m with 1kHz sine-wave 80%AM from 30MHz to 2000MHz
10V/m with 200Hz 50% Pulse 100%AM at 900Mhz
10V/m with 200Hz 50% Pulse 100%AM at 1890Mhz
EFT/B Immunity
IEC 61000-4-4:
±4kV at 5kHz on power ports
±3kV at 5kHz on signal ports
Surge Transient Immunity
IEC 61000-4-5:
±1kV line-line(DM) and ±2kV line-earth(CM) on power ports
±2kV line-earth(CM) on shielded ports
Conducted RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-6:
10Vrms with 1kHz sine-wave 80%AM from 150kHz to 80MHz
Emissions
CSPR 11:
Group 1, Class A
Enclosure Type Rating
Meets IP65/66/67 (when marked)
Mounting Base Screw Torque
#8 screw, 7.5 in. lbs. in Aluminum, 16 in. lbs. in Steel
Wiring Category1
1 - on power ports
1 - on communications ports
Weight
Imperial (Metric)
Certifications: (when product is marked)
0.80 lb. (0.36 kg)
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment, certified for US and Canada
CE
European Union 89/336/EEC EMC Directive, compliant with:
EN 61000-6-4; Industrial Emissions
EN 50082-2; Industrial Immunity
EN 61326; Meas./Control/Lab., Industrial Requirements
EN 61000-6-2; Industrial Immunity
C-Tick
Australian Radiocommunications Act, compliant with:
AS/NZS CISPR 11; Industrial Emissions
CI
ControlNet Int'l conformance tested to ControlNet specifications
1. Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing. Refer to Publication A10324, “Industrial Automation Wiring
and Grounding Guidelines”.
Printed in U.S.A -0807
© Copyright 2007, ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Form A10315
Installation & Service Instructions
A10313
Serial Bus DeviceNet Adapters,
Series A
(RPSSCDM12A, RPSSCDM18PA)
ISSUED: August, 2007
Supersedes: None
!
RPSSCDM12A
WARNING
To avoid unpredictable system behavior that can cause personal injury
and property damage:
• Disconnect electrical supply (when necessary) before installation,
servicing, or conversion.
• Disconnect air supply and depressurize all air lines connected to this
product before installation, servicing, or conversion.
• Operate within the manufacturer’s specified pressure, temperature,
and other conditions listed in these instructions.
• Medium must be moisture-free if ambient temperature is below
freezing.
• Service according to procedures listed in these instructions.
• Installation, service, and conversion of these products must be
performed by knowledgeable personnel who understand how
pneumatic products are to be applied.
• After installation, servicing, or conversion, air and electrical supplies
(when necessary) should be connected and the product tested for
proper function and leakage. If audible leakage is present, or the
product does not operate properly, do not put into use.
• Warnings and specifications on the product should not be covered by
paint, etc. If masking is not possible, contact your local representative
for replacement labels.
M12
Connector
RPSSCDM12A
DeviceNet Out
DeviceNet In
Node Address
Switches
Adapter
Status
DeviceNet
Status
X10
X1
PointBus
Status
System
Power
Adapter
Power
PWR
Mini 7/8"
Auxiliary
Power
Connector
ROSS
RPSSCDM18PA
Safety Guide
For more complete information on recommended application guidelines,
see the Installation Safety Guidelines section of Bulletin 600 (Form
A10309) or you can download the Installation Safety Guidelines at:
www.rosscontrols.com/rosslit.htm.
Mini 7/8"
Connector
RPSSCDM18PA
DNet
Out
DNet
In
Node Address
Switches
Mini 7/8"
Auxiliary
Power
Connector
Adapter
Status
DeviceNet
Status
X10
X1
PWR
PointBus
Status
System
Power
Adapter
Power
ROSS
! WARNING
Introduction
Follow these instructions when installing, operating, or servicing the
product.
Serial Bus DeviceNet Adapters, Series A
(RPSSCDM12A, RPSSCDM18PA)
The sealed IP67 housing of these adapters requires no enclosure.
(Note that environmental requirements other than IP67 may require
an additional appropriate housing.) DeviceNet connectors are
sealed Micro (M12) or Mini (7/8") styles. The DeviceNet adapters
are shown below.
Serial Bus DeviceNet Adapters User Manual
The Serial Bus DeviceNet Adapters A10311 is available online at
www.rosscontrols.com/rosslit.htm.
FAILURE OR IMPROPER SELECTION OR IMPROPER USE OF THE
PRODUCTS AND/OR SYSTEMS DESCRIBED HEREIN OR RELATED
ITEMS CAN CAUSE DEATH, PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY
DAMAGE.
This document and other information from ROSS CONTROLS, its
subsidiaries and authorized distributors provide product and/or system
options for further investigation by users having technical expertise. It
is important that you analyze all aspects of your application, including
consequences of any failure and review the information concerning the
product or systems in the current product catalog. Due to the variety of
operating conditions and applications for these products or systems, the
user, through its own analysis and testing, is solely responsible for making
the final selection of the products and systems and assuring that all
performance, safety and warning requirements of the application are met.
The products described herein, including without limitation, product features,
specifications, designs, availability and pricing, are subject to change by
ROSS CONTROLS and its subsidiaries at any time without notice.
EXTRA COPIES OF THESE INSTRUCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE FOR INCLUSION
IN EQUIPMENT / MAINTENANCE MANUALS THAT UTILIZE THESE PRODUCTS.
CONTACT YOUR LOCAL REPRESENTATIVE.
Serial Bus DeviceNet Adapters, Series A (RPSSCDM12A, RPSSCDM18PA)
Important User Information
ATTENTION
Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from
those of electromechanical equipment. Safety Guidelines for the
Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls
(Form A10325) (available online at www.rosscontrols.com/rosslit.htm),
describes some important differences between solid state equipment
and hard-wired electromechanical devices. Because of these
differences, and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state
equipment, all persons responsible for applying this equipment must
satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is
acceptable.
In no event will ROSS CONTROLS® be responsible or liable for
indirect or consequential damages to persons or property resulting
from the use or application of this equipment.
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely
for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and
requirements associated with any particular installation, ROSS
CONTROLS cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use
based on the examples and diagrams.
No patent liability is assumed by ROSS CONTROLS with respect
to use of information, circuits, equipment, or software described in
this manual.
Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without
written permission of ROSS CONTROLS is prohibited.
Throughout this manual we use notes to make you aware of safety
considerations.
WARNING
!
Identifies information about practices or
circumstances that can cause an explosion in
a hazardous environment, which may lead to
personal injury or death, property damage, or
economic loss.
IMPORTANT
Identifies information that is critical for successful
application and understanding of the product.
ATTENTION
Identifies information about practices or
circumstances that can lead to personal injury
or death, property damage, or economic loss.
Attentions help you:
• Identify a Hazard
• Avoid a Hazard
• Recognize the Consequence
!
SHOCK HAZARD Labels may be located on or inside the
equipment to alert people that dangerous
voltage may be present.
BURN HAZARD
2
Labels may be located on or inside the
equipment to alert people that surfaces may be
dangerous temperatures.
!
Environment and Enclosure
This equipment is intended for use in overvoltage Category
II applications (as defined in IEC publication 60664-1), at
altitudes up to 2000 meters without derating. This equipment
is considered Group 1, Class A industrial equipment according
to IEC/CISPR Publication 11. Without appropriate precautions,
there may be potential difficulties ensuring electromagnetic
compatibility in other environments due to conducted as well as
radiated disturbance. This equipment is supplied as “enclosed”
equipment. It should not require additional system enclosure
when used in locations consistent with the enclosure type
ratings stated in the Specifications section of this publication.
Subsequent sections of this publication may contain additional
information regarding specific enclosure type ratings, beyond
what this product provides, that are required to comply with
certain product safety certifications.
NOTE: See NEMA Standards publication 250 and IEC
publication 60529, as applicable, for explanations of the
degrees of protection provided by different types of enclosure.
Also, see the appropriate sections in this publication, as well
as the publication A10324 (“Industrial Automation Wiring and
Grounding Guidelines”), for additional installation requirements
pertaining to this equipment.
ATTENTION
!
Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
This equipment is sensitive to electrostatic discharge, which
can cause internal damage and affect normal operation. Follow
these guidelines when you handle this equipment:
• Touch a grounded object to discharge potential static.
• Wear an approved grounding wrist strap.
• Do not touch connectors or pins on component boards.
• Do not touch circuit components inside the equipment.
• If available, use a static-safe workstation.
• When not in use, store the equipment in appropriate staticsafe packaging.
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Serial Bus DeviceNet Adapters, Series A (RPSSCDM12A, RPSSCDM18PA)
Mount the Adapter and I/O Base
To mount the adapter on a wall or panel, use the screw holes
provided in the adapter.
A mounting illustration for the adapter with I/O bases is shown
below.
1.9
(47.2)
Adapter
2.0
(50)
0.87
(22)
I/O Module
Ground
2.0
(50)
3.13
(79.4)
5.98*
(151.9)
I/O Module
Ground
2.39
(60.7)
4.02
(102)
4.32
(109.8)
1.81
(46)
Inches
(mm)
Drill and Tap
for M4 Screw
3.02
(76.6)
5.39
(137.0)
Drill and Tap
for M6 Screw
* Depending on the type and number of manifolds, this dimension
may vary. Consult Ross for specific information.
Grounding
Each Serial Bus base has two mounting holes, with the one on the
right being the means to ground each module. Each module must
be grounded.
Install the Mounting Base as Follows:
1. Lay out the required points as shown above in the drilling
dimension drawing.
2. Drill the necessary holes for #8 (M4) machine or self-tapping
screws.
3. Mount the adapter and I/O bases using #8 (M4) screws.
4. Ground the system using the ground lug connection in the I/O
base. (The ground lug connection is also a mounting hole.)
www.rosscontrols.com
3
Serial Bus DeviceNet Adapters, Series A (RPSSCDM12A, RPSSCDM18PA)
Set the Node Address
Valid node addresses are 00 through 63.
Set the node address using either the rotary switches, RSNetWorx for
DeviceNet™, DeviceNetManager™, or another software configuration
tool. Setting the switches at any number from 64 through 99 lets the
software have address control.
Each module is shipped with the switches set for node address 63.
Remove the caps on the front of the module to access the switches
(refer to the illustrations on page 1). The two switches are:
• X10 (most significant digit) – left side of module
• X1 (least significant digit) – right side of module
This example shows the
node address set at 63.
To reset the node address, use a small blade screwdriver to rotate
the switches. Line up the small notch on the switch with the number
setting you wish to use and then cycle power.
The rotary switches are read periodically. If the switches have been
changed since the last time they were read and they no longer match
the on line address, a minor fault will occur, which is indicated by a
flashing red Adapter Status LED. Settings of 64 through 99 cause
the module to use the last valid node address stored internally.
Example: The last setting internally was 40. If a change is made to
68, and then you power up, the address will default to 40.
The module is equipped with AutoBaud detect. AutoBaud lets the
module read the settings already in use on your DeviceNet network
and automatically adjusts to follow those settings.
EDS File Requirements
The EDS files are available online at www.rosscontrols.com/rosslit.
htm.
Open Configuration Method
For using DeviceNet Adapters without RSNetWorx™ or RSLogix™
5000, refer to document “User Guide: Configuration of the Pneumatics
Platform using CIP™ Explicit Messaging", which is available online
at www.rosscontrols.com/rosslit.htm
4
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Serial Bus DeviceNet Adapters, Series A (RPSSCDM12A, RPSSCDM18PA)
Wire the DeviceNet Adapters
Following are wiring instructions for the DeviceNet Adapters.
RPSSCDM12A (Micro M12 A - Coding Key)
Female Out Connector
Male In Connector
(view into connector)
Pin 1 - Drain
Pin 2 - +V
Pin 3 - -V
Pin 4 - CAN_High
Pin 5 - CAN_Low
RPSSCDM18PA (Mini 7/8")
Female Out Connector
Male In Connector
(view into connector)
Pin 1 - Drain
Pin 2 - +V
Pin 3 - -V
Pin 4 - CAN_High
Pin 5 - CAN_Low
DeviceNet Auxiliary Power (Mini 7/8")
Male In Connector
(view into connector)
Pin 1 - User Power +
Pin 2 - Adapter Power +
Pin 3 - Adapter Power Pin 4 - User Power -
NOTE: User power is the 24VDC power for field devices.
Adapter power is the 24VDC power for adapter. It is converted to
5VDC to power modules.
ATTENTION
!
Make sure all connectors and caps are securely tightened to
properly seal the connections against leaks and maintain IP67
requirements.
www.rosscontrols.com
5
Serial Bus DeviceNet Adapters, Series A (RPSSCDM12A, RPSSCDM18PA)
Troubleshoot with the Indicators
RPSSCDM18PA
RPSSCDM18PA
DNet
Out
Adapter Status
Indicator
DNet
In
Adapter
Status
DeviceNet
Status
X10
X1
PointBus
Status
System
Power
Adapter
Power
PWR
ROSS
Indication
Adapter Status
Off
Green
Flashing Red
Red
Flashing Red/Green
Probable Cause
No power applied to device
Device operating normally
Recoverable fault
Unrecoverable fault may require device replacement
Device is in self-test
DeviceNet Status
Indicator
PointBus Status
Indicator
System Power
Indicator
Adapter Power
Indicator
Indication
PointBus Status
Off
Flashing Green
Green
Indication
DeviceNet Status
Off
Flashing Green
Green
Flashing Red
Red
Probable Cause
Flashing Red
Device is not on line:
- Device attempting to Autobaud
- Device has not completed
dup_MAC-id test
- Device not powered - check module
status indicator
Device is on line but has no
connections in the established state
Device is on line and has
connections in the established state
One or more I/O connections in
timed-out state
Critical link failure - failed
communication device. Device
detected error that prevents it from
communicating on the network.
(Possible duplicate MAC ID or baud
rate mismatch).
Red
Flashing Red/Green
Indication
System Power*
Off
Green
Indication
Adapter Power**
Off
Green
Probable Cause
Device is not on line:
- Device has not completed
dup_MAC-id test
- Device not powered - check module
status indicator
Device is on line but has no
connections in the established state
Device is on line and has
connections in the established state
One or more I/O connections in
timed-out state
Critical link failure - failed
communication device. Device
detected error that prevents it from
communicating on the network.
(Possible duplicate MAC ID or baud
rate mismatch).
Communication faulted device - the
device has detected a network access
error and is in communication faulted
state. Device has received and accepted
an Identity Communication Faulted
Request - long protocol message.
Probable Cause
Not active - Field power is off,
overloaded backplane or dc-dc
converter problem.
System power on - dc-dc converter
active (5V).
Probable Cause
Not active - Field power is off.
System power on, 24V present.
* System Power Indicator shows the 5V power output from the dc-dc converter.
** Adapter Power Indicator shows the 24V power input to the dc-dc converter.
6
®
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS . All Rights Reserved.
Serial Bus DeviceNet Adapters, Series A (RPSSCDM12A, RPSSCDM18PA)
Specifications
Following are specifications for the DeviceNet adapters.
R
DeviceNet Adapters - RPSSCDM12A, RPSSCDM18PA
Expansion I/O Capacity
• DeviceNet adapter backplane current output = 1.0A maximum.
See the list below for backplane current consumption for each I/O catalog number and
the current consumption for each of the modules connected to the DeviceNet adapter.
Verify that it is below 1.0A.
• Backplane current can be extended beyond 1.0A with a RPSSSE24A Backplane
Extension Power Supply. The RPSSSE24A can supply up to an additional 1.3A of
backplane current.
• Multiple RPSSSE24A modules can be used to reach the
maximum of 63 modules.
Cat. No.
PointBus Current Requirements
RPSSN8xxx
RPSSP8xxx
RPSST8xxx
RPSSTR4M12A
RPSSNACM12A
RPSSNAVM12A
RPSSTACM12A
RPSSTAVM12A
RPSSS23A
RPSSV32A
DeviceNet Communication Rate
75 mA
75 mA
75 mA
90 mA
75 mA
75 mA
75 mA
75 mA
75 mA
75 mA
125K bit/s (500m maximum)
250K bit/s (250m maximum)
500K bit/s (100m maximum)
DeviceNet Power Specifications
Power Supply
Note: In order to comply with CE Low Voltage Directives (LVD), you must use either a
NEC Class 2, a Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) or a Protected Extra Low Voltage (PELV)
power supply to power this adapter. A SELV supply cannot exceed 30V rms, 42.4V peak
or 60VDC under normal conditions and under single fault conditions. A PELV supply has
the same rating and is connected to protected earth.
Input Voltage Rating
24VDC nominal
DeviceNet Input Voltage Range
11-25VDC DeviceNet specification
Input Overvoltage Protection
Reverse polarity protected
DeviceNet Power Requirements
24VDC (+4% = 25VDC) @ 30 mA maximum
Power Supply Specifications
Power Supply
Note: In order to comply with CE Low Voltage Directives (LVD), you must use either a
NEC Class 2, a Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) or a Protected Extra Low Voltage (PELV)
power supply to power this adapter. A SELV supply cannot exceed 30V rms, 42.4V peak
or 60VDC under normal conditions and under single fault conditions. A PELV supply has
the same rating and is connected to protected earth.
Input Voltage Rating
24VDC
10-28.8VDC range
Input Overvoltage Protection
Reverse polarity protected
Inrush Current
6A maximum for 10ms
PointBus Output Current
1A maximum @ 5VDC +5% (4.75-5.25)
Field Side Power Requirements, Maximum
24VDC (+20% = 28.8VDC) @ 400 mA
Interruption
Output voltage will stay within specifications when input drops out for
10ms at 10V with maximum load
General Specifications
LED Indicators
1 green/red Adapter status
1 green/red DeviceNet status
1 green/red PointBus status
1 green System Power (PointBus 5V power)
1 green Adapter Power (24V from field supply)
Power Consumption, Maximum
8.1W @ 28.8VDC
www.rosscontrols.com
7
Serial Bus DeviceNet Adapters, Series A (RPSSCDM12A, RPSSCDM18PA)
General Specifications (continued)
Power Dissipation, Maximum
2.8W @ 28.8VDC
Thermal Dissipation, Maximum
9.5 BTU/hr. @ 28.8VDC
Isolation Voltage
(continuous-voltage withstand rating)
50V rms
Tested at 1250VAC rms for 60s
Serial Power Bus
Nominal Voltage
Supply Voltage
Supply Current
24VDC
10-28.8VDC range
10A maximum
Dimensions
Inches (Millimeters)
4.41H x 2.83W x 2.56D (112H x 72W x 65D)
Operating Temperature
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad, Operating Cold),
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd, Operating Dry Heat),
IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb, Operating Thermal Shock):
-20 to 60°C (-4 to 140°F)
Storage Temperature
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab, Un-packaged Non-operating Cold),
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb, Un-packaged Non-operating Dry Heat),
-40 to 85°C (-40 to 185°F)
Relative Humidity
IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db, Un-packaged Non-operating Damp Heat):
5-95% non-condensing
Shock
IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea, Unpackaged Shock):
Operating 30g
Non-operating 50g
Vibration
IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc, Operating):
5g @ 10-500Hz
ESD Immunity
IEC 61000-4-2:
6kV contact discharges
8kV air discharges
Radiated RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-3:
10V/m with 1kHz sine-wave 80%AM from 30MHz to 2000MHz
10V/m with 200Hz 50% Pulse 100%AM at 900Mhz
10V/m with 200Hz 50% Pulse 100%AM at 1890Mhz
EFT/B Immunity
IEC 61000-4-4:
±4kV at 5kHz on power ports
±3kV at 5kHz on signal ports
Surge Transient Immunity
IEC 61000-4-5:
±1kV line-line(DM) and ±2kV line-earth(CM) on power ports
±2kV line-earth(CM) on shielded ports
Conducted RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-6:
10Vrms with 1kHz sine-wave 80%AM from 150kHz to 80MHz
Emissions
CSPR 11:
Group 1, Class A
Enclosure Type Rating
Meets IP65/66/67 (when marked)
Mounting Base Screw Torque
#8 screw, 7.5 in. lbs. in Aluminum, 16 in. lbs. in Steel
Wiring Category1
1 - on power ports
1 - on communications ports
Weight
Imperial (Metric)
Certifications: (when product is marked)
0.80 lb. (0.36 kg)
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment, certified for US and Canada
CE
European Union 89/336/EEC EMC Directive, compliant with:
EN 61000-6-4; Industrial Emissions
EN 50082-2; Industrial Immunity
EN 61326; Meas./Control/Lab., Industrial Requirements
EN 61000-6-2; Industrial Immunity
C-Tick
Australian Radiocommunications Act, compliant with:
AS/NZS CISPR 11; Industrial Emissions
ODVA
ODVA conformance tested to DeviceNet specifications
1. Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing. Refer to Publication A10324, “Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines”.
Printed in U.S.A -0807
© Copyright 2007, ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Form A10313
Installation & Service Instructions
A10316
Serial Bus EtherNet/IP Adapter,
Series A (RPSSCENA)
ISSUED: August , 2007
Supersedes: None
!
WARNING
To avoid unpredictable system behavior that can cause personal injury
and property damage:
• Disconnect electrical supply (when necessary) before installation,
servicing, or conversion.
• Disconnect air supply and depressurize all air lines connected to this
product before installation, servicing, or conversion.
• Operate within the manufacturer’s specified pressure, temperature,
and other conditions listed in these instructions.
• Medium must be moisture-free if ambient temperature is below
freezing.
• Service according to procedures listed in these instructions.
• Installation, service, and conversion of these products must be
performed by knowledgeable personnel who understand how
pneumatic products are to be applied.
• After installation, servicing, or conversion, air and electrical supplies
(when necessary) should be connected and the product tested for
proper function and leakage. If audible leakage is present, or the
product does not operate properly, do not put into use.
• Warnings and specifications on the product should not be covered by
paint, etc. If masking is not possible, contact your local representative
for replacement labels.
Introduction
Follow these instructions when installing, operating, or servicing the
product.
Serial Bus EtherNet/IP Adapter, Series A
(RPSSCENA)
The sealed IP67 housing of the adapter requires no enclosure.
(Note that environmental requirements other than IP67 may require
an additional appropriate housing.) The EtherNet/IP connector is
a sealed D-coded M12 (micro) style. The EtherNet/IP adapter is
shown below.
RPSSCENA
EtherNet I/P
RPSSCENA
Safety Guide
For more complete information on recommended application guidelines,
see the Installation Safety Guidelines section of Bulletin 600 (Form
A10309) or you can download the Installation Safety Guidelines at:
www.rosscontrols.com/rosslit.htm.
M12
Connector
X100
I
P
X10
Network
Address
Switches
Mini 7/8"
Auxiliary
Power
Connector
X1
A
D
D
R
E
S
S
Adapter
Status
Network
Activity
Network
Status
PointBus
Status
System
Power
PWR
Adapter
Power
! WARNING
FAILURE OR IMPROPER SELECTION OR IMPROPER USE OF THE
PRODUCTS AND/OR SYSTEMS DESCRIBED HEREIN OR RELATED
ITEMS CAN CAUSE DEATH, PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY
DAMAGE.
Serial Bus EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
The Serial Bus EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual PSS-UM004A-EN-P
is not available at this time. Please refer to Rockwell Automation 1734
POINT I/O EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual 1734-UM011A-EN-P
for similar setup information, which is available online at
http://literature.rockwellautomation.com/.
This document and other information from ROSS CONTROLS, its
subsidiaries and authorized distributors provide product and/or system
options for further investigation by users having technical expertise. It
is important that you analyze all aspects of your application, including
consequences of any failure and review the information concerning the
product or systems in the current product catalog. Due to the variety of
operating conditions and applications for these products or systems, the
user, through its own analysis and testing, is solely responsible for making
the final selection of the products and systems and assuring that all
performance, safety and warning requirements of the application are met.
The products described herein, including without limitation, product features,
specifications, designs, availability and pricing, are subject to change by
ROSS CONTROLS and its subsidiaries at any time without notice.
EXTRA COPIES OF THESE INSTRUCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE FOR INCLUSION
IN EQUIPMENT / MAINTENANCE MANUALS THAT UTILIZE THESE PRODUCTS.
CONTACT YOUR LOCAL REPRESENTATIVE.
Serial Bus EtherNet/IP Adapter, Series A (RPSSCENA)
Important User Information
ATTENTION
Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from
those of electromechanical equipment. Safety Guidelines for the
Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls
(Form A10325) (available online at www.rosscontrols.com/rosslit.htm),
describes some important differences between solid state equipment
and hard-wired electromechanical devices. Because of these
differences, and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state
equipment, all persons responsible for applying this equipment must
satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is
acceptable.
In no event will ROSS CONTROLS® be responsible or liable for
indirect or consequential damages to persons or property resulting
from the use or application of this equipment.
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely
for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and
requirements associated with any particular installation, ROSS
CONTROLS cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use
based on the examples and diagrams.
No patent liability is assumed by ROSS CONTROLS with respect
to use of information, circuits, equipment, or software described in
this manual.
Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without
written permission of ROSS CONTROLS is prohibited.
Throughout this manual we use notes to make you aware of safety
considerations.
WARNING
!
Identifies information about practices or
circumstances that can cause an explosion in
a hazardous environment, which may lead to
personal injury or death, property damage, or
economic loss.
IMPORTANT
Identifies information that is critical for successful
application and understanding of the product.
ATTENTION
Identifies information about practices or
circumstances that can lead to personal injury
or death, property damage, or economic loss.
Attentions help you:
• Identify a Hazard
• Avoid a Hazard
• Recognize the Consequence
!
SHOCK HAZARD Labels may be located on or inside the
equipment to alert people that dangerous
voltage may be present.
BURN HAZARD
2
Labels may be located on or inside the
equipment to alert people that surfaces may be
dangerous temperatures.
!
Environment and Enclosure
This equipment is intended for use in overvoltage Category
II applications (as defined in IEC publication 60664-1), at
altitudes up to 2000 meters without derating. This equipment
is considered Group 1, Class A industrial equipment according
to IEC/CISPR Publication 11. Without appropriate precautions,
there may be potential difficulties ensuring electromagnetic
compatibility in other environments due to conducted as well as
radiated disturbance. This equipment is supplied as “enclosed”
equipment. It should not require additional system enclosure
when used in locations consistent with the enclosure type
ratings stated in the Specifications section of this publication.
Subsequent sections of this publication may contain additional
information regarding specific enclosure type ratings, beyond
what this product provides, that are required to comply with
certain product safety certifications.
NOTE: See NEMA Standards publication 250 and IEC
publication 60529, as applicable, for explanations of the
degrees of protection provided by different types of enclosure.
Also, see the appropriate sections in this publication, as well
as the publication A10324 (“Industrial Automation Wiring and
Grounding Guidelines”), for additional installation requirements
pertaining to this equipment.
ATTENTION
!
Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
This equipment is sensitive to electrostatic discharge, which
can cause internal damage and affect normal operation. Follow
these guidelines when you handle this equipment:
• Touch a grounded object to discharge potential static.
• Wear an approved grounding wrist strap.
• Do not touch connectors or pins on component boards.
• Do not touch circuit components inside the equipment.
• If available, use a static-safe workstation.
• When not in use, store the equipment in appropriate staticsafe packaging.
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Serial Bus EtherNet/IP Adapter, Series A (RPSSCENA)
When you power up a Serial Bus I/O system and establish I/O
connections, the outputs transition to the Idle state, applying Idle
state data before going to RUN mode. This occurs even when the
controller making the connection is already in RUN mode.
Before You B egin
To effectively use your adapter, note the following considerations.
Determine Compatibility
If using the adapter with an Allen-Bradley 1756-ENBT module or
1788-ENBT module, use the following required firmware versions
for these bridge modules:
• 1756-ENBT firmware version 2.3 or greater
• 1788-ENBT firmware version 1.33 or greater
If you use the BootP Utility to assign IP addresses to the adapter,
use version 2.3.2 or greater.
Understanding Messaging
Class 3 (Explicit Message) requests through the adapter to a specific
I/O module may not always receive a response from the I/O module.
In the case where the I/O module does not reply to the request, the
adapter responds with an error code indicating a time-out.
Configure Autobaud
The adapter cannot reconfigure an I/O module that you previously
configured to operate at a fixed baud rate. When you reuse a Serial
Bus I/O module from another Serial Bus I/O system, configure the
module to autobaud before using it with the adapter.
Open Configuration Method
For using Serial Bus EtherNet/IP Adapters without RSNetWorx™ or
RSLogix™ 5000, refer to document “User Guide: Configuration of the
isysNet™ Pneumatics Platform using Explicit Messaging", which is
available at www.rosscontrols.com/rosslit.htm.
Establish I/O Connections
Mount the Adapter and I/O Base
To mount the adapter on a wall or panel, use the screw holes
provided in the adapter.
A mounting illustration for the adapter with I/O bases is shown
below.
1.9
(47.2)
Adapter
2.0
(50)
0.87
(22)
I/O Module
Ground
2.0
(50)
3.13
(79.4)
5.98*
(151.9)
I/O Module
Ground
2.39
(60.7)
4.02
(102)
4.32
(109.8)
1.81
(46)
Inches
(mm)
3.02
(76.6)
Drill and Tap
for M4 Screw
5.39
(137.0)
Drill and Tap
for M6 Screw
* Depending on the type and number of manifolds, this dimension
may vary. Consult Ross for specific information.
Grounding
Each Serial Bus base has two mounting holes, with the one on the
right being the means to ground each module. Each module must
be grounded.
Install the Mounting Base as Follows:
1. Lay out the required points as shown above in the drilling
dimension drawing.
2. Drill the necessary holes for #8 (M4) machine or self-tapping
screws.
3. Mount the adapter using #8 (M4) screws.
4. Ground the system using the ground lug connection in the I/O
base. (The ground lug connection is also a mounting hole.)
www.rosscontrols.com
3
Serial Bus EtherNet/IP Adapter, Series A (RPSSCENA)
Set the Network Address
To set the network address, you can:
• Adjust the switches on the front of the module
• Use a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server
• Retrieve the IP address from nonvolatile memory
The adapter reads the switches first to determine if the switches are
set to a valid number. You set the node address by adjusting the 3
switches on the front of the module (refer to the illustration on page
1). Use a small blade screwdriver to rotate the switches. Line up the
small notch on the switch with the number setting you wish to use.
Valid settings range from 001 through 254.
If your RSLogic 5000 is Version 15.X or greater:
• Choose the RPSSCENA module from the list of Parker
modules.
This example shows
the network address
set at 163.
• Enter a name, an appropriate I/P address and chassis size.
When the switches are set to a valid number, the adapter’s IP address
will be 192.168.1.xxx (where xxx represents the number set on the
switches). The adapter’s subnet mask will be 255.255.255.0 and the
gateway address will be set to 0.0.0.0. When the adapter is reading
the network address set on the switches, the adapter will not have a
host name assigned to it or use any Domain Name System.
If the switches are set to an invalid number (i.e., 000 or a value
greater than 254), the adapter checks to see if DHCP is enabled.
If DHCP is enabled, the adapter asks for an address from a DHCP
server. The DHCP server will also assign other Transport Control
Protocol (TCP) parameters.
If DHCP is not enabled, the adapter will use the IP address (along with
other TCP configurable parameters) stored in nonvolatile memory.
• Choose Next to set RPI.
• Choose Finish. Notice that the RPSSCENA is now under the I/O
configuration.
EDS File Requirements
The EDS file is available online at www.rosscontrols.com/rosslit.htm.
If your RSLogic 5000 is Version 13.X:
• Choose the 1738-AENT/A from the list of modules.
Add EtherNet/IP Adapter to RSLogix 5000
I/O Configuration
To add your RPSSCENA to RSLogix 5000 I/O configuration, follow
these steps:
• In RSLogix 5000, highlight the EtherNet/IP Scanner, right click
and select New Module.
• Enter a name, an appropriate IP address, and chassis size. Make
sure to choose Compatible Module for Electronic Keying
setting.
4
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Serial Bus EtherNet/IP Adapter, Series A (RPSSCENA)
Wire the EtherNet/IP Adapter
Following are wiring instructions for the EtherNet/IP Adapter.
RPSSCENA Network Connector
(D-Coded M12)
Female In Connector
(view into connector)
Pin 1 - Tx +
Pin 2 - Rx +
Pin 3 - Tx Pin 4 - Rx -
• Choose Next to set RPI.
• Choose Finish. Notice that the 1738-AENT is now under the
I/O configuration
RPSSCENA Auxiliary Power (Mini 7/8")
Male In Connector
(view into connector)
Pin 1 - User Power +
Pin 2 - Adapter Power +
Pin 3 - Adapter Power Pin 4 - User Power -
NOTE: User power is the 24VDC power for field devices.
Adapter power is the 24VDC power for adapter. It is converted to
5VDC to power Serial Bus modules.
ATTENTION
!
Make sure all connectors and caps are securely tightened to
properly seal the connections against leaks and maintain IP67
requirements.
www.rosscontrols.com
5
Serial Bus EtherNet/IP Adapter, Series A (RPSSCENA)
Troubleshoot with the Indicators
RPSSCENA
EtherNet I/P
RPSSCENA
X100
Adapter Status
Indicator
I
P
X10
X1
A
D
D
R
E
S
S
Adapter
Status
Network
Activity
Network
Status
PointBus
Status
System
Power
PWR
Adapter
Power
Network Activity
Indicator
Network Status
Indicator
PointBus Status
Indicator
System Power
Indicator
Adapter Power
Indicator
Indication
Adapter Status
Off
Flashing
Red/Green
Green
Flashing Red
Solid Red
No power applied to device
LED power up test (module self-test)
Device is operating normally
Recoverable fault has occurred:
- Firmware (NVS) update
- Network IP address changed
- CPU load exceeded
Unrecoverable fault has occurred:
- Self-test failure (checksum failure
at power up, ramtest) failure at
power up
- Firmware fatal error
Indication
Network Activity
Off
Flashing Green/Off
Green
Probable Cause
Indication
Network Status
Off
Probable Cause
Flashing Green
Green
Flashing Red
Red
Flashing Red/Green
6
Probable Cause
No link established
Transmit or receive activity
Link established
Device is not initialized. The module
does not have an IP address.
No CIP connections. Device has an IP
address, but no CIP connections are
established.
CIP connections. Device on line, has an
IP address, and CIP connections are
established.
One or more Ethernet® connections
has timed out.
No link. The module is not physically
connected to a powered Ethernet
device.
The module is performing a self test
(only occurs during power up test).
Indication
PointBus Status
Off
Flashing Red/Green
Red
Green
Indication
System Power*
Off
Green
Indication
Adapter Power**
Off
Green
Probable Cause
Device not powered check module status indicator
Recoverable fault has occurred:
- At power up the number of
expected modules does not equal
the number of modules present
- A module is missing
- Node fault (I/O connection timeout)
Unrecoverable fault has occurred:
- The adapter is bus off
- Controller in program/idle mode
- Ethernet cable open
Adapter is on line with connections
established (normal operation,
run mode)
Probable Cause
Not active - Field power is off,
overloaded backplane or dc-dc
converter problem
System power on - dc-dc converter
active (5V)
Probable Cause
Not active - Field power is off
Power on - 24V present
* System Power Indicator shows the 5V power output from the dc-dc converter.
** Adapter Power Indicator shows the 24V power input to the dc-dc converter.
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Serial Bus EtherNet/IP Adapter, Series A (RPSSCENA)
Specifications
Following are specifications for the RPSSCENA EtherNet/IP adapter.
EtherNet/IP Adapter - RPSSCENA
Expansion I/O Capacity
• Maximum of 63 modules
• Maximum of 5 Rack Optimized connections (for digital modules only)
• Maximum of 25 Direct connections
• RPSSCENA backplane current output = 1.0A maximum. The actual number of modules
can vary. Add up the current requirements of the modules you want to use to make sure
they do not exceed the amperage limit of 1.0A for the RPSSCENA.
• Backplane current can be extended beyond 1.0A with a RPSSSE24A Backplane
Extension Power Supply. Add multiple RPSSSE24A modules to reach the 63 module
maximum.
Cat. No.
PointBus Current Requirements
RPSSN8xxx
RPSSP8xxx
RPSST8xxx
RPSSTR4M12A
RPSSNACM12A
RPSSNAVM12A
RPSSTACM12A
RPSSTAVM12A
RPSSS23A
RPSSV32A
EtherNet/IP Communication Rate
75 mA
75 mA
75 mA
90 mA
75 mA
75 mA
75 mA
75 mA
75 mA
75 mA
10/100Mbits /s, half or full-duplex
Power Supply Specifications
Power Supply
Note: In order to comply with CE Low Voltage Directives (LVD), you must use either a
NEC Class 2, a Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) or a Protected Extra Low Voltage (PELV)
power supply to power this adapter. A SELV supply cannot exceed 30V rms, 42.4V peak
or 60VDC under normal conditions and under single fault conditions. A PELV supply has
the same rating and is connected to protected earth.
Input Voltage Rating
24VDC nominal
10-28.8VDC range
Inrush Current
6A maximum for 10ms
Field Side Power Requirements, Maximum
24VDC (+20% = 28.8VDC) @ 400 mA
Interruption
Output voltage will stay within specifications when input drops out for
10ms at 10V with maximum load
General Specifications
LED Indicators
1 green/red Adapter status
1 green Network activity
1 green/red Network status
1 green/red PointBus status
1 green System Power (PoinrBus 5V power)
1 green Adapter Power (24V from field supply)
Power Consumption, Maximum
8.1W @ 28.8VDC
Power Dissipation, Maximum
2.8W @ 28.8VDC
Thermal Dissipation, Maximum
9.5 BTU/hr. @ 28.8VDC
PointBus Output Current, Maximum
1A @ 5VDC ±5% (4.75 - 5.25)
Input Overvoltage Protection
Reverse polarity protected
Isolation Voltage
(continuous-voltage withstand rating)
50V rms
Tested to withstand 1250VAC rms for 60s
Field Power Bus
Nominal Voltage
Supply Voltage
Supply Current
24VDC
10-28.8VDC range
10A maximum
Dimensions
Inches (Millimeters)
4.41H x 2.83W x 2.56D (112H x 72W x 65D)
www.rosscontrols.com
7
Serial Bus EtherNet/IP Adapter, Series A (RPSSCENA)
General Specifications (continued)
Operating Temperature
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad, Operating Cold),
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd, Operating Dry Heat),
IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb, Operating Thermal Shock):
-20 to 60°C (-4 to 140°F)
Storage Temperature
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab, Un-packaged Non-operating Cold),
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb, Un-packaged Non-operating Dry Heat),
-40 to 85°C (-40 to 185°F)
Relative Humidity
IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db, Un-packaged Non-operating Damp Heat):
5-95% non-condensing
Shock
IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea, Unpackaged Shock):
Operating 30g
Non-operating 50g
Vibration
IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc, Operating):
5g @ 10-500Hz
ESD Immunity
IEC 61000-4-2:
6kV contact discharges
8kV air discharges
Radiated RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-3:
10V/m with 1kHz sine-wave 80%AM from 30MHz to 2000MHz
10V/m with 200Hz 50% Pulse 100%AM at 900Mhz
10V/m with 200Hz 50% Pulse 100%AM at 1890Mhz
EFT/B Immunity
IEC 61000-4-4:
±4kV at 5kHz on power ports
±2kV at 5kHz on communications ports
Surge Transient Immunity
IEC 61000-4-5:
±1kV line-line(DM) and ±2kV line-earth(CM) on power ports
±2kV line-earth(CM) on unshielded communications port (tested as balanced circuits)
Conducted RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-6:
10Vrms with 1kHz sine-wave 80%AM from 150kHz to 80MHz
Emissions
CSPR 11:
Group 1, Class A
Enclosure Type Rating
Meets IP65/66/67 (when marked)
Mounting Base Screw Torque
#8 screw, 7.5 in. lbs. in Aluminum, 16 in. lbs. in Steel
1
Wiring Category
Weight
1 - on power ports
1 - on communications ports
Imperial (Metric)
Certifications: (when product is marked)
0.80 lb. (0.36 kg)
c-UL-us
UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment, certified for US and Canada
CE
European Union 89/336/EEC EMC Directive, compliant with:
EN 61000-6-4; Industrial Emissions
EN 50082-2; Industrial Immunity
EN 61326; Meas./Control/Lab., Industrial Requirements
EN 61000-6-2; Industrial Immunity
C-Tick
Australian Radiocommunications Act, compliant with:
AS/NZS CISPR 11; Industrial Emissions
EtherNet/IP
ODVA conformance tested to EtherNet/IP specifications
1. Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing. Refer to Publication A10324, “Industrial Automation Wiring
and Grounding Guidelines”.
Printed in U.S.A -0807
© Copyright 2007, ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Form A10316
Installation Safety Guidelines for Selecting and Using
ROSS CONTROLS Products and Related Accessories
! WARNING:
FAILURE OR IMPROPER SELECTION OR IMPROPER USE OF ROSS CONTROLS PRODUCTS, ASSEMBLIES OR RELATED
ITEMS (“PRODUCTS”) CAN CAUSE DEATH, PERSONAL INJURY, PROPERTY DAMAGE. POSSIBLE CONSEQUENCES OF
FAILURE OR IMPROPER SELECTION OR IMPROPER USE OF THESE PRODUCTS INCLUDE BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO:
• Unintended or mistimed cycling or motion of machine members or failure to cycle
• Work pieces or component parts being thrown off at high speeds.
• Failure of a device to function properly for example, failure to clamp or unclamp an associated item or device.
• Explosion
• Suddenly moving or falling objects.
• Release of toxic or otherwise injurious liquids or gasses.
Before selecting or using any of these Products, it is important that you read and follow the instructions below.
1. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
1.1. Scope: This safety guide is designed to cover general guidelines on the installation, use, and maintenance of ROSS CONTROLS
Valves, FRLs (Filters, Pressure Regulators, and Lubricators), and related accessory components.
1.2. Fail-Safe: Valves, FRLs, and their related components can and do fail without warning for many reasons. Design all systems and
equipment in a fail-safe mode, so that failure of associated valves, FRLs or related accessory components will not endanger persons
or property.
1.3 Relevant International Standards: For a good guide to the application of a broad spectrum of pneumatic fluid power devices see:
ISO 4414:1998, Pneumatic Fluid Power – General Rules Relating to Systems. See www.iso.org for ordering information.
1.4. Distribution: Provide a copy of this safety guide to each person that is responsible for selection, installation, or use of Valves or FRL
products. Do not select, or use ROSS CONTROLS valves or FRLs without thoroughly reading and understanding this safety guide as
well as the specific ROSS CONTROLS publications for the products considered or selected.
1.5. User Responsibility: Due to the wide variety of operating conditions and applications for valves and FRLs ROSS CONTROLS and
its distributors do not represent or warrant that any particular valve or FRL is suitable for any specific end use system. This safety
guide does not analyze all technical parameters that must be considered in selecting a product. The user, through its own analysis
and testing, is solely responsible for:
• Making the final selection of the appropriate valve, FRL or accessory.
• Assuring that all user’s performance, endurance, maintenance, safety, and warning requirements are met and that the application
presents no health or safety hazards.
• Complying with all existing warning labels and / or providing all appropriate health and safety warnings on the equipment on which
the valves or FRLs are used; and,
• Assuring compliance with all applicable government and industry standards.
1.6. Safety Devices: Safety devices must not be removed, defeated or designed around.
1.7. Warning Labels: Warning labels must not be removed, painted over or otherwise obscured.
1.8. Intake / Exhaust Restriction: Do not restrict the air flow in the supply line. To do so could reduce the pressure of the supply air
below the minimum requirements for the valve and thereby cause erratic action. Do not restrict a poppet valve’s exhaust port as
this can adversely affect its operation. Exhaust silencers must be resistant to clogging and have flow capacities at least as great
as the exhaust capacities of the valves. Contamination of the silencer can result in reduced flow and increased back pressure.
1.9. Mechanical power presses and other potentially hazardous machinery using a pneumatically controlled clutch and brake
mechanism must use a press control double valve with a monitoring device. A double valve without a self-contained monitoring
device should be used only in conjunction with a control system which assures monitoring of the valve. All double valve
installations involving hazardous applications should incorporate a monitoring system which inhibits further operation of the valve
and machine in the event of a failure within the valve mechanism.
1.10. Additional Questions: Call the appropriate ROSS CONTROLS technical service department if you have any questions or require
any additional information. See the ROSS CONTROLS publications for the product being considered or used, or call your local
distributor or ROSS CONTROLS' Technical Service department at 1-888-TEK-ROSS in the U.S.A. (1-706-356-3708 outside the
U.S.A.). You may find your local ROSS distributor at www.rosscontrols.com.
2. PRODUCT SELECTION INSTRUCTIONS
2.1. Flow Rate: The flow rate requirements of a system are frequently the primary consideration when designing any pneumatic system.
System components need to be able to provide adequate flow and pressure for the desired application.
2.2. Pressure Rating: Never exceed the rated pressure of a product. Consult product labeling, ROSS CONTROLS catalogs or the
instruction sheets supplied for maximum pressure ratings.
2.3. Temperature Rating: Never exceed the temperature rating of a product. Excessive heat can shorten the life expectancy of a product
and result in complete product failure.
2.4. Environment: Many environmental conditions can affect the integrity and suitability of a product for a given application. Ross
Controls products are designed for use in general purpose industrial applications. If these products are to be used in unusual
circumstances such as direct sunlight and/or corrosive or caustic environments, such use can shorten the useful life and lead to
premature failure of a product.
2.5. Lubrication and Compressor Carryover: Some modern synthetic oils can and will attack nitrile seals. If there is any possibility of
synthetic oils or greases migrating into the pneumatic components check for compatibility with the seal materials used. Consult the
factory or product literature for materials of construction.
2.6. Polycarbonate Bowls and Sight Glasses: All standard ROSS filters and lubricators with polycarbonate plastic bowls are designed
for compressed air applications only. Do not fail to use the metal bowl guard, where provided, to minimize danger from high pressure
fragmentation in the event of bowl failure. To avoid potential polycarbonate bowl failures:
• Do not locate polycarbonate bowls or sight glasses in areas where they could be subject to direct sunlight, impact blow, or
temperatures outside of the rated range.
• Do not expose or clean polycarbonate bowls with detergents, chlorinated hydro-carbons, keytones, esters, liquefied petroleum
gas, or certain alcohols.
• Do not use polycarbonate bowls or sight glasses in air systems where compressors are lubricated with fire resistant fluids such as
phosphate ester and di-ester lubricants.
2.7. Chemical Compatibility: For more information on plastic component chemical compatibility see ROSS' Catalog 104G (or later
version). This can be downloaded at www.rosscontrols.com or can be obtained from your local ROSS distributor.
2.8. Product Rupture: Product rupture can cause death, serious personal injury, and property damage.
• Do not connect pressure regulators or other ROSS CONTROLS products to bottled gas cylinders.
• Do not exceed the maximum primary pressure rating of any pressure regulator or any system component.
• Consult product labeling or product literature for pressure rating limitations.
2.9 ROSS expressly disclaims all warranties and responsibility for any unsatisfactory performance or injuries caused by the use of the
wrong type, wrong size, or inadequately maintained silencer installed with a ROSS product.
3. PRODUCT ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
3.1. Component Inspection: Prior to assembly or installation a careful examination of the valves and FRLs must be performed. All
components must be checked for correct style, size, and catalog number. DO NOT use any component that displays any
signs of nonconformance.
3.2. Installation Instructions: ROSS CONTROLS published installation instructions must be followed for installation of ROSS
CONTROLS valves and FRLs. These instructions are provided with every ROSS CONTROLS valve and FRL sold, or by going to
www.rosscontrols.com/rosslit.htm. All applicable instructions should be read and complied with before using any fluid power system in
order to prevent harm to persons or equipment. In addition, overhauled or serviced valves must be functionally tested prior to
installation or use.
3.3. Air Supply: The air supply or control medium supplied to valves and FRLs must be moisture-free if ambient temperature can drop
below freezing
4. VALVE AND FRL MAINTENANCE AND REPLACEMENT INSTRUCTIONS
4.1. Maintenance: Even with proper selection and installation, valve and FRL service life may be significantly reduced without a continuing
maintenance program. The severity of the application, risk potential from a component failure, and experience with any known
failures in the application or in similar applications should determine the frequency of inspections and the servicing or replacement
of ROSS CONTROLS products so that products are replaced before any failure occurs. A maintenance program must be established
and followed by the user and, at minimum, must include instructions 4.2 through 4.9.
4.2. Installation and Service Instructions: Before attempting to service or replace any worn or damaged parts consult the appropriate
service bulletin or installation / instruction sheet for the for the valve or FRL in question for the appropriate practices to service the unit
in question. These Service and Installation Instructions are provided with every ROSS CONTROLS valve and FRL sold, or are
available by calling 1-800-GET-ROSS, or by accessing the ROSS CONTROLS web site at www.rosscontrols.com.
4.3. Lockout / Tagout Procedures: Be sure to follow all required lockout and tagout procedures when servicing equipment. For more
information see: ANSI/ASSE Z244.1-2003 and OSHA Standard – 29 CFR, Part 1910.147, Appendix A, The Control of Hazardous
Energy – (Lockout / Tagout)
4.4. Visual Inspection: Any of the following conditions requires immediate system shut down and replacement of worn or damaged
components:
• Air leakage: Look and listen to see if there are any signs of visual damage to any of the components in the system. Leakage is an
indication of worn or damaged components.
• Damaged or degraded components: Look to see if there are any visible signs of wear or component degradation.
• Kinked, crushed, or damaged hoses. Kinked hoses can result in restricted air flow and lead to unpredictable system behavior.
• Any observed improper system or component function: Immediately shut down the system and correct malfunction.
• Excessive dirt build-up: Dirt and clutter can mask potentially hazardous situations.
Caution: Leak detection solutions should be rinsed off after use.
4.5. Routine Maintenance Issues:
• Remove excessive dirt, grime and clutter from work areas.
• Make sure all required guards and shields are in place.
4.6. Functional Test: Before initiating automatic operation, operate the system manually to make sure all required functions operate
properly and safely.
4.7. Service or Replacement Intervals: It is the user’s responsibility to establish appropriate service intervals. Valves and FRLs contain
components that age, harden, wear, and otherwise deteriorate over time. Environmental conditions can significantly accelerate this
process. Valves and FRLs need to be serviced or replaced on routine intervals. Service intervals need to be established based on:
• Previous performance experiences.
• Government and / or industrial standards.
• When failures could result in unacceptable down time, equipment damage or personal injury risk.
4.8. Servicing or Replacing of any Worn or Damaged Parts: To avoid unpredictable system behavior that can cause death, personal
injury and property damage:
• Follow all government, state and local safety and servicing practices prior to service including but not limited to all OSHA Lockout
Tagout procedures (ANSI/ASSE Z244.1-2003 and OSHA Standard – 29 CFR, Part 1910.147, Appendix A, The Control of
Hazardous Energy – Lockout / Tagout).
• Disconnect electrical supply (when necessary) before installation, servicing, or conversion.
• Disconnect air supply and depressurize all air lines connected to system and ROSS CONTROLS products before installation,
service, or conversion.
• Installation, servicing, and / or conversion of these products must be performed by knowledgeable personnel who understand how
pneumatic products are to be applied.
• After installation, servicing, or conversions air and electrical supplies (when necessary) should be connected and the product tested
for proper function and leakage. If audible leakage is present, or if the product does not operate properly, do not put product or
system into use.
• Warnings and specifications on the product should not be covered or painted over. If masking is not possible, contact your local
representative for replacement labels.
4.9. Putting Serviced System Back into Operation: Follow the guidelines above and all relevant Installation and Maintenance
Instructions supplied with the valve or FRL to insure proper function of the system.
Printed in U.S.A -0607
© Copyright 2007, ROSS CONTROLS. All Rights Reserved
Form A10332
Installation & Service Instructions
A10323
Serial Bus I/O RS-232 ASCII Module,
Series A (RPSSS23A)
ISSUED: August, 2007
Supersedes: None
! WARNING
To avoid unpredictable system behavior that can cause personal injury
and property damage:
• Disconnect electrical supply (when necessary) before installation,
servicing, or conversion.
• Disconnect air supply and depressurize all air lines connected to
this product before installation, servicing, or conversion.
• Operate within the manufacturer’s specified pressure, temperature,
and other conditions listed in these instructions.
• Medium must be moisture-free if ambient temperature is below
freezing.
• Service according to procedures listed in these instructions.
• Installation, service, and conversion of these products must be
performed by knowledgeable personnel who understand how
pneumatic products are to be applied.
• After installation, servicing, or conversion, air and electrical
supplies (when necessary) should be connected and the product
tested for proper function and leakage. If audible leakage is present,
or the product does not operate properly, do not put into use.
• Warnings and specifications on the product should not be
covered by paint, etc. If masking is not possible, contact your local
representative for replacement labels.
Safety Guide
For more complete information on recommended application guidelines,
see the Installation Safety Guidelines section of Bulletin 600 (Form
A10309) or you can download the Installation Safety Guidelines at:
www.rosscontrols.com/rosslit.htm.
Introduction
Follow these instructions when installing, operating, or servicing the
product.
Serial Bus I/O RS-232 ASCII Module,
Series A
(RPSSS23A)
The sealed IP67 housing of the module requires no enclosure.
(Note that environmental requirements other than IP67 may require
an additional appropriate housing.) The I/O connector is a sealed
M12 (micro) style. The mounting base ships with the module. The
RPSSS23A module is shown below.
RPSSS23A
RPSSS23A
ASCII Interface
M12
Connector
MOD
NET
LED
Indicators
TxD
RxD
! WARNING
FAILURE OR IMPROPER SELECTION OR IMPROPER USE OF THE
PRODUCTS AND/OR SYSTEMS DESCRIBED HEREIN OR RELATED
ITEMS CAN CAUSE DEATH, PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY
DAMAGE.
This document and other information from ROSS CONTROLS, its
subsidiaries and authorized distributors provide product and/or system
options for further investigation by users having technical expertise. It
is important that you analyze all aspects of your application, including
consequences of any failure and review the information concerning the
product or systems in the current product catalog. Due to the variety of
operating conditions and applications for these products or systems, the
user, through its own analysis and testing, is solely responsible for making
the final selection of the products and systems and assuring that all
performance, safety and warning requirements of the application are met.
The products described herein, including without limitation, product features,
specifications, designs, availability and pricing, are subject to change by
ROSS CONTROLS and its subsidiaries at any time without notice.
EXTRA COPIES OF THESE INSTRUCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE FOR INCLUSION
IN EQUIPMENT / MAINTENANCE MANUALS THAT UTILIZE THESE PRODUCTS.
CONTACT YOUR LOCAL REPRESENTATIVE.
Serial Bus I/O RS-232 ASCII Module, Series A (RPSSS23A)
Important User Information
ATTENTION
Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from
those of electromechanical equipment. Safety Guidelines for the
Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls
(Form #A10325) (available online at www.rosscontrols.com/rosslit.
htm), describes some important differences between solid state
equipment and hard-wired electromechanical devices. Because
of these differences, and also because of the wide variety of uses
for solid state equipment, all persons responsible for applying this
equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of
this equipment is acceptable.
In no event will ROSS CONTROLS® be responsible or liable for
indirect or consequential damages to persons or property resulting
from the use or application of this equipment.
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely
for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and
requirements associated with any particular installation, ROSS
CONTROLS cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use
based on the examples and diagrams.
No patent liability is assumed by ROSS CONTROLS with respect
to use of information, circuits, equipment, or software described in
this manual.
Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without
written permission of ROSS CONTROLS is prohibited.
Throughout this manual we use notes to make you aware of safety
considerations.
WARNING
!
Identifies information about practices or
circumstances that can cause an explosion in
a hazardous environment, which may lead to
personal injury or death, property damage, or
economic loss.
IMPORTANT
Identifies information that is critical for successful
application and understanding of the product.
ATTENTION
Identifies information about practices or
circumstances that can lead to personal injury
or death, property damage, or economic loss.
Attentions help you:
• Identify a Hazard
• Avoid a Hazard
• Recognize the Consequence
!
SHOCK HAZARD Labels may be located on or inside the
equipment to alert people that dangerous
voltage may be present.
BURN HAZARD
2
Labels may be located on or inside the
equipment to alert people that surfaces may be
dangerous temperatures.
!
Environment and Enclosure
This equipment is intended for use in overvoltage Category
II applications (as defined in IEC publication 60664-1), at
altitudes up to 2000 meters without derating. This equipment
is considered Group 1, Class A industrial equipment according
to IEC/CISPR Publication 11. Without appropriate precautions,
there may be potential difficulties ensuring electromagnetic
compatibility in other environments due to conducted as well as
radiated disturbance. This equipment is supplied as “enclosed”
equipment. It should not require additional system enclosure
when used in locations consistent with the enclosure type
ratings stated in the Specifications section of this publication.
Subsequent sections of this publication may contain additional
information regarding specific enclosure type ratings, beyond
what this product provides, that are required to comply with
certain product safety certifications.
NOTE: See NEMA Standards publication 250 and IEC
publication 60529, as applicable, for explanations of the
degrees of protection provided by different types of enclosure.
Also, see the appropriate sections in this publication, as well
as the publication A10324 (“Industrial Automation Wiring and
Grounding Guidelines”), for additional installation requirements
pertaining to this equipment.
ATTENTION
!
Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
This equipment is sensitive to electrostatic discharge, which
can cause internal damage and affect normal operation. Follow
these guidelines when you handle this equipment:
• Touch a grounded object to discharge potential static.
• Wear an approved grounding wrist strap.
• Do not touch connectors or pins on component boards.
• Do not touch circuit components inside the equipment.
• If available, use a static-safe workstation.
• When not in use, store the equipment in appropriate staticsafe packaging.
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Serial Bus I/O RS-232 ASCII Module, Series A (RPSSS23A)
Mount the I/O Base
To mount the I/O base on a wall or panel, use the screw holes
provided in the base.
IMPORTANT
The I/O module must be mounted on a grounded metal mounting
plate or other conductive surface.
A mounting illustration for the base with an adapter is shown below.
1.9
(47.2)
2.0
(50)
0.87
(22)
2.0
(50)
3.13
(79.4)
5.98*
(151.9)
Adapter
2.39
(60.7)
4.02
(102)
4.32
(109.8)
1.81
(46)
Inches
(mm)
Drill and Tap
for M4 Screw
3.02
(76.6)
5.39
(137.0)
Drill and Tap
for M6 Screw
* Depending on the type and number of manifolds, this dimension
may vary. Consult Ross for specific information.
Install the Mounting Base as Follows:
1. Lay out the required points as shown above in the drilling
dimension drawing.
2. Drill the necessary holes for #8 (M4) machine or self-tapping
screws.
3. Mount the base using #8 (M4) screws.
4. Ground the system using the ground lug connection. (The ground
lug connection is also a mounting hole.)
Mounting Base
KeyswitchSet to position 2
for the
specialty
modules
Ground Lug
Connection
Latching Mechanism
www.rosscontrols.com
3
Serial Bus I/O RS-232 ASCII Module, Series A (RPSSS23A)
Install the RS-232 ASCII Module
Wire the RS-232 ASCII Module
To Install the RS-232 ASCII Module, Proceed as Follows:
1. Using a bladed screwdriver, rotate the keyswitch on the mounting
base clockwise until the number 2 aligns with the notch in the
base.
2. Position the module vertically above the mounting base. The
module will bridge two bases.
Following are wiring instructions for the RS-232 ASCII module.
RPSSS23A
Module Will Bridge Two Bases
RPSSS23A
ASCII Interface
(view into connector)
Pin 1 - No Connect
MOD
Pin 2 - Tx +
NET
Pin 3 - Rx +
Pin 4 - Common
TxD
RxD
Pin 5 - No Connect
IMPORTANT
3. Push the module down until it engages the latching mechanism. You
will hear a clicking sound when the module is properly engaged.
The locking mechanism will lock the module to the base.
The RPSSS23A module has earth grounded metal rings.
This should be considered when choosing shielded cables and
grounding techniques.
Remove the RS-232 ASCII Module From the
Mounting Base
To Remove the Module from the Mounting Base:
1. Put a flat blade screwdriver into the slot of the orange latching
mechanism.
2. Push the screwdriver toward the I/O module to disengage the
latch. The module will lift up off the base.
3. Pull the module off of the base.
ATTENTION
!
Make sure all connectors and caps are securely tightened to
properly seal the connections against leaks and maintain IP67
requirements.
Communicate With Your Module
The RS-232 ASCII module operates as the PointBus front-end to
your serial device. Data can be exchanged with the master through a
polled, cyclic, or change of state connection. The module produces
and consumes 4 to 132 bytes of data.
EDS File Requirements
The EDS file is available online at www.rosscontrols.com/rosslit.htm
4
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Serial Bus I/O RS-232 ASCII Module, Series A (RPSSS23A)
Add RS-232 ASCII Module to RSLogix 5000
I/O Configuration
• Enter a name (optional), slot number, and comm. format. Make
sure to choose Compatible Module for Electronic Keying
setting.
To add your RS-232 ASCII module to RSLogix 5000 I/O configuration,
follow these steps:
• In RSLogix 5000:
- For ControlNet, highlight the 1738-ACNR, right click and select
New Module.
• Choose Next to set RPI.
• Choose Finish. Notice that the RS-232 ASCII module is now
under the I/O configuration
- For EtherNet/IP, highlight the 1738-AENT, right click and select
New Module.
• Choose the equivalent Rockwell Automation module
1738-232ASCM12 from the list of modules.
www.rosscontrols.com
5
Serial Bus I/O RS-232 ASCII Module, Series A (RPSSS23A)
Troubleshoot With the Indicators
RPSSS23A
RPSSS23A
ASCII Interface
Module Status Indicator
MOD
Network Status Indicator
NET
TxD
I/O Status Indicators
RxD
Indication
Module Status
Off
Green
Flashing Green
Flashing Red
Red
Flashing Red/Green
Indication
Network Status
Off
Flashing Green
Green
Flashing Red
Red
Flashing Red/Green
6
Probable Cause
No power applied to device
Device operating normally
Device needs commissioning due to
missing, incomplete, or incorrect
configuration
Recoverable fault
Unrecoverable fault may require device replacement
Device is in self-test
Probable Cause
Indication
Probable Cause
Transmit/Receive Status
Flashing
Check wiring, ground, and Rx
Transmit/Receive
connection. User parameter object
to view record numbers.
Flashing Receive/
Check wiring. Watch the Tx light. If it
Off Transmit
does not flash, check to ensure that
you are properly initiating transmission.
Use the EDS parameter object to try
transmitting and watch the light. If it
flashes, you are not properly initiating
transmission via I/O messaging. If it
does flash, check the remote device.
Off Transmit/
Check connections as you may have
Green Receive
wired the device backwards.
Device is not on line:
- Device has not completed
dup_MAC-id test.
- Device not powered - check module
status indicator.
Device is on line but has no
connections in the established state.
Device is on line and has
connections in the established state.
One or more I/O connections in
timed-out state.
Critical link failure - failed
communication device. Device
detected error that prevents it from
communicating on the network.
Communication faulted device - the
device has detected a network access
error and is in communication faulted
state. Device has received and accepted
an Identity Communication Faulted
Request - long protocol message.
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Serial Bus I/O RS-232 ASCII Module, Series A (RPSSS23A)
Specifications
Following are specifications for the RPSSS23A RS-232 ASCII module.
RS-232 ASCII Module - RPSSS23A
Inputs per Module
1 full duplex
Input Voltage
“0”, Asserted, ON, Space, Active
“1”, Disasserted, OFF, Mark, Inactive
Signal with respect to Signal Ground (SG)
+3 to +25VDC
-3 to -25VDC
Indicators
1 green/red module status indicator, logic side
1 green/red network status indicator, logic side
2 green TXD, RXD status indicators, logic side
Keyswitch Position
2 (specialty)
Current, Maximum
75 mA @ 5VDC
Power Dissipation, Maximum
0.75W @ 28.8VDC
Thermal Dissipation, Maximum
2.5 BTU/hr. @ 28.8VDC
Isolation Voltage
(continuous voltage withstand rating)
50V rms
Tested at 1250VAC rms for 60s
External DC Power
Supply Voltage
Voltage Range
Supply Current
24VDC nominal
10-28.8VDC
15 mA @ 24VDC
Fault protected to 28.8VDC
Serial Port Parameters
Serial Character Framing
7N2, 7E1, 7O1, 8N1, 8N2, 8E1, 8O1, 7E2, 7O2
Serial Port Comm Speed
9600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 19.2k, 38.4k
Serial Port Receive from ASCII Device
Maximum Number of Receive Characters
1-128
Receive Record Start Mode
No, exclude, include start delimiter
Receive Start Delimiter
ASCII character
Receive Record End Mode
No, exclude, include start delimiter
Receive End Delimiter
ASCII character
Send (Produce) on DeviceNet to Master
Receive String Data Type
Array, short_string, string
Pad Mode
Pad mode disabled, enabled
Pad Character
ASCII character
Receive Swap Mode
Disabled, 16-bit, 24-bit, 32-bit swap
DeviceNet Handshake Mode
Master/slave handshake, produce immediate
Produce Assembly Size
4-132
Serial Data
0-128 bytes
Receive Transaction ID
0-255
Serial Port Transmit to ASCII Device
Maximum Number of Transmit Characters
1-128
Transmit End Delimiter Mode
No, exclude, include end delimiter
Transmit End Delimiter Character
ASCII
Consume on DeviceNet from Master
Consume String Data Type
Array, short_string, string
Transmit Swap Mode
Disabled, 16-bit, 24-bit, 32-bit swap
DeviceNet Record Header Mode
Transmit handshake/immediate
Consume Assembly Size
4-132
www.rosscontrols.com
7
Serial Bus I/O RS-232 ASCII Module, Series A (RPSSS23A)
Serial Port Transmit/Explicit Messages
Transmit Serial Data String
0-128 bytes
Transmitted Serial Data Length
0-128 bytes
Transmit Transaction ID
0-255
Status
TX FIFO overflow, RX FIFO overflow, RX parity error, handshake error, new data flag
General Specifications
Dimensions
Inches (Metric)
1.25H x 2.63W x 4.25D (31.75H x 66.80W x 107.95D)
Operating Temperature
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad, Operating Cold),
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd, Operating Dry Heat),
IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb, Operating Thermal Shock):
-20 to 60°C (-4 to 140°F)
Storage Temperature
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab, Un-packaged Non-operating Cold),
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb, Un-packaged Non-operating Dry Heat),
-40 to 85°C (-40 to 185°F)
Relative Humidity
IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db, Un-packaged Non-operating Damp Heat):
5 to 95% non-condensing
Shock
IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea, Unpackaged Shock):
Operating 30g
Non-operating 50g
Vibration
IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc, Operating):
5g @ 10 to 500Hz
ESD Immunity
IEC 61000-4-2:
6kV contact discharges
8kV air discharges
Radiated RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-3:
10V/m with 1kHz sine-wave 80%AM from 30MHz to 2000MHz
10V/m with 200Hz 50% Pulse 100%AM at 900Mhz
10V/m with 200Hz 50% Pulse 100%AM at 1890Mhz
EFT/B Immunity
IEC 61000-4-4:
±2kV at 5kHz on communications ports
Surge Transient Immunity
IEC 61000-4-5:
±2kV line-earth(CM) on shielded ports
Conducted RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-6:
10Vrms with 1kHz sine-wave 80%AM from 150kHz to 80MHz
Emissions
CSPR 11:
Group 1, Class A
Enclosure Type Rating
Meets IP65/66/67 (when marked)
Mounting Base Screw Torque
#8 screw, 7.5 in. lbs. in Aluminum, 16 in. lbs. in Steel
1
2 - on communications ports
Wiring Category
Weight
Imperial (Metric)
Certifications: (when product is marked)
0.637 lb. (0.289 kg)
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment, certified for US and Canada
CE
European Union 89/336/EEC EMC Directive, compliant with:
EN 61000-6-4; Industrial Emissions
EN 50082-2; Industrial Immunity
EN 61326; Meas./Control/Lab., Industrial Requirements
EN 61000-6-2; Industrial Immunity
C- Tick
Australian Radiocommunications Act, compliant with:
AS/NZS CISPR 11; Industrial Emissions
1. Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing. Refer to Publication A10324, “Industrial Automation Wiring
and Grounding Guidelines”.
Printed in U.S.A -0807
© Copyright 2007, ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Form A10323
Installation & Service Instructions
A10327
Size 0 & Size 00 ISO 15407-2
Interposed Flow Controls
ISSUED: August, 2007
Supersedes: None
!
WARNING
To avoid unpredictable system behavior that can cause personal injury
and property damage:
• Disconnect electrical supply (when necessary) before installation,
servicing, or conversion.
• Disconnect air supply and depressurize all air lines connected to this
product before installation, servicing, or conversion.
• Operate within the manufacturer’s specified pressure, temperature,
and other conditions listed in these instructions.
• Medium must be moisture-free if ambient temperature is below
freezing.
• Service according to procedures listed in these instructions.
• Installation, service, and conversion of these products must be
performed by knowledgeable personnel who understand how
pneumatic products are to be applied.
• After installation, servicing, or conversion, air and electrical supplies
(when necessary) should be connected and the product tested for
proper function and leakage. If audible leakage is present, or the
product does not operate properly, do not put into use.
• Warnings and specifications on the product should not be covered by
paint, etc. If masking is not possible, contact your local representative
for replacement labels.
Safety Guide
For more complete information on recommended application guidelines,
see the Installation Safety Guidelines section of Bulletin 600 (Form
A10309) or you can download the Installation Safety Guidelines at:
www.rosscontrols.com/rosslit.htm.
! WARNING
FAILURE OR IMPROPER SELECTION OR IMPROPER USE OF THE
PRODUCTS AND/OR SYSTEMS DESCRIBED HEREIN OR RELATED ITEMS
CAN CAUSE DEATH, PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE.
This document and other information from ROSS CONTROLS, its subsidiaries
and authorized distributors provide product and/or system options for further
investigation by users having technical expertise. It is important that you
analyze all aspects of your application, including consequences of any failure
and review the information concerning the product or systems in the current
product catalog. Due to the variety of operating conditions and applications for
these products or systems, the user, through its own analysis and testing, is
solely responsible for making the final selection of the products and systems
and assuring that all performance, safety and warning requirements of the
application are met.
The products described herein, including without limitation, product features,
specifications, designs, availability and pricing, are subject to change by ROSS
CONTROLS and its subsidiaries at any time without notice.
EXTRA COPIES OF THESE INSTRUCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE FOR INCLUSION
IN EQUIPMENT / MAINTENANCE MANUALS THAT UTILIZE THESE PRODUCTS.
CONTACT YOUR LOCAL REPRESENTATIVE.
The “Interposed” Flow Control is intended for use with the
respective subbase or manifold mounted valves. Size 0 &
Size 00 valves and flow controls are designed in conformance
to ISO 15407-2. Size 0 & Size 00 Flow Controls are only
recommended for use with Common Port versions of Interposed
Regulators. The Flow Control is to be assembled between the
regulator and the subbase or manifold.
If used with Independent Port version of Interposed Regulator,
functionality is limited as follows:
“Interposed” Flow Control used in conjunction with
Independent Port version of Interposed Regulator - Adjust
speed with the adjusting screw labeled “5”. It adjusts the speed
of exhaust flow from cylinder ports “2” and “4”. Independent
speed adjustment is not possible. This could result in different
exhaust speeds for cylinder ports “2” and “4” since line pressure is
supplied to one cylinder port and a regulated pressure is supplied
to the other. The other adjusting screw is non-functional.
Lubrication
Factory Pre-lubed. If lubricating in service, use paraffin based
mineral oil with 150 to 200 SSU viscosity @100°F.
! CAUTION: Do not use oils that are synthetic, reconstituted,
have an alcohol content or a detergent additive.
Application Limits:
These products are intended for use in general purpose
compressed air systems only.
Operating Pressure Range: Maximum 145 PSIG, 1000kPa
Ambient Temperature Range: -15°C to 49°C (5°F to 120°F)
ANSI Symbol:
5
5
Valve Side
4 1
2
4 1
2
Base Side
3
3
Installation:
(See Figure 1, Size 00 Interposed Flow Control shown as
example)
Introduction
Follow these instructions when installing, operating, or servicing
the product.
Installation & Operating Instructions:
An “Interposed” Flow Control controls the flow of air from
the valve exhaust ports to atmosphere. The Size 0 & Size 00
4-Way valve is typically used with a double acting cylinder
alternately pressurizing one end while exhausting the other.
Cylinder speed can be influenced by restricting the exhaust
path.
!
Warning:
Not following instruction may result in Interposed Fow Control damage
or inadequate thread engagement, which may lead to personal injury,
property damage, or economic loss.
Important:
• Remove pressure and electrical connections before installation.
• All threads on tie rods and screws must be free of rust, water or other
debris, which could prevent finger thread engagement.
W66 Size 0 & W66 Size 00 Interposed Flow Controls
Step 1: Install Tie Rods
1. Install two Tie Rods (6) to the base,
torque finger tight.
2. Adjust tie rod height to 28.5/28.0 mm
(1.12/1.10 inch) as figure shows.
3. If finger tight height exceeds 28.5 mm
(1.12 inch), use mechanical tightening as
necessary to get the proper height.
Max: 28.5 mm
(1.12 Inch)
Min: 28.0 mm
(1.10 Inch)
2
4
Note: “Base” could be a manifold or a sub-base.
4
4. Using hex wrench, tighten two Screws (4) – torque 1.5 to 1.7
Nm (13 to 15 in-lb) for Size 0, 0.9 to 1.1 Nm (8 to 10 in-lb)
for Size 00.
Step 4: Leakage Check
1. Apply pressure to base and check for audible leakage at
various joints. If any are present, do not not operate the
valve, repeat the assembly procedure until satisfied.
Note: If both a Interposed Flow Control and Interposed Regulator is to
be installed, the Flow Control should be installed between the
Regulator and the Base. Refer to Interposed Regulator Installation
& Service Instructions (A10329) for Interposed Regulator
installation.
Adjustment Procedures:
Valve
Electrical
Plug
5
Valve
Body
1
3
5
For Size 0 & Size 00
Both Adjusting Screws (4) are located at the 12 End of the
assembly. Adjustment screw labeled “5” controls the flow of air
from cylinder Port 4 to exhaust Port 5. With a double solenoid
valve this occurs when Operator #12 is actuated. With a single
solenoid valve this occurs when Operator #14 is not actuated.
Adjustment screw labeled “3” controls air from cylinder Port 2 to
exhaust Port 3.
1. Turn both adjustment screws clockwise until fully closed and
then counterclockwise slightly.
2. While cycling valve with cylinder adjust clockwise to
decrease speed or counterclockwise to increase speed.
2
Component List
3
The components listed below are for identification purposes only,
some of these components are available in various Interposed
Flow Control Kits, some are not available due to special factory
assembly. Individual components are not sold separately since
all kit components should be installed when serviced.
2
Base
Figure 1 (Size 00 Shown)
Step 2: Install Interposed Flow Control
1. Lay the Interposed Flow Control Gasket (2) on the Base.
Make sure the two rubber projections are face up and the
orientation of the gasket is correct.
2. Engage both Tie Rods (3) into mounting holes on Flow
Control Body, lower the Flow Control body.
3. Carefully engage the Electrical Plug into the Base.
4. Continue to lower the Flow Control Body by carefully
engaging the two rubber projections on the gasket into the
appropriate holes on the Flow Control Body.
5. Press the Flow Control Body by hand firmly. To confirm
the gasket is indeed attached to the Flow Control Body, lift
the Flow Control Body by about one half inch. Both rubber
projections should remain in the holes.
6. Lay the Flow Control Body back on the Base.
Step 3: Install Valve
1. Locate Valve Gasket (5) on bottom of Valve Body.
2. Install valve onto Flow Control.
3. Carefully engage the Valve Electrical Plug.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
Description
Flow Control Body
Flow Control / Regulator Gasket
Tie Rods
Mounting Screws
Valve Gasket
Interposed Flow Control Kits
Kit
Size
Number
Item # (Qty)
Size 00 RPS5635
1, 2, 3 (2)
Size 0 RPS5535
1, 2, 3 (2)
Kit Includes
Description
18mm Interposed Flow Control
Kit with Plug-in (Type 2)
26mm Interposed Flow Control
Kit with Plug-in (Type 2)
1 (Without Elect.
18mm Interposed Flow Control
Plug), 2, 3
Kit without Plug-in (Type 1)
(2)
1 (Without Elect. 26mm Interposed Flow Control
Size 0 RPS5542
Plug), 2, 3 (2)
Kit with Plug-in (Type 1)
18mm Interposed Flow Control
Size 00 RPS5636
3 (12)
Tie Rod Kit
26mm Interposed Flow Control
Size 0 RPS5536
3 (12)
Tie Rod Kit
Size 00 RPS5642
For all Instruction Sheets, go to www.rosscontrols.com
A10326 - W66 Size 0 (26mm) & W66 Size 00 (18mm) ISO 15407 Valve Service
A10327 - W66 Size 0 & W66 Size 00 ISO 15407-2 Interposed Flow Controls
A10329 - W66 Size 0 & W66 Size 00 Interposed Regulators
Printed in U.S.A -0807
A10330 - W66 Size 0 & W66 Size 00 ISO 15407-1 Subbbase & Manifold
Installation
A10331 - W65 Size 1, 2 & 3, ISO 5599-1, 5599-2 Subbase & Manifold
Installation
© Copyright 2007, ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Form A10327
Installation & Service Instructions
A10328
Size 0 & Size 00 ISO 15407-2
Manifold Installation
ISSUED: August, 2007
Supersedes: None
Application Limits
! WARNING
To avoid unpredictable system behavior that can cause personal injury
and property damage:
• Disconnect electrical supply (when necessary) before installation,
servicing, or conversion.
• Disconnect air supply and depressurize all air lines connected to
this product before installation, servicing, or conversion.
• Operate within the manufacturer’s specified pressure, temperature,
and other conditions listed in these instructions.
• Medium must be moisture-free if ambient temperature is below
freezing.
• Service according to procedures listed in these instructions.
• Installation, service, and conversion of these products must be
performed by knowledgeable personnel who understand how
pneumatic products are to be applied.
• After installation, servicing, or conversion, air and electrical
supplies (when necessary) should be connected and the product
tested for proper function and leakage. If audible leakage is present,
or the product does not operate properly, do not put into use.
• Warnings and specifications on the product should not be
covered by paint, etc. If masking is not possible, contact your local
representative for replacement labels.
These products are intended for use in general purpose
compressed air systems only. Compliance with the rated
pressure, temperature, and voltage is necessary - see Installation
& Service Instructions packed with valve.
Wiring Instructions for Individual Base Wiring
1. Follow all requirements for local and national electrical
codes.
2. Remove end cover from base by backing off the two captive
screws.
3. Connect wires as shown in chart.
4. An external ground connection must be attached to the
green ground screw of every base in an assembly.
5. Disregard unused wires or terminals.
6. Reassemble cover to base by tightening screws from 0.8 to
1.0 Nm (7 to 9 in-lbs).
Subbase Wiring
Safety Guide
For more complete information on recommended application guidelines,
see the Installation Safety Guidelines section of Bulletin 600 (Form
A10309) or you can download the Installation Safety Guidelines at:
www.rosscontrols.com/rosslit.htm.
4
3
! WARNING
FAILURE OR IMPROPER SELECTION OR IMPROPER USE OF THE
PRODUCTS AND/OR SYSTEMS DESCRIBED HEREIN OR RELATED ITEMS
CAN CAUSE DEATH, PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE.
This document and other information from ROSS CONTROLS, its subsidiaries
and authorized distributors provide product and/or system options for further
investigation by users having technical expertise. It is important that you
analyze all aspects of your application, including consequences of any failure
and review the information concerning the product or systems in the current
product catalog. Due to the variety of operating conditions and applications for
these products or systems, the user, through its own analysis and testing, is
solely responsible for making the final selection of the products and systems
and assuring that all performance, safety and warning requirements of the
application are met.
The products described herein, including without limitation, product features,
specifications, designs, availability and pricing, are subject to change by ROSS
CONTROLS and its subsidiaries at any time without notice.
Comm
Ground
(Customer)
12 Terminal
Ground
(Ross)
14 Terminal
Connections
14 Solenoid
12 Solenoid
Valves with Wires
Black Wires
Red Wires
Valves with Terminal Block
(Will accept 18 to 24 Gauge Wires)
14 and Com
Terminals
12 and Com
Terminals
EXTRA COPIES OF THESE INSTRUCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE FOR INCLUSION
IN EQUIPMENT / MAINTENANCE MANUALS THAT UTILIZE THESE PRODUCTS.
CONTACT YOUR LOCAL REPRESENTATIVE.
Manifold Wiring
! WARNING
Air exhausting from one valve into the exhaust gallery of the manifold
assembly may momentarily pressurize other valve circuits open to
the same gallery. Design the circuit such that there is no hazard or
consequence of damage from this action.
Introduction
Follow these instructions when installing, operating, or servicing
the product.
12B
14A
14B
12A
Ground
(Customer)
Common
W66 Size 0 & W66 Size 00 ISO 15407-2 Manifold Installation
3
5
3
2
7
12
3
G
2
Standard
9
3/5
Blocked 1
6
7
7
1
3
2
2
8
4
Blocked 5, 3, 1
3
Blocked 5, 3
16-Pin Terminal Strip
2
(Shown with Cover Removed)
2
4
3
2
2
1
12
G
10
2
14 End
3/5
1
12
G
Detail A
10
3/5
12
12
12 End
G
G
3/5
3/5
1
16-Pin Terminal Strip
End Plate
See Detail A
Item # Description
1
2
3
4
5
Left End Plate
Tie Rod (3 per Base)
Gasket - Standard
Manifold Base (Size 00)
Gasket - Blocked 1
External
Ground
Location
(Green Screw)
1
25-Pin D-Sub
End Plate
Item # Description
6
7
8
9
10
Gasket - Blocked 1, 3, 5
Manifold Base (Size 0)
Right End Plate
Mounting Screws
Pipe Plug
Assembly Techniques
1. Lay Left Hand End Plate (Item 1) on left side (when looking
at cylinder ports).
2. Attach three Tie Rods (Item 2) to the Left End Plate
(Item 1) by hand tightening them down completely and then
backing off 1-2 turns. Mount the Gasket (Item 3) over the
Tie Rods.
3. Add Manifold Base (Item 4). Place 3 Tie Rods (Item 2)
through the Base and screw into the Tie Rods mounted in
the Left End Plate by hand tightening them down completely
and then backing off 1-2 turns.
4. Build manifold vertically by adding remaining Manifolds,
Gaskets and Tie Rods.
5. Place Right Hand End Plate and tighten screws to torque
specification.
6. Check the manifold for straightness. Loosen and tighten
bolts if needed.
7. Add Valves and Accessories. All Manifold Assemblies should
be leak tested before operation.
! Caution: If the socket head cap screws do not engage
the last tie rod, it is because the stack of uncompressed
gaskets causes the manifolds and gaskets to be longer
than the tie rod sets. It will be necessary to lengthen
the tie rod sets by backing away each tie rod from its
adjacent tie rod about one or two turns. This stack length
2
1
External Ground
Location (Green Screw)
M23, 12-Pin Round or
19-Pin Round End Plate
problem is likely to occur at 6 or 7 manifold bases and
worsens with each additional manifold
Manifold Assembly Wiring Instructions
1. Follow all requirements for local and national electrical
codes.
2. An External Ground Connection must be attached to the
Manifold Assembly. An external ground location is provided
on the Manifold End Plate (See drawing). All 25-Pin, D-Sub
versions must use this ground connection. 19-Pin and 16-Pin
Terminal Strip versions may omit this connection only if the
ground is connected through the connector. Otherwise, the
external ground connection location must be used.
Manifold / End Plate Assembly Torque Values
W66 Size 0 / W66 Size 00
Torque - in.lb. (Nm)
65 to 70 (7.3 to 7.9)
Manifold Kits
Kit Number
Description
Item
Number
RPS5612P
Size 00 Manifold Hardware Kit
2
RPS5512P
Size 0 Manifold Hardware Kit
2
RPS561AP
Size 00 / Size 0 Manifold to Manifold
Gasket Kit (Standard)
3
RPS561BP
Size 00 / Size 0 Manifold to Manifold
Gasket Kit (Blocked #1 Port)
5
RPS561CP
Size 00 / Size 0 Manifold to Manifold
Gasket Kit (Blocked #1, 3, 5 Ports)
6
RPS561DP
Size 00 / Size 0 Manifold to Manifold
Gasket Kit (Blocked #3, 5 Ports)
7
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
W66 Size 0 & W66 Size 00 ISO 15407-2 Manifold Installation
25-Pin, D-Sub Connector (Male)
16-Pin Terminal Block
Terminal
G
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12
13 14 15
16
Valve
Solenoid GND COM 1
C
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12
13 14 15
16
Address
G C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 111213 1415 16
Pin
Number
2
4
Push Orange Lever
with Screwdriver
Insert Wire into Hole.
Strip Length 10mm.
Use 18-22 AWG Wire.
6
8
10
12
Pin
Number
1
2
14
15
16
17
18
14
16
18
19
20
21
22
20
22
24
23
24
25
Address
1
3
5
3
4
5
6
7
9
11
13
7
8
9
10
15
17
19
21
11
12
13
23
Common
Face View - Male D-Sub, 25-Pin Connector
25-Pin, D-Sub Cable (Female)
19-Pin Round Brad Harrison
Pin
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Address
1
2
3
4
N/A
5
Common
6
7
8
11
10
9
13
19
17
16
8
1
12
18
7
Pin
Number
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2
3
14
15
4
5
6
Address
9
Ground
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Face View - Male 19-Pin Connector
19-Pin Round Cable Specifications
Common Pin “7” is rated for 8 amps. Cable common wire must
be greater than total amperage of solenoids on a manidfold
assembly.
Example: 8 station manifold, 16 solenoids,
120VAC - 16 x .039 amps = .63 total amp rating.
NEMA 4 rated with properly assembled NEMA 4 rated cable.
Part Number
Description
Length
R333030P80M050
Brad Harrison (Female to Male Cable)
16.40 ft.
R333030P80M100
Brad Harrison (Female to Male Cable)
32.80 ft.
Pin
Color
Number
Address
1
Black
1
2
Brown
3
3
Red
5
4
Orange
7
5
Yellow
9
6
Green
11
7
Blue
13
8
Purple
15
9
Gray
17
10
White
19
11
Pink
21
12
Lt Green
23
13
Common Black / White
Pin
Number
Color
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Brown / White
Red / White
Orange / White
Green / White
Blue / White
Purple / White
Red / Black
Orange / Black
Yellow / Black
Green / Black
Gray / Black
Pink / Black
Address
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
25-Pin, D-Sub Cable Specifications
Common Pin “13” is rated for 3 amps. Common wire rating
must be greater than total amperage of all solenoids on a
manifold assembly.
IP65 rated with properly assembled IP65 rated cable.
M23, 12-Pin Round Connector (Male)
Pin
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
Address
Input 0
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5
1
8
7
2
9
12
6
10
3
11
5
4
Pin
Number
7
8
9
10
11
12
Address
Input 6
Input 7
Ret (Common)
Ret (Common)
Not Used
Ground
Face View - Male M23, 12-Pin Connector
M23, 12-Pin Round Connector (Female)
Pin
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
Address
Input 0
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5
8
1
2
7
9
10
3
11
6
11
4
5
Pin
Number
7
8
9
10
11
12
Address
Input 6
Input 7
Ret (Common)
Ret (Common)
Not Used
Ground
Face View - Female M23, 12-Pin Connector
For all Instruction Sheets, go to www.rosscontrols.com
A10326 - W66 Size 0 (26mm) & W66 Size 00 (18mm) ISO 15407 Valve Service
A10327 - W66 Size 0 & W66 Size 00 ISO 15407-2 Interposed Flow Controls
A10329 - W66 Size 0 & W66 Size 00 Interposed Regulators
Printed in U.S.A -0407
A10330 - W66 Size 0 & W66 Size 00 ISO 15407-1 Subbbase & Manifold
Installation
A10331 - W65 Size 1, 2 & 3, ISO 5599-1, 5599-2 Subbase & Manifold
Installation
Copyright 2007, ROSS CONTROLS. All Rights Reserved
Form A10328
Installation & Service Instructions
A10331
Size 1, 2 & 3, ISO 5599-1, 5599-2
Subbase & Manifold Installation
ISSUED: August, 2007
Supersedes: None
Wiring Instructions for Individual Base Wiring
! WARNING
To avoid unpredictable system behavior that can cause personal injury
and property damage:
• Disconnect electrical supply (when necessary) before installation,
servicing, or conversion.
• Disconnect air supply and depressurize all air lines connected to
this product before installation, servicing, or conversion.
• Operate within the manufacturer’s specified pressure, temperature,
and other conditions listed in these instructions.
• Medium must be moisture-free if ambient temperature is below
freezing.
• Service according to procedures listed in these instructions.
• Installation, service, and conversion of these products must be
performed by knowledgeable personnel who understand how
pneumatic products are to be applied.
• After installation, servicing, or conversion, air and electrical supplies
(when necessary) should be connected and the product tested for
proper function and leakage. If audible leakage is present, or the
product does not operate properly, do not put into use.
• Warnings and specifications on the product should not be
covered by paint, etc. If masking is not possible, contact your local
representative for replacement labels.
1. Follow all requirements for local and national electrical
codes.
2. Remove end cover from base by backing out the two
screws.
3. Connect wires as shown in chart.
4. An external ground connection must be attached to the
green ground screw of every base in an assembly.
5. Disregard unused wires or terminals.
6. Reassemble cover to base by tightening screws from
0.8 to 1.0 Nm (7 to 9 in-lbs).
Connections
Ground
(Terminal Block
applications
only)
Safety Guide
For more complete information on recommended application guidelines,
see the Installation Safety Guidelines section of Bulletin 600 (Form
A10309) or you can download the Installation Safety Guidelines at:
www.rosscontrols.com/rosslit.htm.
! WARNING
FAILURE OR IMPROPER SELECTION OR IMPROPER USE OF THE
PRODUCTS AND/OR SYSTEMS DESCRIBED HEREIN OR RELATED ITEMS
CAN CAUSE DEATH, PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE.
This document and other information from ROSS CONTROLS, its subsidiaries
and authorized distributors provide product and/or system options for further
investigation by users having technical expertise. It is important that you
analyze all aspects of your application, including consequences of any failure
and review the information concerning the product or systems in the current
product catalog. Due to the variety of operating conditions and applications for
these products or systems, the user, through its own analysis and testing, is
solely responsible for making the final selection of the products and systems
and assuring that all performance, safety and warning requirements of the
application are met.
The products described herein, including without limitation, product features,
specifications, designs, availability and pricing, are subject to change by ROSS
CONTROLS and its subsidiaries at any time without notice.
EXTRA COPIES OF THESE INSTRUCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE FOR INCLUSION
IN EQUIPMENT / MAINTENANCE MANUALS THAT UTILIZE THESE PRODUCTS.
CONTACT YOUR LOCAL REPRESENTATIVE.
! WARNING
Air exhausting from one valve into the exhaust gallery of the manifold
assembly may momentarily pressurize other valve circuits open to
the same gallery. Design the circuit such that there is no hazard or
consequence of damage from this action.
Application Limits
These products are intended for use in general purpose
compressed air systems only. Compliance with the rated
pressure, temperature, and voltage is necessary - see
Installation & Service Instructions packed with valve.
14
12
12 Solenoid
Red Wires
12 and Com
Terminals
Black
Red
14 Terminal
3, 4 or 5-Pin
Connector
Subbase
With Auto C, F, G
Com Terminal
12 Terminal
Ground
(All Other
Applications))
Subbase
With Terminal Block
Green
Subbase
With Wires
Ground
(Terminal Block
Applications
Only)
14
12
14 Terminal
Com Terminal
3, 4 or 5-Pin
Connector
Manifold
With Auto C, F, G
Black
Red
12 Terminal Ground
(All Other
Applications))
Manifold
With Terminal Block
Green
Manifold
With Wires
Wiring - Auto C, F, G
Pin 1
(Green)
Pin 2
(Black)
Pin 1
(Brown)
Pin 4
(Black)
Pin 2
(White)
Pin 3
(White)
Wiring Type
Pin #1
Pin 5
Pin 1
(White) (Black)
Pin 2
(Red)
4-Pin M12
Enclosure “8”
3-Pin Mini
Encl ‘7’
C, F, G
Gnd
Pin 4
(Orange)
Pin 3
(Green)
Pin 3
(Blue)
3-Pin Mini
Enclosure “7”
Introduction
Follow these instructions when installing, operating, or servicing
the product.
14 Solenoid
Black Wires
14 and Com
Terminals
Bases with Wires
Bases with Terminal Block
(Will accept 18 to 24 Gauge Wires)
5-Pin Mini
Enclosure “9”
4-Pin M12
Encl ‘8’
C
F
G
5-Pin Mini
Encl ‘9’
C
F
G
14
N/A
12
12
Gnd
12
N/A
Pin #2
14
Pin #3
Com
Pin #4
N/A
12
14
Pin #5
N/A
N/A
N/A
14
12
12
12
14
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
14
14
12
14
N/A
14
14
12
Com Com Com
Size 1, 2 & 3 Subbase & Manifold Installation
Wiring Instructions for
Manifold Interconnect Wiring
!
19-Pin Round Collective Wiring Module
CAUTION: An interruption of 10 milliseconds or greater
to the power supplied to the solenoid of a solenoid
operated valve may cause the valve to shift. Provision
must be made to prevent power interruption of this
duration to avoid unintended, potentially hazardous,
consequences.
For connection simplicity, the Interconnect Wiring System
has a single common lead with an amperage limit of 3 amps
continuous service. The following chart indicates the upper limit
of solenoids that can be energized simultaneously.
Voltage
25-Pin
Code
42
42
B9
23
12VDC
24VAC*
24VDC
120VAC*
19-Pin
D-Sub
13
24
20
24
Single
Round
13
16
16
16
12-Pin M23
8
8
8
8
* Not CSA certified for 25-Pin, D-Sub option.
The Interconnect Wiring System has great flexibility to meet
user wiring needs. Each manifold base must be ordered with
either a single or double address function. The single address
circuit board works with single solenoid valves only. The double
address circuit board works with both single and double solenoid
valves. The end cover of each manifold base is labeled either
“Single Address” or “Double Address”. Power signals are
connected at the 25-Pin D-Sub Collective Wiring Module /
Plate (Figure 1), 19-Pin Round Collective Wiring Module / Plate
(Figure 2), or 12-Pin Round Collective Wiring Module / Plate
(Figure 3). A single address base uses one signal; a double
address base uses two signals, the first to the 14 solenoid, the
second to the 12 solenoid. Signal usage is sequential through
the bases. Any combination of single or double addresses may
be used.
25-Pin D-Sub Collective Wiring Module
Common Pin “13” is rated for 3 amps. Common wire rating MUST
be greater than total amperage of all solenoids on a manifold
assembly.
Address
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
Pin
Number
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Pin
Number
1
2
Address
1
3
5
3
4
5
6
7
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
8
9
10
11
12
21
23
13
Common
Face View - Male D-Sub, 25-Pin Connector
Address
1
3
Color
Black
Brown
5
7
9
11
13
Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
Purple
15
Gray
17
White
19
Pink
21
Lt Green
23
Common Black / White
Pin
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Pin
Number
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Color
Brown / White
Red / White
Orange / White
Green / White
Blue / White
Purple / White
Red / Black
Orange / Black
Yellow / Black
Green / Black
Gray / Black
Pink / Black
Address
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
Face View -Female D-Sub, 25-Pin Connector
Figure 1
2
Common Pin “7” is rated for 8 amps. Common wire rating
MUST be greater than total amperage of all solenoids on a
manifold assembly.
Pin
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Address
1
2
3
4
N/A
5
Common
6
7
8
11
10
9
2
13
19
17
16
8
1
12
18
7
3
14
15
4
5
6
Pin
Number
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Address
9
Ground
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Face View - Male 19-Pin Connector
Figure 2
12-Pin Round Collective Wiring Module
Common Pins “9” and “10” are rated for 8 amps. Common
wire rating MUST be greater than total amperage of all
solenoids on a manifold assembly.
Pin
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
Address
Input 0
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5
1
8
7
2
9
12
6
10
3
11
4
5
Pin
Number
7
8
9
10
11
12
Address
Input 6
Input 7
Ret (Common)
Ret (Common)
Not Used
Ground
Face View - Male M23, 12-Pin Connector
Pin
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
Address
Input 0
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5
8
1
2
7
9
10
3
11
6
11
4
5
Pin
Number
7
8
9
10
11
12
Address
Input 6
Input 7
Ret (Common)
Ret (Common)
Not Used
Ground
Face View - Female M23, 12-Pin Connector
Figure 3
Grounding Instructions
The Collective Wiring addressing system is grounded by
connecting a user supplied case wire to the outside ground
screw on the End Plate (Size 1) or the Interface Plate (Size 2 /
Size 3). Use 18 gauge, or larger, case wire.
The Collective Wiring 25-Pin D-Sub internal ground is made
by connecting the loose ring terminal to the ground screw
provided at the internal wire passageway on the Size 1. The
Size 2 / Size 3 internal ground connection is the ground screw
on the Interface Plate located closer to the wire passageway.
The collective wiring 12-Pin or 19-Pin Round Connector
internal ground is made by connecting the lead wire with a
ring terminal (ground wire) to the ground screw provided at
the internal wire passageway (Size 1) or at the Interface Plate
ground screw located closer to the wire passageway.
An earth ground is recommended for all voltages. Follow
standard electrical protocol.
Air Piping Assembly
Port Connections:
Manifold stacks / subbases have three common air passage
galleries. For Single pressure piping, connect the inlet supply to
Port #1; Ports #3 and #5 are then the exhaust ports. For Dual
pressure piping, connect the two inlet supplies to Port #3 and
Port #5 (it is recommended that the higher pressure be supplied
to Port #3); Port #1 is then the exhaust port. See Manifold
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Size 1, 2 & 3 Subbase & Manifold Installation
Isolation (Page 8) if the application requires groups of valves
with different pressure supplies. Connect the cylinder ports #2
and #4 to the cylinder or other device to be supplied with air from
the valve. These ports are at the end (and bottom, if so ordered)
of each base.
Remote Pilot Signal Connections:
Manifolds:
For remote pilot signal valves, connect the pilot signal to the
Remote Pilot Access Plate mounted directly under the valve
body. NOTE: Signals into the remote pilot plate do not connect
to the #12 or #14 galleries on the End Plates. See Remote Pilot
Access Plate instructions.
Note: If Pressure is supplied to one end of a manifold, the pressure
port(s) on the opposite end must be plugged.
External Pilot Connections:
An external pilot supply is used when the main inlet pressure is
below the minimum valve operating pressure or when the pilot
pressure is different from the main inlet pressure. Supply pilot air
to either Port #14 or Port #12 and plug the one not being used.
Subbases:
Connect pilot signal to the #12 and #14 Ports.
Manifold Assembly with Interconnect Wiring
the harness into the base connector circuit board. The
connectors are keyed, there is only one assembly possible.
Do not twist cables. Attach the Base to the Interconnect
Wiring Plate by finger tightening the three Bolts (Item 4).
Continue to mount each successive Gasket (Item 2) and
Base (Item 3) to the previous Base. Lay the entire manifold
on a flat surface, align for straightness and alternately
tighten each screw incrementally to torque specifications in
the torque chart. Place the right hand End Plate (Item 5) on
last base and tighten screws (see torque chart).
3. NOTE: Transition Plates or Isolation Plugs must be
properly placed as the construction of the stack
progresses. See individual sections of this bulletin.
4. Add valves and accessories to the manifold (if not already
attached). The final assembly should be leak and electrically
tested before operation.
The Interconnect Wiring System (Figure 4 & 5) makes the
electrical connection user friendly. Each individual manifold
base carries its own connector circuit board which self aligns
and plugs into the circuit board of the mating manifold base.
The power is supplied at the left end of the stack (as you are
viewing the cylinder ports) by means of a plug-in harness or
serial module.
The stack assembly is built from left to right (viewing the cylinder
ports). Start with the Interconnect Wiring Module Kit and add
manifold bases as required. If the stack includes transitions
from one valve size to another, the left most size is the smallest
and then progressing to successively larger sizes. Follow the
techniques described below for the easiest assembly. Consult
the torque chart for screw tightening specifications.
For Size 1 Valves (See Figure 4)
Manifold / End Plate Assembly Torque Values
1. Lay Interconnect Wiring Plate (Item 1 / 7) port side down
(when looking at Manifold Cylinder Ports) and expose the
wiring harness. Locate Gasket (Item 2) in place on the
Interconnect Wiring Plate (Item 1).
2. Bring the first station Manifold Base to the Interconnect
Wiring Plate and plug in the two black connectors from
Torque - in.lb.
(Nm)
Item 4
4
5
2
Internal Ground
Location
(Green Screw)
40 to 50
(4.5 to 5.6)
10
4
3
2
4
3
Items 1 and 6
2
2
1
4
2
Internal Ground
Location
(Green Screw)
4
4
4
9
8
OR
OR
External Ground
Location
(Green Screw)
External Ground
Location
(Green Screw)
6
7
Figure 4 (Size 1 Valves Shown)
Item #
1
2
3
4
5
Description
Interconnect Wiring Plate (25-Pin, D-Sub Connector)
Molded Gasket
Manifold Base
Mounting Screws
Right Hand End Plate
Item #
Description
6
7
8
9
10
Interconnect Wiring Plate (12 or 19-Pin Connector)
Interconnect Wiring Plate (Serial Bus)
Dome Plug
O-ring
Plastic Plug
www.rosscontrols.com
3
Size 1, 2 & 3 Subbase & Manifold Installation
For Size 2 & Size 3 Valves (See Figure 5)
1. Attach four Tie Rods (Item 5) to the Interface Plate (Item 7)
then mount the Gasket (Item 4), Collective Wiring Module
(Item 6), Gasket (Item 4) and Cover (Item 3) over the
Tie Rods. Attach these components with the four Screws
(Item 1) and Washers (Item 2) provided.
NOTE: The 25-Pin, D-Sub Collective Wiring Module has a
ground wire with ring terminal which must be attached
to the inner green screw on the Interface Plate before
cover is attached.
2. Lay the Collective Wiring Module port side down and
expose the wiring harness. Feed wires into wiring gallery
and assemble Collective Wiring Module to Interface Plate.
Locate Gasket (Item 8) in place on the Interface Plate
(Item 7).
3. Bring the first station Manifold Base (Item 10) to the
Interface Plate (Item 7) and plug in the two black connectors
from the harness into the base connector circuit board. The
connectors are keyed, there is only one assembly possible.
Do not twist cables. Tighten the Base to the Interface Plate
with the four Bolt / Washers (Item 11) provided with each
Base to torque specifications shown in the torque chart.
Continue to mount each Molded Track Seal (Item 12) and
Base (Item 9) to the previous Base. Lay the entire manifold
on a flat surface, align for straightness and alternately
tighten each screw incrementally to torque specifications
in the torque chart. Place the right hand End Plate
(Item 13) on last base and tighten screws (see torque
chart).
3. NOTE: Transition Plates or Isolation Plugs must be
properly placed as the construction of the stack
progresses. See individual sections of this bulletin.
4. Add valves and accessories to the manifold (if not already
attached). The final assembly should be leak and electrically
tested before operation.
11
13
Manifold / End Plate Assembly Torque Values
Torque - in.lb.
(Nm)
Item 11
12
195 to 205
(22.0 to 23.2)
11
10
11
2
10
4
9
Internal Ground Location
(Green Screw)
8
7
12
4
15
14
2
6
4
5
1
2
3
4
External Ground Location
(Green Screw)
OR
OR
17
16
Figure 5 (Size 2 Manifold Assembly Shown)
Item #
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
4
Description
Cover Screw
Cover Washer
Collective Wiring Module Cover
Collective Wiring Module Gasket
Tie Rod
Collective Wiring Module (25-Pin, D-Sub)
Interface Plate (Top Ported)
O-Rings
Pilot Gallery O-Rings
Item #
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Description
Manifold Base (Size 2)
Mounting Screw & Lockwasher
Molded Gasket
Right Hand End Plate
Isolation Plugs
Pilot Isolation Plug
Collective Wiring Module (12-Pin, Round)
Collective Wiring Module (19-Pin, Round)
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Size 1, 2 & 3 Subbase & Manifold Installation
Size 1 to Size 2 Manifold Assembly
(See Figure 6)
Isolator Plug Locations with Transition Plates
Left
The smaller manifold must be on the left side of the Transition
Plate. The Transition Plate (Item 6) acts as a combination right
end plate for the smaller manifold and left end plate for the larger
manifold.
1. Lay Left Hand End Plate (when looking at cylinder ports)
port side down. Place Gasket in gasket track.
2. Add Station 1 Manifold and tighten all 3 bolts finger tight.
3. Build manifold vertically by adding Gaskets, Isolator Plugs,
Transition Plate and remaining Manifolds.
4. Lay entire manifold on a flat surface and tighten screws to
torque specification.
5. Place Right Hand End Plate and tighten screws to torque
specifications in chart.
6. Add Valves and Accessories. All Manifold Assemblies should
be leak tested before operation.
Right
2
2
4
4
Smaller
Manifold
Transition
Plate
Always
on Left
Larger
Manifold
Manifold / End Plate Assembly Torque Values
Torque - in.lb.
(Nm)
Item 4
40 to 50
(4.5 to 5.6)
Torque - in.lb.
(Nm)
Item 10
195 to 205
(22.0 to 23.2)
10
9
7
10
8
7
4
6
2
5
4
2
4
3
2
4b
1
2
4
4a
12
11
Figure 6 (Size 1 to Size 2 Transition Assembly)
Item #
1
2
3
4a
4b
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Description
Interconnect Wiring Plate (25-Pin, D-Sub
Connector Shown) (Size 1)
Manifold Gasket (Size 1)
Manifold Base (Size 1)
Mounting Screws (M6 x 16mm)
Mounting Screws (M6 x 25mm)
Wire Harness
Transition Plate (Size 1 to Size 2)
Manifold Gasket (Size 2)
Manifold Base (Size 2)
Right End Plate (Size 2)
Mounting Screws & Lock Washers (Size 2)
Dome Plug
O-ring
www.rosscontrols.com
5
Size 1, 2 & 3 Subbase & Manifold Installation
Size 1 to Size 3 Manifold Assembly
(See Figure 7)
Isolator Plug Locations with Transition Plates
Left
The smaller manifold must be on the left side of the Transition
Plate. The Transition Plate (Item 6) acts as a combination right
end plate for the smaller manifold and left end plate for the larger
manifold.
1. Lay Left Hand End Plate (when looking at cylinder ports)
port side down. Place Gasket in gasket track.
2. Add Station 1 Manifold and tighten all 3 bolts finger tight.
3. Build manifold vertically by adding Gaskets, Isolator Plugs,
Transition Plate and remaining Manifolds.
4. Lay entire manifold on a flat surface and tighten screws to
torque specification.
5. Place Right Hand End Plate and tighten screws to torque
specifications in chart.
6. Add Valves and Accessories. All Manifold Assemblies should
be leak tested before operation.
Right
2
2
4
4
Smaller
Manifold
Transition
Plate
Always
on Left
Manifold / End Plate Assembly Torque Values
Torque - in.lb.
(Nm)
Item 4
40 to 50
(4.5 to 5.6)
Torque - in.lb.
(Nm)
Item 10
195 to 205
(22.0 to 23.2)
Larger
Manifold
10
9
7
10
8
7
4
6
2
5
4
2
4
3
11
2
4
1
2
4
4
O-ring Seal
Lightly grease with provided lubricant.
13
12
Figure 7 (Size 1 to Size 3 Transition Assembly)
Item #
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
6
Description
Interconnect Wiring Plate (25-Pin, D-Sub
Connector Shown) (Size 1)
Manifold Gasket (Size 1)
Manifold Base (Size 1)
Mounting Screws (Size 1)
Wire Harness
Transition Plate (Size 1 to Size 3)
Manifold Gasket (Size 3)
Manifold Base (Size 3)
Right End Plate (Size 3)
Mounting Screws & Lock Washers (Size 3)
O-ring Seal Washer
Dome Plug
O-Ring
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Size 1, 2 & 3 Subbase & Manifold Installation
Size 2 to Size 3 Manifold Assembly
(See Figure 8)
Isolator Plug Locations with Transition Plates
Left
The smaller manifold must be on the left side of the Transition
Plate. The Transition Plate (Item 14) acts as a combination right
end plate for the smaller manifold and left end plate for the larger
manifold.
1. Lay Interface Plate (Item 7) with O-ring channels facing up.
Place O-rings in correct channels.
2. Add Station 1 Manifold and tighten all 3 bolts finger tight.
3. Build manifold vertically by adding Gaskets, Isolator Plugs,
Transition Plate and remaining Manifolds.
4. Lay entire manifold on a flat surface and tighten screws to
torque specification.
5. Place Right Hand End Plate and tighten screws to torque
specifications in chart.
6. Assemble Collective Wiring Module (Items 1 through 6) to
Interface Plate (Item 7).
7. Add Valves and Accessories. All Manifold Assemblies should
be leak tested before operation.
Right
2
2
4
4
Smaller
Manifold
Transition
Plate
Larger
Manifold
Always
on Left
12
18
17
Manifold / End Plate Assembly Torque Values
Torque - in.lb.
(Nm)
Item 12
12
195 to 205
(22.0 to 23.2)
16
15
12
14
2
4
13
12
11
19
10
9
8
7
4
O-ring Seal
2
6
4
5
1
2
3
4
Lightly grease with provided lubricant.
Figure 8 (Size 2 to Size 3 Transition Assembly)
Item #
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Item #
Description
Cover Screw
Cover Washer
Collective Wiring Module Cover
Collective Wiring Module Gasket
Tie Rod
Collective Wiring Module (25-Pin, D-Sub)
Interface Plate (Top Ported)
O-Rings
Pilot Gallery O-Rings
Manifold Base (Size 2)
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
www.rosscontrols.com
Description
Manifold Base Gasket (Size 2)
Mounting Screws & Lock Washers
(Size 2 & Size 3)
Wire Harness
Transition Plate (Size 2 to Size 3)
Manifold to Transition Plate Gasket (Size 3)
Manifold Base (Size 3)
Manifold to Transition Plate Gasket (Size 3)
Right End Plate (Size 3)
O-ring Seal Washer
7
Size 1, 2 & 3 Subbase & Manifold Installation
Manifold Isolation Assembly
Station Blanking Plate
Inlet & exhaust galleries, and pilot supply / signal galleries may
be isolated from those in adjacent manifolds through the use of
isolation plugs. Note: air piloted valves, whether single or double,
will need to be isolated at 14 and / or 12 galleries to prevent
improper air pressure signals reaching adjacent valves. Figure
9 indicates typical assembly locations of the Main Gallery Plugs
(Item 1) and the Pilot Gallery Plugs (Item 2).
The following describes how to install plugs:
1. Determine which gallery is to be isolated between two
manifolds.
2. Use the large Plugs (Item 1) from the service kits to isolate
manifolds from the main gallery(s).
3. Apply a light coating of grease to isolation plug and insert
it into counterbore of left manifold base.
4. Apply a light coating of grease to Gasket (Item 3) and
assemble in manifold groove.
5. Assemble plugged manifold into manifold bank in its
proper position.
6. Apply main pressure and check for leaks. If any are present,
do not operate the valve - repeat the reassembly process
until satisfactory.
Use top Blanking Plate on a Manifold to reserve a place for a
valve that will be added later to the manifold bank or to remove
a valve from a manifold without having to remove the manifold
block from the manifold bank.
Place Gasket and Blanking Plate on Manifold and assemble
using Mounting Screws provided with kit. Tighten screws to
torque specifications shown in the torque chart below.
Apply main pressure and check for leaks. If any are present, do
not operate valves on the manifold bank - repeat the assembly
process until satisfactory.
Isolation Plug Kits
Size 1
RPS4032CP (3)
Size 2
RPS4132CP (3)
Size 3
RPS4232CP (3)
Valve Series
Torque - in. lb.
(Nm)
Size 1
25 to 35
(2.8 to 3.9)
Size 2
115 to 130
(12.9 to 14.7)
Size 3
120 to 140
(13.6 to 15.8)
1
2
Remote Pilot Access Plate
4
Pilot Isolation
Plug Kits
RPS4033CP (2)
2
3
2
The Remote Pilot Access Plate provides access to the #12 and
#14 valve pilot galleys for a Size 1, Size 2 & Size 3 manifold. It is
required for Single or Double Remote Pilot Valves on a manifold.
Hand tighten the tie rods into the base.
4
Size 2 Shown
Figure 9
Isolator Plug Locations with Transition Plates
Left
Right
2
2
4
4
Smaller
Manifold
Transition
Plate
Larger
Manifold
Always
on Left
Hi-Flow Manifold Repair Kits
Kit Number
Description (Qty.)
Item Number
RPS4012P
RPS4013P
Size 1 Manifold to Manifold Screws (3)
Size 1 Manifold to Manifold Gasket (1)
3
2
RPS4112P
Size 2 / Size 3 Manifold to Manifold
Screws and Washers (12)
10
RPS4113P
RPS4213P
Size 2 Manifold to Manifold Gasket (1)
Size 3 Manifold to Manifold Gasket (1)
12
12
For all Instruction Sheets, go to www.rosscontrols.com
A10326 - W66 Size 0 (26mm) & W66 Size 00 (18mm) ISO 15407 Valve Service
A10327 - W66 Size 0 & W66 Size 00 ISO 15407-2 Interposed Flow Controls
A10329 - W66 Size 0 & W66 Size 00 Interposed Regulators
Printed in U.S.A -0807
A10330 - W66 Size 0 & W66 Size 00 ISO 15407-1 Subbbase & Manifold
Installation
A10331 - W65 Size 1, 2 & 3, ISO 5599-1, 5599-2 Subbase & Manifold
Installation
© Copyright 2007, ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Form A10331
Installation & Service Instructions
A10314
Serial Bus PROFIBUS Adapter,
Series A (RPSSCPBA)
ISSUED: August, 2007
Supersedes: None
!
WARNING
To avoid unpredictable system behavior that can cause personal injury
and property damage:
• Disconnect electrical supply (when necessary) before installation,
servicing, or conversion.
• Disconnect air supply and depressurize all air lines connected to this
product before installation, servicing, or conversion.
• Operate within the manufacturer’s specified pressure, temperature,
and other conditions listed in these instructions.
• Medium must be moisture-free if ambient temperature is below
freezing.
• Service according to procedures listed in these instructions.
• Installation, service, and conversion of these products must be
performed by knowledgeable personnel who understand how
pneumatic products are to be applied.
• After installation, servicing, or conversion, air and electrical supplies
(when necessary) should be connected and the product tested for
proper function and leakage. If audible leakage is present, or the
product does not operate properly, do not put into use.
• Warnings and specifications on the product should not be covered by
paint, etc. If masking is not possible, contact your local representative
for replacement labels.
Introduction
Follow these instructions when installing, operating, or servicing the
product.
Serial Bus PROFIBUS Adapter, Series A
(RPSSCPBA)
The sealed IP67 housing of these adapters requires no enclosure.
(Note that environmental requirements other than IP67 may require
an additional appropriate housing.) PROFIBUS connectors are
sealed M12 (micro) style. The PROFIBUS adapter is shown below.
Shielding
(See page 3 for details)
RPSSCPBA
RPSSCPBA
M12 Connector
Safety Guide
For more complete information on recommended application guidelines,
see the Installation Safety Guidelines section of Bulletin 600 (Form
A10309) or you can download the Installation Safety Guidelines at:
www.rosscontrols.com/rosslit.htm.
Station
Address
Switches
Mini 7/8"
Auxiliary
Power
Connector
Profibus DP
Profibus Out
Profibus In
Adapter
Status
Profibus
Status
X10
X1
PointBus
Status
System
Power
PWR
Adapter
Power
ROSS
! WARNING
FAILURE OR IMPROPER SELECTION OR IMPROPER USE OF THE
PRODUCTS AND/OR SYSTEMS DESCRIBED HEREIN OR RELATED
ITEMS CAN CAUSE DEATH, PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY
DAMAGE.
Serial Bus PROFIBUS Adapter User Manual
The Serial Bus PROFIBUS Adapter User Manual is not available
at this time. Please refer to Rockwell Automation 1734 POINT
I/O PROFIBUS Adapter User Manual 1734-UM005B-EN-P
for similar setup information, which is available online at
http://literature.rockwellautomation.com/.
This document and other information from ROSS CONTROLS, its
subsidiaries and authorized distributors provide product and/or system
options for further investigation by users having technical expertise. It
is important that you analyze all aspects of your application, including
consequences of any failure and review the information concerning the
product or systems in the current product catalog. Due to the variety of
operating conditions and applications for these products or systems, the
user, through its own analysis and testing, is solely responsible for making
the final selection of the products and systems and assuring that all
performance, safety and warning requirements of the application are met.
The products described herein, including without limitation, product features,
specifications, designs, availability and pricing, are subject to change by
ROSS CONTROLS and its subsidiaries at any time without notice.
EXTRA COPIES OF THESE INSTRUCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE FOR INCLUSION
IN EQUIPMENT / MAINTENANCE MANUALS THAT UTILIZE THESE PRODUCTS.
CONTACT YOUR LOCAL REPRESENTATIVE.
Serial Bus PROFIBUS Adapter, Series A (RPSSCPBA)
Important User Information
ATTENTION
Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from
those of electromechanical equipment. Safety Guidelines for the
Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls
(Form A10325) (available online at www.rosscontrols.com/rosslit.htm),
describes some important differences between solid state equipment
and hard-wired electromechanical devices. Because of these
differences, and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state
equipment, all persons responsible for applying this equipment must
satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is
acceptable.
In no event will ROSS CONTROLS® be responsible or liable for
indirect or consequential damages to persons or property resulting
from the use or application of this equipment.
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely
for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and
requirements associated with any particular installation, ROSS
CONTROLS cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use
based on the examples and diagrams.
No patent liability is assumed by ROSS CONTROLS with respect
to use of information, circuits, equipment, or software described in
this manual.
Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without
written permission of ROSS CONTROLS is prohibited.
Throughout this manual we use notes to make you aware of safety
considerations.
WARNING
!
Identifies information about practices or
circumstances that can cause an explosion in
a hazardous environment, which may lead to
personal injury or death, property damage, or
economic loss.
IMPORTANT
Identifies information that is critical for successful
application and understanding of the product.
ATTENTION
Identifies information about practices or
circumstances that can lead to personal injury
or death, property damage, or economic loss.
Attentions help you:
• Identify a Hazard
• Avoid a Hazard
• Recognize the Consequence
!
SHOCK HAZARD Labels may be located on or inside the
equipment to alert people that dangerous
voltage may be present.
BURN HAZARD
2
Labels may be located on or inside the
equipment to alert people that surfaces may be
dangerous temperatures.
!
Environment and Enclosure
This equipment is intended for use in overvoltage Category
II applications (as defined in IEC publication 60664-1), at
altitudes up to 2000 meters without derating. This equipment
is considered Group 1, Class A industrial equipment according
to IEC/CISPR Publication 11. Without appropriate precautions,
there may be potential difficulties ensuring electromagnetic
compatibility in other environments due to conducted as well as
radiated disturbance. This equipment is supplied as “enclosed”
equipment. It should not require additional system enclosure
when used in locations consistent with the enclosure type
ratings stated in the Specifications section of this publication.
Subsequent sections of this publication may contain additional
information regarding specific enclosure type ratings, beyond
what this product provides, that are required to comply with
certain product safety certifications.
NOTE: See NEMA Standards publication 250 and IEC
publication 60529, as applicable, for explanations of the
degrees of protection provided by different types of enclosure.
Also, see the appropriate sections in this publication, as well
as the publication A10324 (“Industrial Automation Wiring and
Grounding Guidelines”), for additional installation requirements
pertaining to this equipment.
ATTENTION
!
Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
This equipment is sensitive to electrostatic discharge, which
can cause internal damage and affect normal operation. Follow
these guidelines when you handle this equipment:
• Touch a grounded object to discharge potential static.
• Wear an approved grounding wrist strap.
• Do not touch connectors or pins on component boards.
• Do not touch circuit components inside the equipment.
• If available, use a static-safe workstation.
• When not in use, store the equipment in appropriate staticsafe packaging.
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Serial Bus PROFIBUS Adapter, Series A (RPSSCPBA)
Mount the Adapter and I/O Base
To mount the adapter on a wall or panel, use the screw holes
provided in the adapter.
A mounting illustration for the adapter with I/O bases is shown
below.
Adapter
Ground
PROFIBUS
Adapter
1.9
(47.2)
2.0
(50)
0.87
(22)
I/O Module
Ground
2.0
(50)
3.13
(79.4)
5.98*
(151.9)
I/O Module
Ground
2.39
(60.7)
4.02
(102)
4.32
(109.8)
1.81
(46)
Inches
(mm)
Drill and Tap
for M4 Screw
3.02
(76.6)
5.39
(137.0)
Drill and Tap
for M6 Screw
* Depending on the type and number of manifolds, this dimension
may vary. Consult Ross for specific information.
Install the Mounting Base as Follows:
1. Lay out the required points as shown above in the drilling
dimension drawing.
2. Drill the necessary holes for #8 (M4) machine or self-tapping
screws.
3. Mount the adapter using #8 (M4) screws.
4. Ground the system using the ground lug connection in the I/O
base. (The ground lug connection is also a mounting hole.)
Grounding and Shielding
Grounding: Each Serial Bus base has two mounting holes, with
the one on the right being the means to ground each module.
Each module must be grounded.
Shielding: For PROFIBUS adapter, both PROFIBUS IN and
PROFIBUS OUT metal shells are connected to the top screw hole
metal ring. Shielded PROFIBUS cordsets are required to help
reduce the effects of electrical noise coupling. One example of
such a cordset is Brad Harrison's “360° Shielded Head” cordset,
which can be found at www.connector.com. For more Grounding
and Shielding information, please refer to A10324, “Industrial
Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines”.
www.rosscontrols.com
3
Serial Bus PROFIBUS Adapter, Series A (RPSSCPBA)
Set the Station Address
To set the station address, adjust the switches on the front of the
module (refer to the illustration on page 1). Use a small blade
screwdriver to rotate the switches. Line up the small notch on the
switch with the number setting you wish to use. The two switches
are most significant digit (MSD) and least significant digit (LSD).
The switches can be set from 01 through 99. The module reads the
switches at power-up only.
This example shows the
node address set at 63.
GSD File Requirements
Current functionality of a PROFIBUS adapter requires a GSD file.
The file is easy to install and is available online at: www.rosscontrols.
com/rosslit.htm.
4
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Serial Bus PROFIBUS Adapter, Series A (RPSSCPBA)
Wire the PROFIBUS Adapter
Following are wiring instructions for the PROFIBUS Adapter.
RPSSCPBA (Micro M12, B - Coding Reverse Key)
Female Out Connector
Male In Connector
(view into connector)
Pin 1 - +5VBUS
Pin 2 - A-Line
Pin 3 - GNDBUS
Pin 4 - B-Line
Pin 5 - Not Used
Note: Please refer to page 3, Mount the Adapter
and I/O Base, for shielding information.
RPSSCPBA Male Auxiliary (Mini 7/8")
Male In Connector
(view into connector)
Pin 1 - User Power Pin 2 - Adapter Power Pin 3 - Protective GND
Pin 4 - Adapter Power +
Pin 5 - User Power +
NOTE: User power is the 24VDC power for field devices.
Adapter power is the 24VDC power for adapter. It is converted to
5VDC to power Serial Bus modules.
ATTENTION
!
Make sure all connectors and caps are securely tightened to
properly seal the connections against leaks and maintain IP67
requirements.
www.rosscontrols.com
5
Serial Bus PROFIBUS Adapter, Series A (RPSSCPBA)
Troubleshoot with the Indicators
RPSSCPBA
RPSSCPBA
Profibus DP
Profibus Out
Profibus In
Adapter Status
Indicator
Adapter
Status
Profibus
Status
X10
X1
PointBus
Status
System
Power
PWR
Adapter
Power
ROSS
Indication
Adapter Status
Off
Green
Red
Indication
Profibus Status
Off
Green
Flashing Green
Red
Flashing Red
6
Probable Cause
No power supplied
Hardware check in progress
Initialization in progress
Operating normally
Hardware check fault
Profibus Status
Indicator
PointBus Status
Indicator
System Power
Indicator
Adapter Power
Indicator
Indication
PointBus Status
Off
Green
Flashing Red
Probable Cause
No power supplied
Bus is off line
Bus is on line (data exchange)
Adapter has received a CLEAR
command from the master
Error in PROFIBUS initialization.
No modules installed in the backplane.
1Hz:
- Check_Configuration
telegram rejected.
- Maximum number of I/O
modules in master configuration
overridden.
2Hz:
- SetPrm telegram rejected.
- The first byte in user parameter
data does not equal zero.
- Maximum number of user
parameter bytes overridden.
Red
Indication
System Power*
Off
Green
Indication
Adapter Power**
Off
Green
Probable Cause
No power supplied
Hardware check in progress
Initialization in progress
Normal operation
1Hz:
- Incorrect I/O module installed.
- I/O module removed from
backplane.
Critical link failure (BUS_OFF).
Probable Cause
Not active field. Power is off,
overloaded backplane or dc-dc
converter problem.
System power (5V) present.
Probable Cause
Field power not applied.
Field power (24V) applied.
* System Power Indicator shows the 5V power output from the dc-dc converter.
** Adapter Power Indicator shows the 24V power input to the dc-dc converter.
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Serial Bus PROFIBUS Adapter, Series A (RPSSCPBA)
Specifications
Following are specifications for the RPSSCPBA PROFIBUS adapter.
PROFIBUS Adapter - RPSSCPBA
Expansion I/O Capacity
• PROFIBUS adapter backplane current output = 1.0A maximum.
See the list below for backplane current consumption for each I/O catalog number and
the current consumption for each of the modules connected to the PROFIBUS adapter.
Verify that it is below 1.0A.
• Backplane current can be extended beyond 1.0A with a RPSSSE24A Backplane
Extension Power Supply. The RPSSSE24A can supply up to an additional 1.3A of
backplane current.
• Multiple RPSSSE24A modules can be used to reach the
maximum of 63 modules.
Cat. No.
PointBus Current Requirements
RPSSN8xxx
RPSSP8xxx
RPSST8xxx
RPSSTR4M12A
RPSSNACM12A
RPSSNAVM12A
RPSSTACM12A
RPSSTAVM12A
RPSSS23A
RPSSV32A
75 mA
75 mA
75 mA
90 mA
75 mA
75 mA
75 mA
75 mA
75 mA
75 mA
Power Supply Specifications
Power Supply
Note: In order to comply with CE Low Voltage Directives (LVD), you must use either a
NEC Class 2, a Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) or a Protected Extra Low Voltage (PELV)
power supply to power this adapter. A SELV supply cannot exceed 30V rms, 42.4V peak
or 60VDC under normal conditions and under single fault conditions. A PELV supply has
the same rating and is connected to protected earth.
Input Voltage Rating
24VDC nominal
10-28.8VDC range
Input Overvoltage Protection
Reverse polarity protected
Inrush Current
6A maximum for 10ms
PointBus Output Current
1A maximum @ 5VDC +5% (4.75-5.25
Field Side Power Requirements, Maximum
24VDC (+20% = 28.8VDC) @ 400 mA
Interruption
Output voltage will stay within specifications when input drops out for
10ms at 10V with maximum load
General Specifications
LED Indicators
1 green/red Adapter status
1 green/red PROFIBUS status
1 green/red PointBus status
1 green System Power (PointBus 5V power)
1 green Adapter Power (24V from field supply)
Power Consumption, Maximum
8.1W @ 28.8VDC
Power Dissipation, Maximum
2.8W @ 28.8VDC
Thermal Dissipation, Maximum
9.5 BTU/hr. @ 28.8VDC
Isolation Voltage
(continuous-voltage withstand rating)
50V rms
Tested at 1250VAC rms for 60s
Field Power Bus
Nominal Voltage
Supply Voltage
Supply Current
24VDC
10-28.8VDC range
10A maximum
Dimensions
Inches (Millimeters)
4.41H x 2.83W x 2.56D (112H x 72W x 65D)
www.rosscontrols.com
7
Serial Bus PROFIBUS Adapter, Series A (RPSSCPBA)
General Specifications (continued)
Operating Temperature
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad, Operating Cold),
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd, Operating Dry Heat),
IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb, Operating Thermal Shock):
-20 to 60°C (-4 to 140°F)
Storage Temperature
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab, Un-packaged Non-operating Cold),
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb, Un-packaged Non-operating Dry Heat),
-40 to 85°C (-40 to 185°F)
Relative Humidity
IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db, Un-packaged Non-operating Damp Heat):
5-95% non-condensing
Shock
IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea, Unpackaged Shock):
Operating 30g
Non-operating 50g
Vibration
IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc, Operating):
5g @ 10-500Hz
ESD Immunity
IEC 61000-4-2:
6kV contact discharges
8kV air discharges
Radiated RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-3:
10V/m with 1kHz sine-wave 80%AM from 30MHz to 2000MHz
10V/m with 200Hz 50% Pulse 100%AM at 900Mhz
10V/m with 200Hz 50% Pulse 100%AM at 1890Mhz
EFT/B Immunity
IEC 61000-4-4:
±4kV at 5kHz on power ports
±2kV at 5kHz on communications ports
Surge Transient Immunity
IEC 61000-4-5:
±1kV line-line(DM) and ±2kV line-earth(CM) on power ports
±2kV line-earth(CM) on shielded ports
Conducted RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-6:
10Vrms with 1kHz sine-wave 80%AM from 150kHz to 80MHz
Emissions
CSPR 11:
Group 1, Class A
Enclosure Type Rating
Meets IP65/66/67 (when marked)
Mounting Base Screw Torque
#8 screw, 7.5 in. lbs. in Aluminum, 16 in. lbs. in Steel
1
Wiring Category
Weight
1 - on power ports
1 - on communications ports
Imperial (Metric)
Certifications: (when product is marked)
0.80 lb. (0.36 kg)
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment, certified for US and Canada
CE
European Union 89/336/EEC EMC Directive, compliant with:
EN 61000-6-4; Industrial Emissions
EN 50082-2; Industrial Immunity
EN 61326; Meas./Control/Lab., Industrial Requirements
EN 61000-6-2; Industrial Immunity
C-Tick
Australian Radiocommunications Act, compliant with:
AS/NZS CISPR 11; Industrial Emissions
1. Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing. Refer to Publication A10324, “Industrial Automation Wiring
and Grounding Guidelines”.
Printed in U.S.A -0807
© Copyright 2007, ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Form A10314
Installation & Service Instructions
A10314
Serial Bus PROFIBUS Adapter,
Series A (RPSSCPBA)
ISSUED: August, 2007
Supersedes: None
!
WARNING
To avoid unpredictable system behavior that can cause personal injury
and property damage:
• Disconnect electrical supply (when necessary) before installation,
servicing, or conversion.
• Disconnect air supply and depressurize all air lines connected to this
product before installation, servicing, or conversion.
• Operate within the manufacturer’s specified pressure, temperature,
and other conditions listed in these instructions.
• Medium must be moisture-free if ambient temperature is below
freezing.
• Service according to procedures listed in these instructions.
• Installation, service, and conversion of these products must be
performed by knowledgeable personnel who understand how
pneumatic products are to be applied.
• After installation, servicing, or conversion, air and electrical supplies
(when necessary) should be connected and the product tested for
proper function and leakage. If audible leakage is present, or the
product does not operate properly, do not put into use.
• Warnings and specifications on the product should not be covered by
paint, etc. If masking is not possible, contact your local representative
for replacement labels.
Introduction
Follow these instructions when installing, operating, or servicing the
product.
Serial Bus PROFIBUS Adapter, Series A
(RPSSCPBA)
The sealed IP67 housing of these adapters requires no enclosure.
(Note that environmental requirements other than IP67 may require
an additional appropriate housing.) PROFIBUS connectors are
sealed M12 (micro) style. The PROFIBUS adapter is shown below.
Shielding
(See page 3 for details)
RPSSCPBA
RPSSCPBA
M12 Connector
Safety Guide
For more complete information on recommended application guidelines,
see the Installation Safety Guidelines section of Bulletin 600 (Form
A10309) or you can download the Installation Safety Guidelines at:
www.rosscontrols.com/rosslit.htm.
Station
Address
Switches
Mini 7/8"
Auxiliary
Power
Connector
Profibus DP
Profibus Out
Profibus In
Adapter
Status
Profibus
Status
X10
X1
PointBus
Status
System
Power
PWR
Adapter
Power
ROSS
! WARNING
FAILURE OR IMPROPER SELECTION OR IMPROPER USE OF THE
PRODUCTS AND/OR SYSTEMS DESCRIBED HEREIN OR RELATED
ITEMS CAN CAUSE DEATH, PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY
DAMAGE.
Serial Bus PROFIBUS Adapter User Manual
The Serial Bus PROFIBUS Adapter User Manual is not available
at this time. Please refer to Rockwell Automation 1734 POINT
I/O PROFIBUS Adapter User Manual 1734-UM005B-EN-P
for similar setup information, which is available online at
http://literature.rockwellautomation.com/.
This document and other information from ROSS CONTROLS, its
subsidiaries and authorized distributors provide product and/or system
options for further investigation by users having technical expertise. It
is important that you analyze all aspects of your application, including
consequences of any failure and review the information concerning the
product or systems in the current product catalog. Due to the variety of
operating conditions and applications for these products or systems, the
user, through its own analysis and testing, is solely responsible for making
the final selection of the products and systems and assuring that all
performance, safety and warning requirements of the application are met.
The products described herein, including without limitation, product features,
specifications, designs, availability and pricing, are subject to change by
ROSS CONTROLS and its subsidiaries at any time without notice.
EXTRA COPIES OF THESE INSTRUCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE FOR INCLUSION
IN EQUIPMENT / MAINTENANCE MANUALS THAT UTILIZE THESE PRODUCTS.
CONTACT YOUR LOCAL REPRESENTATIVE.
Serial Bus PROFIBUS Adapter, Series A (RPSSCPBA)
Important User Information
ATTENTION
Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from
those of electromechanical equipment. Safety Guidelines for the
Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls
(Form A10325) (available online at www.rosscontrols.com/rosslit.htm),
describes some important differences between solid state equipment
and hard-wired electromechanical devices. Because of these
differences, and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state
equipment, all persons responsible for applying this equipment must
satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is
acceptable.
In no event will ROSS CONTROLS® be responsible or liable for
indirect or consequential damages to persons or property resulting
from the use or application of this equipment.
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely
for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and
requirements associated with any particular installation, ROSS
CONTROLS cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use
based on the examples and diagrams.
No patent liability is assumed by ROSS CONTROLS with respect
to use of information, circuits, equipment, or software described in
this manual.
Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without
written permission of ROSS CONTROLS is prohibited.
Throughout this manual we use notes to make you aware of safety
considerations.
WARNING
!
Identifies information about practices or
circumstances that can cause an explosion in
a hazardous environment, which may lead to
personal injury or death, property damage, or
economic loss.
IMPORTANT
Identifies information that is critical for successful
application and understanding of the product.
ATTENTION
Identifies information about practices or
circumstances that can lead to personal injury
or death, property damage, or economic loss.
Attentions help you:
• Identify a Hazard
• Avoid a Hazard
• Recognize the Consequence
!
SHOCK HAZARD Labels may be located on or inside the
equipment to alert people that dangerous
voltage may be present.
BURN HAZARD
2
Labels may be located on or inside the
equipment to alert people that surfaces may be
dangerous temperatures.
!
Environment and Enclosure
This equipment is intended for use in overvoltage Category
II applications (as defined in IEC publication 60664-1), at
altitudes up to 2000 meters without derating. This equipment
is considered Group 1, Class A industrial equipment according
to IEC/CISPR Publication 11. Without appropriate precautions,
there may be potential difficulties ensuring electromagnetic
compatibility in other environments due to conducted as well as
radiated disturbance. This equipment is supplied as “enclosed”
equipment. It should not require additional system enclosure
when used in locations consistent with the enclosure type
ratings stated in the Specifications section of this publication.
Subsequent sections of this publication may contain additional
information regarding specific enclosure type ratings, beyond
what this product provides, that are required to comply with
certain product safety certifications.
NOTE: See NEMA Standards publication 250 and IEC
publication 60529, as applicable, for explanations of the
degrees of protection provided by different types of enclosure.
Also, see the appropriate sections in this publication, as well
as the publication A10324 (“Industrial Automation Wiring and
Grounding Guidelines”), for additional installation requirements
pertaining to this equipment.
ATTENTION
!
Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
This equipment is sensitive to electrostatic discharge, which
can cause internal damage and affect normal operation. Follow
these guidelines when you handle this equipment:
• Touch a grounded object to discharge potential static.
• Wear an approved grounding wrist strap.
• Do not touch connectors or pins on component boards.
• Do not touch circuit components inside the equipment.
• If available, use a static-safe workstation.
• When not in use, store the equipment in appropriate staticsafe packaging.
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Serial Bus PROFIBUS Adapter, Series A (RPSSCPBA)
Mount the Adapter and I/O Base
To mount the adapter on a wall or panel, use the screw holes
provided in the adapter.
A mounting illustration for the adapter with I/O bases is shown
below.
Adapter
Ground
PROFIBUS
Adapter
1.9
(47.2)
2.0
(50)
0.87
(22)
I/O Module
Ground
2.0
(50)
3.13
(79.4)
5.98*
(151.9)
I/O Module
Ground
2.39
(60.7)
4.02
(102)
4.32
(109.8)
1.81
(46)
Inches
(mm)
Drill and Tap
for M4 Screw
3.02
(76.6)
5.39
(137.0)
Drill and Tap
for M6 Screw
* Depending on the type and number of manifolds, this dimension
may vary. Consult Ross for specific information.
Install the Mounting Base as Follows:
1. Lay out the required points as shown above in the drilling
dimension drawing.
2. Drill the necessary holes for #8 (M4) machine or self-tapping
screws.
3. Mount the adapter using #8 (M4) screws.
4. Ground the system using the ground lug connection in the I/O
base. (The ground lug connection is also a mounting hole.)
Grounding and Shielding
Grounding: Each Serial Bus base has two mounting holes, with
the one on the right being the means to ground each module.
Each module must be grounded.
Shielding: For PROFIBUS adapter, both PROFIBUS IN and
PROFIBUS OUT metal shells are connected to the top screw hole
metal ring. Shielded PROFIBUS cordsets are required to help
reduce the effects of electrical noise coupling. One example of
such a cordset is Brad Harrison's “360° Shielded Head” cordset,
which can be found at www.connector.com. For more Grounding
and Shielding information, please refer to A10324, “Industrial
Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines”.
www.rosscontrols.com
3
Serial Bus PROFIBUS Adapter, Series A (RPSSCPBA)
Set the Station Address
To set the station address, adjust the switches on the front of the
module (refer to the illustration on page 1). Use a small blade
screwdriver to rotate the switches. Line up the small notch on the
switch with the number setting you wish to use. The two switches
are most significant digit (MSD) and least significant digit (LSD).
The switches can be set from 01 through 99. The module reads the
switches at power-up only.
This example shows the
node address set at 63.
GSD File Requirements
Current functionality of a PROFIBUS adapter requires a GSD file.
The file is easy to install and is available online at: www.rosscontrols.
com/rosslit.htm.
4
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Serial Bus PROFIBUS Adapter, Series A (RPSSCPBA)
Wire the PROFIBUS Adapter
Following are wiring instructions for the PROFIBUS Adapter.
RPSSCPBA (Micro M12, B - Coding Reverse Key)
Female Out Connector
Male In Connector
(view into connector)
Pin 1 - +5VBUS
Pin 2 - A-Line
Pin 3 - GNDBUS
Pin 4 - B-Line
Pin 5 - Not Used
Note: Please refer to page 3, Mount the Adapter
and I/O Base, for shielding information.
RPSSCPBA Male Auxiliary (Mini 7/8")
Male In Connector
(view into connector)
Pin 1 - User Power Pin 2 - Adapter Power Pin 3 - Protective GND
Pin 4 - Adapter Power +
Pin 5 - User Power +
NOTE: User power is the 24VDC power for field devices.
Adapter power is the 24VDC power for adapter. It is converted to
5VDC to power Serial Bus modules.
ATTENTION
!
Make sure all connectors and caps are securely tightened to
properly seal the connections against leaks and maintain IP67
requirements.
www.rosscontrols.com
5
Serial Bus PROFIBUS Adapter, Series A (RPSSCPBA)
Troubleshoot with the Indicators
RPSSCPBA
RPSSCPBA
Profibus DP
Profibus Out
Profibus In
Adapter Status
Indicator
Adapter
Status
Profibus
Status
X10
X1
PointBus
Status
System
Power
PWR
Adapter
Power
ROSS
Indication
Adapter Status
Off
Green
Red
Indication
Profibus Status
Off
Green
Flashing Green
Red
Flashing Red
6
Probable Cause
No power supplied
Hardware check in progress
Initialization in progress
Operating normally
Hardware check fault
Profibus Status
Indicator
PointBus Status
Indicator
System Power
Indicator
Adapter Power
Indicator
Indication
PointBus Status
Off
Green
Flashing Red
Probable Cause
No power supplied
Bus is off line
Bus is on line (data exchange)
Adapter has received a CLEAR
command from the master
Error in PROFIBUS initialization.
No modules installed in the backplane.
1Hz:
- Check_Configuration
telegram rejected.
- Maximum number of I/O
modules in master configuration
overridden.
2Hz:
- SetPrm telegram rejected.
- The first byte in user parameter
data does not equal zero.
- Maximum number of user
parameter bytes overridden.
Red
Indication
System Power*
Off
Green
Indication
Adapter Power**
Off
Green
Probable Cause
No power supplied
Hardware check in progress
Initialization in progress
Normal operation
1Hz:
- Incorrect I/O module installed.
- I/O module removed from
backplane.
Critical link failure (BUS_OFF).
Probable Cause
Not active field. Power is off,
overloaded backplane or dc-dc
converter problem.
System power (5V) present.
Probable Cause
Field power not applied.
Field power (24V) applied.
* System Power Indicator shows the 5V power output from the dc-dc converter.
** Adapter Power Indicator shows the 24V power input to the dc-dc converter.
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Serial Bus PROFIBUS Adapter, Series A (RPSSCPBA)
Specifications
Following are specifications for the RPSSCPBA PROFIBUS adapter.
PROFIBUS Adapter - RPSSCPBA
Expansion I/O Capacity
• PROFIBUS adapter backplane current output = 1.0A maximum.
See the list below for backplane current consumption for each I/O catalog number and
the current consumption for each of the modules connected to the PROFIBUS adapter.
Verify that it is below 1.0A.
• Backplane current can be extended beyond 1.0A with a RPSSSE24A Backplane
Extension Power Supply. The RPSSSE24A can supply up to an additional 1.3A of
backplane current.
• Multiple RPSSSE24A modules can be used to reach the
maximum of 63 modules.
Cat. No.
PointBus Current Requirements
RPSSN8xxx
RPSSP8xxx
RPSST8xxx
RPSSTR4M12A
RPSSNACM12A
RPSSNAVM12A
RPSSTACM12A
RPSSTAVM12A
RPSSS23A
RPSSV32A
75 mA
75 mA
75 mA
90 mA
75 mA
75 mA
75 mA
75 mA
75 mA
75 mA
Power Supply Specifications
Power Supply
Note: In order to comply with CE Low Voltage Directives (LVD), you must use either a
NEC Class 2, a Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) or a Protected Extra Low Voltage (PELV)
power supply to power this adapter. A SELV supply cannot exceed 30V rms, 42.4V peak
or 60VDC under normal conditions and under single fault conditions. A PELV supply has
the same rating and is connected to protected earth.
Input Voltage Rating
24VDC nominal
10-28.8VDC range
Input Overvoltage Protection
Reverse polarity protected
Inrush Current
6A maximum for 10ms
PointBus Output Current
1A maximum @ 5VDC +5% (4.75-5.25
Field Side Power Requirements, Maximum
24VDC (+20% = 28.8VDC) @ 400 mA
Interruption
Output voltage will stay within specifications when input drops out for
10ms at 10V with maximum load
General Specifications
LED Indicators
1 green/red Adapter status
1 green/red PROFIBUS status
1 green/red PointBus status
1 green System Power (PointBus 5V power)
1 green Adapter Power (24V from field supply)
Power Consumption, Maximum
8.1W @ 28.8VDC
Power Dissipation, Maximum
2.8W @ 28.8VDC
Thermal Dissipation, Maximum
9.5 BTU/hr. @ 28.8VDC
Isolation Voltage
(continuous-voltage withstand rating)
50V rms
Tested at 1250VAC rms for 60s
Field Power Bus
Nominal Voltage
Supply Voltage
Supply Current
24VDC
10-28.8VDC range
10A maximum
Dimensions
Inches (Millimeters)
4.41H x 2.83W x 2.56D (112H x 72W x 65D)
www.rosscontrols.com
7
Serial Bus PROFIBUS Adapter, Series A (RPSSCPBA)
General Specifications (continued)
Operating Temperature
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad, Operating Cold),
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd, Operating Dry Heat),
IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb, Operating Thermal Shock):
-20 to 60°C (-4 to 140°F)
Storage Temperature
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab, Un-packaged Non-operating Cold),
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb, Un-packaged Non-operating Dry Heat),
-40 to 85°C (-40 to 185°F)
Relative Humidity
IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db, Un-packaged Non-operating Damp Heat):
5-95% non-condensing
Shock
IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea, Unpackaged Shock):
Operating 30g
Non-operating 50g
Vibration
IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc, Operating):
5g @ 10-500Hz
ESD Immunity
IEC 61000-4-2:
6kV contact discharges
8kV air discharges
Radiated RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-3:
10V/m with 1kHz sine-wave 80%AM from 30MHz to 2000MHz
10V/m with 200Hz 50% Pulse 100%AM at 900Mhz
10V/m with 200Hz 50% Pulse 100%AM at 1890Mhz
EFT/B Immunity
IEC 61000-4-4:
±4kV at 5kHz on power ports
±2kV at 5kHz on communications ports
Surge Transient Immunity
IEC 61000-4-5:
±1kV line-line(DM) and ±2kV line-earth(CM) on power ports
±2kV line-earth(CM) on shielded ports
Conducted RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-6:
10Vrms with 1kHz sine-wave 80%AM from 150kHz to 80MHz
Emissions
CSPR 11:
Group 1, Class A
Enclosure Type Rating
Meets IP65/66/67 (when marked)
Mounting Base Screw Torque
#8 screw, 7.5 in. lbs. in Aluminum, 16 in. lbs. in Steel
1
Wiring Category
Weight
1 - on power ports
1 - on communications ports
Imperial (Metric)
Certifications: (when product is marked)
0.80 lb. (0.36 kg)
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment, certified for US and Canada
CE
European Union 89/336/EEC EMC Directive, compliant with:
EN 61000-6-4; Industrial Emissions
EN 50082-2; Industrial Immunity
EN 61326; Meas./Control/Lab., Industrial Requirements
EN 61000-6-2; Industrial Immunity
C-Tick
Australian Radiocommunications Act, compliant with:
AS/NZS CISPR 11; Industrial Emissions
1. Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing. Refer to Publication A10324, “Industrial Automation Wiring
and Grounding Guidelines”.
Printed in U.S.A -0807
© Copyright 2007, ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Form A10314
Installation & Service Instructions
A10320
Serial Bus Relay Output Module,
Series A (RPSSTR4M12A)
ISSUED: August, 2007
Supersedes: None
! WARNING
To avoid unpredictable system behavior that can cause personal injury
and property damage:
• Disconnect electrical supply (when necessary) before installation,
servicing, or conversion.
• Disconnect air supply and depressurize all air lines connected to
this product before installation, servicing, or conversion.
• Operate within the manufacturer’s specified pressure, temperature,
and other conditions listed in these instructions.
• Medium must be moisture-free if ambient temperature is below
freezing.
• Service according to procedures listed in these instructions.
• Installation, service, and conversion of these products must be
performed by knowledgeable personnel who understand how
pneumatic products are to be applied.
• After installation, servicing, or conversion, air and electrical
supplies (when necessary) should be connected and the product
tested for proper function and leakage. If audible leakage is present,
or the product does not operate properly, do not put into use.
• Warnings and specifications on the product should not be
covered by paint, etc. If masking is not possible, contact your local
representative for replacement labels.
Safety Guide
Introduction
Follow these instructions when installing, operating, or servicing the
product.
Serial Bus Relay Output Module, Series A
(RPSSTR4M12A)
The sealed IP67 housing of the module requires no enclosure.
(Note that environmental requirements other than IP67 may require
an additional appropriate housing.) I/O connectors are sealed
M12 (micro) style. The mounting base ships with the module. The
RPSSTR4M12A module is shown below.
RPSSTR4M12A
Female
Connector
M12-A
RPSSTR4M12A
Form A
Isolated Relay Out
Female
Connector
M12-B
1
0
For more complete information on recommended application guidelines,
see the Installation Safety Guidelines section of Bulletin 600 (Form
A10309) or you can download the Installation Safety Guidelines at:
www.rosscontrols.com/rosslit.htm.
MOD
NET
Female
Connector
M12-C
2
3
0
LED
Indicators
1
2
3
Female
Connector
M12-D
! WARNING
FAILURE OR IMPROPER SELECTION OR IMPROPER USE OF THE
PRODUCTS AND/OR SYSTEMS DESCRIBED HEREIN OR RELATED
ITEMS CAN CAUSE DEATH, PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY
DAMAGE.
This document and other information from ROSS CONTROLS, its
subsidiaries and authorized distributors provide product and/or system
options for further investigation by users having technical expertise. It
is important that you analyze all aspects of your application, including
consequences of any failure and review the information concerning the
product or systems in the current product catalog. Due to the variety of
operating conditions and applications for these products or systems, the
user, through its own analysis and testing, is solely responsible for making
the final selection of the products and systems and assuring that all
performance, safety and warning requirements of the application are met.
The products described herein, including without limitation, product features,
specifications, designs, availability and pricing, are subject to change by
ROSS CONTROLS and its subsidiaries at any time without notice.
EXTRA COPIES OF THESE INSTRUCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE FOR INCLUSION
IN EQUIPMENT / MAINTENANCE MANUALS THAT UTILIZE THESE PRODUCTS.
CONTACT YOUR LOCAL REPRESENTATIVE.
Serial Bus Relay Output Module, Series A (RPSSTR4M12A)
Important User Information
ATTENTION
Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from
those of electromechanical equipment. Safety Guidelines for the
Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls
(Form #A10325) (available online at www.rosscontrols.com/rosslit.
htm), describes some important differences between solid state
equipment and hard-wired electromechanical devices. Because
of these differences, and also because of the wide variety of uses
for solid state equipment, all persons responsible for applying this
equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of
this equipment is acceptable.
In no event will ROSS CONTROLS® be responsible or liable for
indirect or consequential damages to persons or property resulting
from the use or application of this equipment.
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely
for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and
requirements associated with any particular installation, ROSS
CONTROLS cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use
based on the examples and diagrams.
No patent liability is assumed by ROSS CONTROLS with respect
to use of information, circuits, equipment, or software described in
this manual.
Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without
written permission of ROSS CONTROLS is prohibited.
Throughout this manual we use notes to make you aware of safety
considerations.
WARNING
!
Identifies information about practices or
circumstances that can cause an explosion in
a hazardous environment, which may lead to
personal injury or death, property damage, or
economic loss.
IMPORTANT
Identifies information that is critical for successful
application and understanding of the product.
ATTENTION
Identifies information about practices or
circumstances that can lead to personal injury
or death, property damage, or economic loss.
Attentions help you:
• Identify a Hazard
• Avoid a Hazard
• Recognize the Consequence
!
SHOCK HAZARD Labels may be located on or inside the
equipment to alert people that dangerous
voltage may be present.
BURN HAZARD
2
Labels may be located on or inside the
equipment to alert people that surfaces may be
dangerous temperatures.
!
Environment and Enclosure
This equipment is intended for use in overvoltage Category
II applications (as defined in IEC publication 60664-1), at
altitudes up to 2000 meters without derating. This equipment
is considered Group 1, Class A industrial equipment according
to IEC/CISPR Publication 11. Without appropriate precautions,
there may be potential difficulties ensuring electromagnetic
compatibility in other environments due to conducted as well as
radiated disturbance. This equipment is supplied as “enclosed”
equipment. It should not require additional system enclosure
when used in locations consistent with the enclosure type
ratings stated in the Specifications section of this publication.
Subsequent sections of this publication may contain additional
information regarding specific enclosure type ratings, beyond
what this product provides, that are required to comply with
certain product safety certifications.
NOTE: See NEMA Standards publication 250 and IEC
publication 60529, as applicable, for explanations of the
degrees of protection provided by different types of enclosure.
Also, see the appropriate sections in this publication, as well
as the publication A10324 (“Industrial Automation Wiring and
Grounding Guidelines”), for additional installation requirements
pertaining to this equipment.
ATTENTION
!
Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
This equipment is sensitive to electrostatic discharge, which
can cause internal damage and affect normal operation. Follow
these guidelines when you handle this equipment:
• Touch a grounded object to discharge potential static.
• Wear an approved grounding wrist strap.
• Do not touch connectors or pins on component boards.
• Do not touch circuit components inside the equipment.
• If available, use a static-safe workstation.
• When not in use, store the equipment in appropriate staticsafe packaging.
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Serial Bus Relay Output Module, Series A (RPSSTR4M12A)
Mount the I/O Base
To mount the I/O base on a wall or panel, use the screw holes
provided in the base.
A mounting illustration for the base with an adapter is shown below.
1.9
(47.2)
2.0
(50)
0.87
(22)
2.0
(50)
3.13
(79.4)
5.98*
(151.9)
Adapter
2.39
(60.7)
4.02
(102)
4.32
(109.8)
1.81
(46)
Inches
(mm)
Drill and Tap
for M4 Screw
3.02
(76.6)
5.39
(137.0)
Drill and Tap
for M6 Screw
* Depending on the type and number of manifolds, this dimension
may vary. Consult Ross for specific information.
Install the Mounting Base as Follows:
1. Lay out the required points as shown above in the drilling
dimension drawing.
2. Drill the necessary holes for #8 (M4) machine or self-tapping
screws.
3. Mount the base using #8 (M4) screws.
4. Ground the system using the ground lug connection. (The ground
lug connection is also a mounting hole.)
Mounting Base
KeyswitchSet to position 7
for the RPSSTR4M12A
relay output
modules
Ground Lug
Connection
Latching Mechanism
www.rosscontrols.com
3
Serial Bus Relay Output Module, Series A (RPSSTR4M12A)
Install the Relay Output Module
To Install the Relay Output Module, Proceed as Follows:
1. Using a bladed screwdriver, rotate the keyswitch on the mounting
base clockwise until the number 7 aligns with the notch in the
base.
2. Position the module vertically above the mounting base. The
module will bridge two bases.
Module Will Bridge Two Bases
RPSSTR4M12A
Form A
Isolated Relay Out
1
0
MOD
NET
2
3
0
1
2
3
3. Push the module down until it engages the latching mechanism. You
will hear a clicking sound when the module is properly engaged.
The locking mechanism will lock the module to the base.
Remove the Relay Output Module From the
Mounting Base
To Remove the Module from the Mounting Base:
1. Put a flat blade screwdriver into the slot of the orange latching
mechanism.
2. Push the screwdriver toward the I/O module to disengage the
latch. The module will lift up off the base.
3. Pull the module off of the base.
4
4 ®. All Rights Reserved.
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS
Serial Bus Relay Output Module, Series A (RPSSTR4M12A)
Wire the Relay Output Module
Following are wiring instructions for the relay output module.
RPSSTR4M12A
ATTENTION
!
Make sure all connectors and caps are securely tightened to
properly seal the connections against leaks and maintain IP67
requirements.
(view into connector)
Pin 1 - 24VDC
WARNING
Pin 2 - Output 0B (M12-A)
Output 1B (M12-B)
Output 2B (M12-C)
Output 3B (M12-D)
Pin 4 - Output 0A (M12-A)
Output 1A (M12-B)
Output 2A (M12-C)
Output 3A (M12-D)
Pin 3 - Common
Pin 5 - No Connect
3
2
Common
4
Output B
–
Load
1
Output A
!
RPSSTR4M12A is rated for 5-28.8 VDC only. Do not connect
it to an AC power source.
3
24VDC
2
Common
4
Output B
1
Output A
+
Load
–
Sourcing
24VDC
+
Sinking
Load Powered by Internal Power Bus
3
Common
2
4
Output B
1
Output A
–
Load
+ +
Power
Supply
24VDC
3
Common
2
4
Output B
–
1
Output A
+
Load
Sinking
– –
Power
Supply
24VDC
+
Sourcing
Load Powered by External Power Bus
Communicate With Your Module
I/O messages are sent to (consumed) and received from (produced)
the I/O module. These messages are mapped into the processor’s
memory. The I/O relay output module consumes 1 byte of output data
(scanner Tx - status). It does not produce data (scanner Rx).
Default Data Map for the Relay Output Modules
RPSSTR4M12A
Message Size: 1 Byte
7
Consumes
(Scanner Tx)
6
5
4
Not Used
3
2
1
0
Ch3 Ch2 Ch1 Ch0 Output
State
Where: 0 = OFF, 1 = ON
EDS File Requirements
The EDS file is available online at www.rosscontrols.com/rosslit.htm.
5
www.rosscontrols.com
5
Serial Bus Relay Output Module, Series A (RPSSTR4M12A)
Add Relay Output Module to RSLogix 5000
I/O Configuration
If your RSLogic 5000 is Version 15.X or greater:
• Choose the RPSSTR4M12A module from the list of Parker
modules.
To add your relay output module to RSLogix 5000 I/O configuration,
follow these steps:
• In RSLogix 5000:
- For ControlNet, highlight the RPSSCCNA or 1738-ACNR
(Shown), right click and select New Module.
• Enter a name and click OK.
- For EtherNet/IP, highlight the RPSSCENA or 1738-AENT
(Shown), right click and select New Module.
• Notice that the RPSSTR4M12A is now under the I/O
configuration.
6
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Serial Bus Relay Output Module, Series A (RPSSTR4M12A)
If your RSLogic 5000 is Version 13.X:
• Choose the equivalent Rockwell Automation module
1738-OW4M12/A.
Troubleshoot With the Indicators
RPSSTR4M12A
RPSSTR4M12A
Form A
Isolated Relay Out
1
0
Module Status Indicator
Network Status Indicator
MOD
NET
2
3
0
1
2
I/O Status Indicators
3
• Enter a name (optional), slot number, and comm. format. Make
sure to choose Compatible Module for Electronic Keying
setting.
Indication
Module Status
Off
Green
Flashing Green
Flashing Red
Red
Flashing Red/Green
Indication
Network Status
Off
• Choose Next to set RPI.
• Choose Finish. Notice that the output module is now under the
I/O configuration
Flashing Green
Green
Flashing Red
Red
Flashing Red/Green
Indication
I/O Status
Off
Yellow
www.rosscontrols.com
Probable Cause
No power applied to device
Device operating normally
Device needs commissioning due to
missing, incomplete, or incorrect
configuration
Recoverable fault
Unrecoverable fault may require device replacement
Device is in self-test
Probable Cause
Device is not on line:
- Device has not completed
dup_MAC-id test.
- Device not powered - check module
status indicator.
Device is on line but has no
connections in the established state.
Device is on line and has
connections in the established state.
One or more I/O connections in
timed-out state.
Critical link failure - failed
communication device. Device
detected error that prevents it from
communicating on the network.
Communication faulted device - the
device has detected a network access
error and is in communication faulted
state. Device has received and accepted
an Identity Communication Faulted
Request - long protocol message.
Probable Cause
Output is inactive
Output is active and under control
7
Serial Bus Relay Output Module, Series A (RPSSTR4M12A)
Specifications - Following are specifications for the RPSSTR4M12A relay output module.
Relay Output Modules
Outputs per Module
Output Voltage Range (load dependent)
Output Current Rating (at rated power)
Output Signal Delay OFF to ON, Maximum1
Output Delay Time, ON to OFF, Maximum1
Off-State Leakage Current (Max. at 240VAC)
Power Rating (steady state)
Initial Contact Resistance
Switching Frequency, Maximum
Operate/Release Time, Maximum
Bounce Time
Minimum Contact Load
Expected Life of Electrical Contacts
Fusing
Keyswitch Position
LED Indicators
PointBus Current, Maximum
Power Dissipation, Maximum
Thermal Dissipation, Maximum
Isolation Voltage
Between any 2 sets of contacts
Customer load to logic
Field Power Bus
Supply Voltage
Voltage Range, Maximum
Supply Current
Dimensions
Inches (Metric)
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity
Shock
Vibration
ESD Immunity
Radiated RF Immunity
EFT/B Immunity
Surge Transient Immunity
Conducted RF Immunity
Emissions
Enclosure Type Rating
Mounting Base Screw Torque
Wiring Category2
Weight
Imperial (Metric)
Certifications:
(when product is marked)
4 Form A isolated (normally open) electromechanical relays
5-28.8VDC @ 2.0A resistive
Resistive: 2A @ 5-28.8VDC
Inductive: 2.0A steady state @ 5-28.8VDC, L/R = 7 ms
10 ms (time from valid output on signal to relay energization by module)
26 ms (time from valid output off signal to relay deenergization by module)
1.2 mA and bleed resistor through snubber circuit
60W max. for 28.8VDC resistive output
60VA max. for 28.8VDC inductive output
30 mW
1 operation/3s (0.3 Hz at rated load)
10 ms
1.2 ms (mean)
100μA at 100 mVDC
Minimum 100,000 operations @ rated loads
Module outputs are not fused. If fusing is desired, you must supply external fusing.
7
4 yellow output status, logic side
1 green/red network status, logic side
1 green/red module status, logic side
90 mA @ 5VDC
0.5W @ 28.8VDC
1.7 BTU/hr. @ 28.8VDC
Tested to withstand 2550VDC for 60s
Tested to withstand 2550VDC for 60s
None required
5-28.8VDC
2A per channel maximum, 8A per module
1.25H x 2.63W x 4.25D (31.75H x 66.80W x 107.95D)
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad, Operating Cold),
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd, Operating Dry Heat),
IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb, Operating Thermal Shock):
-20 to 60°C (-4 to 140°F)
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab, Un-packaged Non-operating Cold),
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb, Un-packaged Non-operating Dry Heat),
-40 to 85°C (-40 to 185°F)
IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db, Un-packaged Non-operating Damp Heat): 5 to 95% non-condensing
IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea, Unpackaged Shock):
Operating 15g, Non-operating 50g
IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc, Operating): 2g @ 10 to 500Hz
IEC 61000-4-2:
6kV contact discharges, 8kV air discharges
IEC 61000-4-3:
10V/m with 1kHz sine-wave 80%AM from 80MHz to 2000MHz
10V/m with 200Hz 50% Pulse 100%AM at 900Mhz
10V/m with 200Hz 50% Pulse 100%AM at 1890Mhz
IEC 61000-4-4: ±3kV at 5kHz on signal ports
IEC 61000-4-5: ±1kV line-line(DM) and ±2kV line-earth(CM) on signal ports
IEC 61000-4-6: 10Vrms with 1kHz sine-wave 80%AM from 150kHz to 80MHz
CSPR 11: Group 1, Class A
Meets IP65/66/67 (when marked)
#8 screw, 7.5 in. lbs. in Aluminum, 16 in. lbs. in Steel
1 - on signal ports
0.637 lb. (0.289 kg)
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment,
certified for US and Canada
CE
European Union 89/336/EEC EMC Directive,
compliant with:
EN 61000-6-4; Industrial Emissions
EN 50082-2; Industrial Immunity
EN 61326; Meas./Control/Lab., Industrial Requirements
EN 61000-6-2; Industrial Immunity
European Union 73/23/EEC LVD Directive, compliant with:
EN61131-2; Programmable Controllers
C- Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act, compliant with:
AS/NZS CISPR 11; Industrial Emissions
1. OFF to ON or ON to OFF delay is time from a valid output “on” or “off” signal to output energization or de-energization.
2. Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing. Refer to Publication A10324 “Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines”.
Printed in U.S.A -0807
© Copyright 2007, ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Form A10320
Installation & Service Instructions
A10325
Safety Guidelines for the Application,
Installation, and Maintenance of
Solid State Controls
ISSUED: August, 2007
Supersedes: None
! WARNING
To avoid unpredictable system behavior that can cause personal
injury and property damage:
• Disconnect electrical supply (when necessary) before installation,
servicing, or conversion.
• Disconnect air supply and depressurize all air lines connected to
this product before installation, servicing, or conversion.
• Operate within the manufacturer’s specified pressure, temperature,
and other conditions listed in these instructions.
• Medium must be moisture-free if ambient temperature is below
freezing.
• Service according to procedures listed in these instructions.
• Installation, service, and conversion of these products must be
performed by knowledgeable personnel who understand how
pneumatic products are to be applied.
• After installation, servicing, or conversion, air and electrical
supplies (when necessary) should be connected and the product
tested for proper function and leakage. If audible leakage is present,
or the product does not operate properly, do not put into use.
• Warnings and specifications on the product should not be covered
by paint, etc. If masking is not possible, contact your local
representative for replacement labels.
Table of Contents
Foreword ...................................................................................... 2
NEMA Standard Text ................................................................... 2
Section 1 Definitions ................................................................... 2
Section 2 General ........................................................................ 3
2.1 Ambient Temperature ........................................................ 3
2.2 Electrical Noise .................................................................. 3
2.3 Off-State Current ................................................................ 4
2.4 Polarity ............................................................................... 4
2.5 Rate of Rise-Voltage or Current (DV/DT or DI/DT) ............ 5
2.6 Surge Current ..................................................................... 5
2.7 Transient Overvoltage ........................................................ 6
Section 3 Application Guidelines ............................................... 6
3.1 General Application Precautions ........................................ 6
3.2 Circuit Isolation Requirements ........................................... 9
Safety Guide
For more complete information on recommended application guidelines,
see the Installation Safety Guidelines section of Bulletin 600 (Form
A10309) or you can download the Installation Safety Guidelines at:
www.rosscontrols.com/rosslit.htm.
3.3 Special Application Considerations .................................... 9
3.4 Planning Electrical Noise Rejection ................................. 11
3.5 Countering the Effects of Off-State Current ..................... 13
3.6 Avoiding Adverse Environmental Conditions ................... 14
3.7 The Need for Education – Knowledge Leads to Safety ... 15
Section 4 Installation Guidelines ............................................. 16
4.1 Installation and Wiring Practice ........................................ 16
4.2 Enclosures (Cooling and Ventilating) ............................... 17
4.3 Special Handling of Electrostatic Sensitive Devices ........ 17
4.4 Compatibility of Devices with Applied Voltages
and Frequencies .............................................................. 17
4.5 Testing Precautions ......................................................... 17
4.6 Startup Procedures .......................................................... 18
Section 5 Preventive Maintenance and Repair Guidelines .... 19
! WARNING
FAILURE OR IMPROPER SELECTION OR IMPROPER USE OF THE
PRODUCTS AND/OR SYSTEMS DESCRIBED HEREIN OR RELATED
ITEMS CAN CAUSE DEATH, PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY
DAMAGE.
This document and other information from ROSS CONTROLS, its
subsidiaries and authorized distributors provide product and/or system
options for further investigation by users having technical expertise. It
is important that you analyze all aspects of your application, including
consequences of any failure and review the information concerning the
product or systems in the current product catalog. Due to the variety of
operating conditions and applications for these products or systems, the user,
through its own analysis and testing, is solely responsible for making the final
selection of the products and systems and assuring that all performance,
safety and warning requirements of the application are met.
The products described herein, including without limitation, product features,
specifications, designs, availability and pricing, are subject to change by
ROSS CONTROLS and its subsidiaries at any time without notice.
EXTRA COPIES OF THESE INSTRUCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE FOR INCLUSION
IN EQUIPMENT / MAINTENANCE MANUALS THAT UTILIZE THESE
PRODUCTS. CONTACT YOUR LOCAL REPRESENTATIVE.
5.1 General ............................................................................ 19
5.2 Preventive Maintenance .................................................. 19
5.3 Repair ............................................................................... 20
5.4 Safety Recommendations for Maintenance Personnel .... 20
Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation, and Maintenance of Solid State Controls
Foreword
This ROSS CONTROLS® publication is formatted to harmonize with NEMA Standards Publication No. ICS 1.1-1984 (R1988, R1993,
R1998, R2003) Industrial Control and Systems: Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation, and Maintenance of Solid State Controls.
The text of the NEMA Standard has been reprinted verbatim, with NEMA’s permission, in the left column, captioned “NEMA Standard Text”.
The right column, captioned “Explanatory Information”, contains additional comments. The comments provide supplementary information
to the NEMA Standard to help the reader better understand the characteristics of industrial equipment employing solid state technology.
NEMA Standards Publication ICS 1.1-1984 (R1988, R1993, R1998, R2003) is available from the National Electrical Manufacturers
Association, 1300 North 17th Street, Suite 1752, Rosslyn, VA 22209. It may be purchased or a copy downloaded at no charge at www.
nema.org/stds/ics1-1.cfm.
NEMA Standard Text
Explanatory Information
SCOPE – This Standards Publication is intended to provide
general guidelines for the application, installation, and
maintenance of solid state control in the form of individual
devices or packaged assemblies incorporating solid state
components. The emphasis of the guidelines is personnel
safety. Applicable NEMA standards and product related
instructions should be carefully followed.
(Supplementary Comments – Not part of NEMA
STANDARDS PUBLICATION NO. ICS-1.1)
SCOPE
The scope of this ROSS CONTROLS Publication (A10325)
is identical to the scope of NEMA Standards Publication
No. ICS 1.1, quoted in the left column.
Section 1
Definitions
Electrical Noise – Unwanted electrical energy that has
the possibility of producing undesirable effects in the
control, its circuits and system. Electrical noise includes
Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Radio Frequency
Interference (RFI).
Electrical Noise Immunity – The extent to which the
control is protected from a stated electrical noise.
Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) – Electromagnetic
disturbance that manifests itself in performance
degradation, malfunction, or failure of electronic
equipment. (IEC)
Off-State Current – The current that flows in a solid state
device in the off-state condition.
Off-State Condition – The conditions of a solid state
device when no control signal is applied.
On-State Condition – The condition of a solid state device
when conducting.
Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) – RFI is used
interchangeably with EMI. EMI is a later definition that
includes the entire electromagnetic spectrum, whereas RFI
is more restricted to the radio-frequency band, generally
considered to be between 10k and 10G Hz. (IEC)
Surge Current – A current exceeding the steady state
current for a short time duration, normally described by its
peak amplitude and time duration.
Transient Overvoltage – The peak voltage in excess of
steady state voltage for a short time during the transient
conditions (e.g., resulting from the operations of a
switching device).
2
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation, and Maintenance of Solid State Controls
Section 2
General
General Comments
(Sections 2 through 5 are classified as Authorized
Engineering Information 11-15-1984.)
Solid state devices provide many advantages such
as high speed, small size, and the ability to handle
extremely complex functions. However, they differ
from electromechanical devices in the basic operating
characteristics and sensitivity to environmental influences.
In addition, solid state devices exhibit different failure
mechanisms when overstressed.
The comments which follow are intended to provide
additional information to help the reader better understand
the operating characteristics, environmental limitations,
and failure modes of industrial equipment that incorporates
solid state technology. Those who select, install, use,
and service such equipment should apply that knowledge
to make appropriate decisions that will optimize the
performance and safety of their applications.
Solid State and electro-mechanical controls can perform
similar control functions, but there are certain unique
characteristics of solid state controls which must be
understood.
In the application, installation and maintenance of solid
state control, special consideration should be given to the
characteristics described in 2.1 through 2.7.
2.1 Ambient Temperature
Care should be taken not to exceed the ambient
temperature range specified by the manufacturer.
2.2 Electrical Noise
Performance of solid state controls can be affected
by electrical noise. In general, complete systems are
designed with a degree of noise immunity. Noise immunity
can be determined through tests such as described in
3.4.2. Manufacturer recommended installation practices
for reducing the effect of noise should be followed.
C.2.1 Ambient Temperature
Temperature of the air immediately surrounding an open
solid state device is the ambient temperature which must be
considered. When equipment is installed in an enclosure,
the enclosure internal air temperature is the ambient
temperature which must be considered. Solid state
component manufacturers usually publish the component
failure rate for an ambient temperature of 40 degrees
Celsius. A useful rule of thumb is: The failure rate of solid
state components doubles for every ten degrees Celsius
rise in temperature. This rule of exponential increases in
failure rate is a strong incentive for the user to keep the
ambient temperature as low as possible.
Also see sections 3.6.1, and 3.6.2.
C.2.2 Electrical Noise
Solid state devices are generally more susceptible to
electrical noise interference than their electromechanical
counterparts. The reasons are straightforward. The
operating mechanism for electromechanical devices
requires a deliberate input of electrical energy that can be
converted into a sustained mechanical force that is strong
enough to close the hard contacts and maintain the closure
for the duration on the ON cycle. Most random electrical
noise signals lack the energy content to produce that
magnitude of mechanical force.
The operating mechanism for solid state devices is
totally different. The deliberate electric energy input is
used to disturb the placement of the electrically charged
particles within the molecular structure. This molecular
displacement changes the electrical characteristic from
that of an insulator to that of a conductor or vice versa.
The required energy level is very low. In addition, a
sustained signal is not required for components such as
SCRs, triacs, and logic gates because these types are
self-latching. Most random electrical noise signals are
of the momentary low energy type. Since it is difficult
to separate deliberate signals from random noise, the
devices are thereby more susceptible. This is cause for
special concern regarding the electrical environment and
possible need for noise rejection measures.
Also see sections 3.4, 3.4.1, 3.4.2, 3.4.3.
www.rosscontrols.com
3
Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation, and Maintenance of Solid State Controls
2.3 Off-State Current
C.2.3 Off-State Current
Solid state controls generally exhibit a small amount of
current flow when in the off-state condition. Precautions
must be exercised to ensure proper circuit performance
and personnel safety. The value of this current is available
from the manufacturer.
Off-state current is also referred to as leakage current in
the literature. A solid state “contact” is a solid block of
material which is switched from ON to OFF by a change
internally from a conductor to an insulator. Since a perfect
insulator does not exist, there is always some leakage
current present as long as voltage is applied to the device.
The presence of leakage current indicates that OFF does
not mean OPEN. The reader is warned that simply turning
a solid state device OFF does not remove the possibility
of a shock hazard.
Solid state and electromechanical devices, used as inputs
to solid state controls, must be compatible with the solid
state equipment with which they are used. Solid state
devices have inherent off-state current, as explained in the
preceding paragraph. Electromechanical devices may also
permit a small amount of current to flow when the device is
in the “open” position due to poor insulation characteristics,
which may be subject to further deterioration with age and
use. An example is a switching device that employs a
carbon brush in contact with an insulating segment of the
switch in the off-state, such that a conductive film may be
deposited by the brush on the insulating segment. Any
input device that could produce an erroneous signal of
sufficient magnitude to cause a malfunction of the solid
state equipment, such as unintended turn ON or inability
to turn OFF, should not be used with solid state controls.
Also see section 3.5.2.
C.2.4 Polarity
2.4 Polarity
Incorrect polarity of applied voltages may damage solid
state controls. The correct polarity of solid state controls
should be observed.
In some instances incorrect polarity can cause damage to
controlled equipment or unintended actuation of outputs.
This could result in personal injury due to an unexpected
response of the controlled equipment or process.
Also see section 3.3.2.
4
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation, and Maintenance of Solid State Controls
2.5 Rate of Rise-Voltage or Current
(DV/DT or DI/DT)
C.2.5 Rate of Rise-Voltage or Current
Solid state controls can be affected by rapid changes of
voltage or current if the rate of rise (DV/DT and/or DI/DT)
is greater than the maximum permissible value specified
by the manufacturer.
The DV/DT rating specifies the maximum rate at which
voltage may be applied to the power terminals of a solid
state device. Voltage applied at a rate exceeding the DV/
DT rating can switch the device ON without an input signal
being applied. Electrical noise with high frequency content
is one source of rapidly changing voltage.
(DV/DT or DI/DT)
Another common source of high DV/DT is an inductive
load that is switched off faster than the stored energy can
be dissipated. This fast switching produces “inductive kick
voltages” that might exceed the DV/DT limit.
The DI/DT rating specifies the maximum rate at which
current flow may be increased when switching from OFF
to ON. Currents that increase faster than the DI/DT
rating cause localized hot spots due to current crowding
in a small area until the entire cross section can become
conductive. This results in gradual degradation of the
device. Subsequent operations generally result in over
dissipation and short circuit failures even under normal
load conditions. The most common situations for high
DI/DT are low load impedance, or capacitance loads.
Manufacturers of solid state equipment usually include
internal means to limit the rate of rise of voltage and
current. Nonetheless, the user should be aware that
additional external means may be necessary to adjust to
the specific conditions of some installations.
2.6 Surge Current
C.2.6 Surge Current
Current of a value greater than that specified by the
manufacturer can affect the solid state control. Current
limiting means may be required.
The manufacturer may specify allowable surge current.
Common practice is to specify the peak sinusoidal
current that can be allowed for one-half cycle at line
frequency. The intent behind this practice is to give the
user information for selecting an appropriate fuse or other
current limiting means.
Applications that require short term overcurrent capability
(e.g., motor starting) must observe the manufacturer's
restrictions on the number of times the device can be
subjected to overcurrent in a specified time interval.
The user should be aware that this specification may
vary depending upon whether the conditions call for hot
starts or cold starts. Hot start means that the solid state
component is at or near the normal operating temperature
due to previous operation history when the overcurrent
condition occurs. Cold start means that the solid state
component is at or below 40 degrees Celsius when the
overcurrent condition occurs.
www.rosscontrols.com
5
Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation, and Maintenance of Solid State Controls
2.7 Transient Overvoltage
Solid state controls may be affected by transient
overvoltages which are in excess of those specified by
the manufacturer. Voltage limiting means should be
considered and may be required.
Section 3
C.2.7 Transient Overvoltage
Solid state devices are especially sensitive to excessive
voltage. When the peak voltage rating is exceeded, even
for a fraction of a second, permanent damage can occur.
The crystalline structure of the device may be irretrievably
altered and the device may no longer be able to turn
OFF. The external symptom of this situation is exactly the
same as that of an electromechanical device with welded
contacts.
Minimum Holding Current
Another characteristic of concern is the minimum holding
current requirement for triacs and SCRs. When the load
current falls below the minimum value, typically 25 – 100
mA, the triac or SCR ceases conduction and passes only
off-state current until again triggered. Thus, it may not
be possible for the circuit to turn-on or conduct full load
current for very light loads. In these instances, a load
resistor called a bleeder resistor may be connected to the
output to provide the minimum load. In some equipment
special circuitry is provided to overcome this problem.
Application Guidelines
3.1 General Application Precautions
3.1.1 Circuit Considerations
The consequences of some malfunctions such as those
caused by shorted output devices, alteration, loss of
memory, or failure of isolation within components or logic
devices, require that the user be concerned with the safety
of personnel and the protection of the electronics.
It is recommended that circuits which the user considers
to be critical to personnel safety, such as “end of
travel” circuits and “emergency stop” circuits, should
directly control their appropriate functions through an
electromechanical device independent of the solid state
logic. Such circuits should initiate the stop function
through deenergization rather than energization of the
control device. This provides a means of circuit control
that is independent of system failure.
6
C.3.1.1 Circuit Considerations
The predominant failure mode of solid state devices is in
the ON condition. This failure mode and the other types
of failures mentioned in the NEMA Standard are the
reasons for the precautions that are recommended for
safety-critical circuits on systems that control potentially
hazardous processes or machine operations.
Alternatively, if solid-state is used for circuits designated as
safety-critical, the circuits should be designed to provide
safety equivalent to the recommended “hard-wired”
electromechanical circuits. In such cases consideration
should be given to techniques such as: redundancy,
feedback loops, diagnostics, interlocking and read-only
memory for critical parts of a program.
De-energization rather than energization of the control
device should be specified for STOP circuits so broken
wires or corroded contacts do not go undetected. Estop push buttons or pull cords should be installed at
appropriate locations on a machine to provide operators
with a rapid and convenient means for removing power
from devices which control machine motion.
Alternate methods of stopping such as dynamic braking
and regenerative braking may be available. In order
to accomplish the dynamic braking and regenerative
braking function, the control circuit, or part of it, in the
equipment must remain energized during the stopping
mode. However, operator interface components such as
stop push buttons or pull cords, must still be connected
through normally closed contacts so broken wires or
corroded contacts do not go undetected. Also, if dynamic
or regenerative braking is used for emergency stopping,
provision should be made to interrupt the power circuit as
soon as the machine comes to a stop.
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation, and Maintenance of Solid State Controls
3.1.2 Power Up/Power Down Considerations
C.3.1.2 Power Up/Power Down Considerations
Consideration should be given to system design so that
unsafe operation does not occur under these conditions
since solid state outputs may operate erratically for a short
period of time after applying or removing power.
Response of a system during power up/power down can
create hazards not encountered during normal operation.
Erratic operation of solid state outputs due to the changing
voltage of DC power supplies during start up is one
example. To avoid unpredictable outputs, many power
supplies incorporate a power turn-on time delay circuit.
This allows power supply output voltage to reach its
specified value before being applied to solid state logic
and output circuits. If this protection is not part of the DC
supplies for a system, a timing circuit external to the power
supply can be added to delay the application of power to
output devices.
Removing all power or losing all power from a system
simultaneously usually does not result in a hazard since
the power for machine operation is also being removed.
However, when power other than electrical power is being
controlled, a power interlock circuit may be required to
protect against unexpected machine motion. Power
interlocks with automatic shutdown should be included
if erratic or hazardous operation results due to loss of
one power supply in a system with multiple supplies.
Automatic power supply sequencing should be employed
in systems that require the application or removal of power
in a specific sequence. If the STOP or E-STOP sequence
normally employs dynamic braking, alternative safeguards,
such as automatic mechanical braking upon loss of power,
should be provided if coasting stops are hazardous.
If hazardous operation can result from unexpected
restoration of power during a power outage or a system
shutdown, the system should include a feature which
requires a deliberate operator action before power is
reapplied to the system.
www.rosscontrols.com
7
Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation, and Maintenance of Solid State Controls
3.1.3 Redundancy and Monitoring
C.3.1.3 Redundancy and Monitoring
When solid state devices are being used to control
operations, which the user determines to be critical, it is
strongly recommended that redundancy and some form
of checking be included in the system. Monitoring circuits
should check that actual machine or process operation
is identical to controller commands; and in the event of
failure in the machine, process, or the monitoring system,
the monitoring circuits should initiate a safe shutdown
sequence.
The normal operating mechanism for solid state components
depends upon a deliberate electrical signal input altering
the internal molecular structure of the semiconductor
material. Unfortunately, spurious input signals may also
alter the internal molecular structure without any means for
external detection that this has happened. Therefore, solid
state devices are subject to malfunction due to random
causes that are undetectable. Because of this, redundancy
and monitoring are the most highly recommended means
for counteracting this situation.
When redundancy is used, dissimilar components not
susceptible to common cause failure should be used for
the redundant elements if a common cause could produce
simultaneous failure of those elements in a dangerous
mode.
A “safe shutdown sequence” can involve much more than
disconnecting electrical power for some machinery and
processes. Examples include machines with high inertia
and hazardous access points; processes that become
unstable at shutdown unless a specific sequence is
followed; etc. The control system for such applications
should be configured to deal with the particular hazard(s)
through use of special features such as automatic transfer
of control functions to redundant devices in the event of
failure of primary controls; alarm circuits and diagnostics
to signal and identify failures that require repair in order
to maintain redundancy; emergency power sources with
automatic transfer upon loss of primary power source; or
other appropriate features.
3.1.4 Overcurrent Protection
C.3.1.4 Overcurrent Protection
To protect triacs and transistors from shorted loads, a
closely matched short circuit protective device (SCPD) is
often incorporated. These SCPDs should be replaced only
with devices recommended by the manufacturer.
Even a closely matched short circuit protective device
(SCPD) will generally protect a solid state device only
against shorted loads, an accidental short to ground
or a phase to phase short. Depending upon the
application, additional protective measures may be
needed to protect the solid state devices against small to
moderate overcurrents. Consult with the manufacturer if
necessary.
3.1.5 Overvoltage Protection
To protect triacs, SCRs and transistors from overvoltages,
it may be advisable to consider incorporating peak voltage
clamping devices such as varistors, zener diodes, or
snubber networks in circuits incorporating these devices.
8
C.3.1.5 Overvoltage Protection
See section 2.7.
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation, and Maintenance of Solid State Controls
3.2 Circuit Isolation Requirements
C.3.2.1 Separating Voltages
3.2.1 Separating Voltages
For specifications of Class 2 circuitry, refer to Article 725
of the National Electrical Code, NFPA 70.
Solid state logic uses low level voltage (e.g., less than
32 volts DC) circuits. In contrast, the inputs and outputs
are often high level (e.g., 120 volts AC) voltages. Proper
design of the interface protects against an unwanted
interaction between the low level and high level circuits;
such an interaction can result in a failure of the low voltage
circuitry. This is potentially dangerous. An input and
output circuitry incorporating effective isolation techniques
(which may include limiting impedance or Class 2 supplied
circuitry) should be selected.
C.3.2.2 Isolation Techniques
Isolation transformers, pulse transformers, reed relays,
or optical couplers are typical means to transmit low level
logic signals to power devices in the high level circuit.
Isolation impedance means also are used to transmit logic
signals to power devices.
In addition to utilizing the various components discussed
in the left column, specific wiring techniques should be
applied to assure separation of power circuit wires from
logic circuit wires. If at all possible, logic wires should be
run in a conduit that is segregated for that purpose only.
Multiple conductors in a shielded cable is an appropriate
substitute for separate conduits. Another common practice
is to run the logic signals through twisted pairs of wire.
Regardless of the circumstances, wires carrying logic
signals should never be wrapped in the same bundle with
wires that carry power signals.
3.3 Special Application Considerations
C.3.3.1 Converting Ladder Diagrams
3.3.1 Converting Ladder Diagrams
The example cited in this section of the NEMA Standard
illustrates only one of a number of reasons for special care
in converting an electromechanical (relay) ladder diagram
to a programmable controller (PC) program. Some other
basic considerations are:
3.2.2 Isolation Techniques
The most important function of isolation components is to
separate high level circuits from low level circuits in order
to protect against the transfer of a fault from one level to
the other.
Converting a ladder diagram originally designed for
electromechanical systems to one using solid state
control must account for the differences between
electromechanical and solid state devices. Simply
replacing each contact in the ladder diagram with a
corresponding solid state “contact” will not always produce
the desired logic functions or fault detection and response.
For example, in electromechanical systems, a relay having
a mechanically linked normally open (NO) and normally
closed (NC) contact can be wired to check itself. Solid
state components do not have a mutually exclusive NO-NC
arrangement. However, external circuitry can be employed
to sample the input and “contact” state and compare to
determine if the system is functioning properly.
• A PC program is an instruction to the PC's central
processing unit to enable it to perform the logic functions
and sequences for a particular application. Typically,
the PC's logic level components are electrically isolated
from the actual input, sensor and actuator devices,
as contrasted with electromechanical controls which
usually include contacts and coils of the actual plant
floor devices in the control schematic. Therefore a PC
program normally functions as open-loop control, unless
feedback loops from the plant floor devices to separate
inputs of the PC are provided and programmed to
cause corrective action if inconsistencies are detected.
Programmers of PC systems should evaluate functional
and safety implications of all control paths and provide
appropriate feedback arrangements as needed.
(continued)
www.rosscontrols.com
9
Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation, and Maintenance of Solid State Controls
C.3.3.1 (continued)
• In an electromechanical implementation of a ladder
diagram, power is available to every rung at all times,
so that the logic of the various rungs is executed
continually and simultaneously, limited of course by
the operating delays inherent in the electromechanical
devices. By contrast, a typical PC examines the status
of input devices (I/O scan), then executes the user
program in sequence (program scan), then changes
outputs accordingly in the next I/O scan. Therefore,
the sequential order of a PC program can be of more
importance and significance than in its electromechanical
counterpart, particularly when special instructions such
as “immediate” inputs or outputs are programmed
as some PCs permit. Also, differences in response
characteristics of components, differences in system
architecture, and the scan time associates with a PC
system can combine to change timing characteristics of
a circuit significantly. In particular, care must be taken in
handling momentary or rapidly changing inputs to a PC
system which might be missed between scans. Simple
transfer of a ladder diagram without consideration of
these characteristics of PCs may produce unintended
and possibly hazardous results. Programmers should
consult the user’s manual in order to understand
the characteristics of the particular PC being used,
and provide appropriate features in the program to
accommodate them.
• Another concern is the operating mode of devices
connected to input terminals. Input signals must be
arranged so loss of signal due to a broken wire or
corroded contact does not go undetected and create a
hazardous condition. In particular, stop functions should
be initiated by opening a normally closed external circuit
rather than closing a normally open circuit even though
the system is capable of being programmed to accept
either type of input.
The considerations described in this section apply to
the creation of “new” programs as well as conversion of
existing ladder diagrams.
3.3.2 Polarity and Phase Sequence
C.3.3.2 Polarity and Phase Sequence
Input power and control signals should be applied
with polarity and phase sequence as specified by the
manufacturer. Solid state devices can be damaged by
the application of reverse polarity or incorrect phase
sequence.
Additionally, incorrect polarity or phase sequence
connection may cause erratic response by solid state
controls, with potential hazards to personnel. Frequently,
such a system contains a detection circuit that illuminates
an indicator when incorrect phase sequence is applied.
Phase sequence may be corrected by interchanging
any two system input power leads. It is advisable to
check rotation of motors whenever input power leads are
disconnected and reconnected in a system.
10
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation, and Maintenance of Solid State Controls
3.4 Planning Electrical Noise Rejection
The low energy levels of solid state controls may cause
them to be vulnerable to electrical noise. This should be
considered in the planning stages.
3.4.1 Assessing Electrical Environment
C.3.4.1 Assessing Electrical Environment
Sources of noise are those pieces of equipment that have
large, fast changing voltages or currents when they are
energized or de-energized, such as motor starters, welding
equipment, SCR type, adjustable speed devices and other
inductive devices. These devices, as well as the more
common control relays and their associated wiring, all
have the capability of inducing serious current and voltage
transients on their respective power lines. It is these
transients which nearby solid state controls must withstand
and for which noise immunity should be provided.
Noise can also occur in the form of electromagnetic
radiation, or due to improper grounding practices. Section
C.3.4.3 explains these forms of noise and precautionary
measures that should be taken for protection against
them.
An examination of the proposed installation site of the
solid state control should identify equipment that could
contaminate power lines. All power lines that will be
tapped by the proposed solid state control should be
examined for the presence, severity, and frequency of
noise occurrences. If found, system plans should provide
for the control of such noise.
In many instances a system may begin to malfunction some
time after it has been installed and is working properly.
This may be due to recent installation of new equipment
capable of inducing noise into presently operating systems.
Thus, it is not sufficient to merely evaluate a system at the
time of installation. Periodic rechecks should be made,
especially as other equipment is moved, modified, or newly
installed. When installing a solid state system, it is wise to
assume various noise sources exist and install the system
to guard against possible interference.
3.4.2 Selecting Devices to Provide Noise Immunity
C.3.4.2 Selecting Devices to Provide Noise Immunity
Installation planning is not complete without examination
of the noise immunity characteristics of the system devices
under consideration. Results of tests to determine relative
immunity to electrical noise may be requested from the
manufacturer. Two such standardized tests are the ANSI
(C37.90a-1974) Surge Withstand Capability Test and
the NEMA (ICS.1-1983) noise test referred to as The
Showering Arc Test. These are applied where direct
connection of solid state control to other electromechanical
control circuits is intended. Circuits involving analog
regulating systems or high speed logic are generally
more sensitive to electrical noise; therefore, isolation and
separation of these circuits is more critical.
Inductive devices are capable of generating high voltage
transients when switched off. In addition to possibly
causing damage to solid state devices by exceeding the
semiconductor voltage rating, the high voltage transient can
be coupled to other portions of a system where it appears
as noise. Fortunately, it is fairly easy to limit the effects of
this type of noise with some form of suppression device.
When necessary, in addition to suppression devices often
provided in solid state equipment, an external suppressor
should be connected as close as possible to the source of
the transient for maximum attenuation.
NOTE: A surge suppressor increases drop-out time of an
electromechanical device.
Further information on electrical noise and evaluation
of the severity of noise may be found in ANSI/IEEE
Publication No. 518-1982.
Where severe power line transients are anticipated or
noted, appropriate filters such as commercially available
line filter, isolation transformers, or voltage limiting
varistors, should be considered.
All inductive components associated with the system
should be examined for the need for noise suppression.
www.rosscontrols.com
11
Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation, and Maintenance of Solid State Controls
3.4.3 Design of Wiring for Maximum Protection
C.3.4.3 Design of Wiring for Maximum Protection
Once the installation site and power conductors have been
examined, the system wiring plans that will provide noise
suppression should be considered.
Noise can also occur in the form of electromagnetic
radiation. Examples include radio frequency (RF) energy
emanating from portable transceivers (walkie-talkie) and
fixed station transmitters of various types. Close coupling
is not required; the various lines entering the system act as
receiving antennas. Tests described in 3.4.2 may not be
sufficient to demonstrate noise immunity to radio frequency
signals. Variations in building construction and equipment
installation make it impossible for equipment manufacturers
to perform meaningful tests of radio frequency sources. RF
fields are affected by concentrating masses of metal such
as steel beams, piping, conduit, metal enclosures, and
equipment used in production such as fork lift trucks and
products being transported on conveyors.
Conducted noise enters solid state control at the points
where the control is connected to input lines, output lines,
and power supply wires.
Input circuits are the circuits most vulnerable to noise.
Noise may be introduced capacitatively through wire to
wire proximity, or magnetically from nearby lines carrying
large currents. In most installations, signal lines and
power lines should be separate. Further, signal lines
should be appropriately routed and shielded according to
manufacturer’s recommendations.
When planning system layout, care must be given
to appropriate grounding practice. Because design
differences may call for different grounding, the control
manufacturer’s recommendations should be followed.
If the installation site will be subjected to this type of noise,
thorough testing should be performed to assure that the
solid state system has sufficient noise immunity for the
expected levels of radio frequency energy. Corrective
measures should be taken if necessary. These include
shielding of solid state circuits and/or connected wiring and
the establishment of restrictions to provide safe operating
distances between the solid state equipment and the RF
sources.
Grounding practices in industry are frequently
misunderstood and often ignored. Poor grounding can
lead to many problems in solid state systems. Intentionally
grounding one circuit conductor of any electrical supply
system is widely accepted and is generally required by
electrical codes.
However, the non-current carrying parts of a system
which enclose equipment and conductors must also be
grounded. In addition to complying with various codes and
standards, proper equipment grounding achieves several
desirable objectives:
1. It reduces the potential difference between conductive
surfaces to minimize electric shock hazard exposure for
personnel.
2. It provides a path for passage of fault current to operate
protective devices in the supply circuit.
3. It attenuates the electrical noise and transients which
can reach enclosed equipment and also reduces the
electrical noise which the equipment can contribute to
its surroundings.
12
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation, and Maintenance of Solid State Controls
3.5 Countering the Effects of Off-State Current
C.3.5.1 Off-State Current
3.5.1 Off-State Current
See section 2.3.
Solid state components, such as triacs, transistors, and
thyristors, inherently have in the off-state a small current
flow called “off-state current”.
Off-state current may also be contributed by devices used
to protect these components, such as RC snubbers.
3.5.2 Off-State Current Precautions
C.3.5.2 Off-State Current Precautions
Off-state currents in a device in the off-state may present
a hazard of electrical shock and the device should be
disconnected from the power source before working on
the circuit or load.
The off-state current of a power switching device such as a
solid state motor controller can be lethal. Simply switching
off power via a stop push button in a control circuit is not a
sufficient precaution, since off-state current will continue to
flow through solid state devices which remain connected
to the supply. Good practice requires disconnection of all
power from equipment before working on or near exposed
circuit parts. (See NFPA 70E, Part II.)
It should not be assumed that a shock hazard does not
exist simply because a solid state circuit operates at low
voltage levels. Standing on a wet floor or working in a
damp location can lower a person’s body impedance to the
extent that offstate current from low voltage also presents
an electrical shock hazard.
If it is necessary to work on energized equipment,
the guidelines detailed in section 5.2 for Preventive
Maintenance should be followed. In addition to the specific
procedures for personnel safety, care is needed when
making measurements in energized systems. First, there
is a possibility of damage to delicate instruments due to
off-state current. Second, the off-state current can lead
to false conclusions when using sensitive instruments to
check for “contact continuity.”
Precautions should be taken to prevent the off-state
current of an output device which is in the off-state from
energizing an input device.
When a device (solid state or electromechanical) that
can produce a leakage current in the off-state is used to
provide the input to a solid state control, the precautions
explained in section C.2.3 apply.
www.rosscontrols.com
13
Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation, and Maintenance of Solid State Controls
3.6 Avoiding Adverse Environmental
Conditions
3.6.1 Temperature
Solid state devices should only be operated within the
temperature ranges specified by the manufacturer. Because
such devices generate heat, care should be taken to see
that the ambient temperature at the device does not exceed
the temperature range specified by the manufacturer.
The main source of heat in a solid state system is the
energy dissipated in the power devices. Since the life of
the equipment can be increased by reducing operating
temperature, it is important to observe the manufacturer’s
“maximum/minimum ambient temperature” guidelines,
where ambient refers to the temperature of the air providing
the cooling. The solid state equipment must be allowed
to stabilize to within the manufacturer’s recommended
operating temperature range before energizing control
functions.
When evaluating a system design, other sources of heat in
the enclosure which might raise the ambient temperature
should not be overlooked. For example, power
supplies, transformers, radiated heat, sunlight, furnaces,
incandescent lamps, and so forth should be evaluated.
C.3.6.1 Temperature
Operation above the maximum rated temperature will
usually result in many failures in a short time. Nuisance
type malfunctions can also be encountered as a result of
elevated ambient temperature. These malfunctions, when
they occur, are usually temporary and normal operation
resumes when temperatures are lowered.
Some solid state devices temporarily cease to function
when ambient temperature is below their minimum rated
operating temperature. Operation in cold environments
should be avoided or heaters should be installed in the
equipment enclosures to bring the system up to the
minimum specified operating temperature before applying
power to the system.
Air circulating in a non-ventilated enclosure with equipment
operating will be at a higher temperature than the room
in which it is installed. A temperature differential of 10 to
20 degrees Celsius can be expected in a typical industrial
installation.
Also see section 2.1.
In instances where a system will have to exist in a very hot
ambient environment, special cooling methods may have
to be employed. Techniques that are employed include
cooling fans (with adequate filtering), vortex coolers, heat
exchanges, and air conditioned rooms.
Over-temperature sensors are recommended for systems
where special cooling is employed. Use of air conditioning
should include means for prevention of condensing
moisture.
14
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation, and Maintenance of Solid State Controls
3.6.2 Contaminants
C.3.6.2 Contaminants
Moisture, corrosive gases and liquids, and conductive
dust can all have adverse effects on a system that is not
adequately protected against atmospheric contaminants.
Modules for solid state systems usually consist of electronic
devices mounted on printed circuit boards with relatively
close spacing between conductors. Moisture in the form
of humidity is one of the atmospheric contaminants which
can cause failure. If moisture is allowed to condense on
a printed circuit board, the board metallizations could
“electroplate” across the conductor spacings when voltage
is applied. In low impedance circuits, this conductive path
would immediately burn open, then reform to be burned
open again. This action can lead to erratic operation.
In high impedance circuits, a short circuit may appear
resulting in a permanent malfunction. Specifications for
equipment often include a relative humidity exposure
limit, but appropriate precautions should be taken to
prevent condensation. Failures due to moisture are often
accelerated in the presence of corrosive gases or vapors.
These increase the conductivity of the moisture layer
allowing electromigration to occur more rapidly and at
lower potentials.
If these contaminants are allowed to collect on printed
circuit boards, bridging between the conductors may
result in malfunction of the circuit. This could lead to
noisy, erratic control operation, or at worst, a permanent
malfunction. A thick coating of dust could also prevent
adequate cooling on the board or heat sink, causing
malfunction. A dust coating on heat sinks reduces their
thermal efficiency.
Preventive measures include a specially conditioned room
or a properly specified enclosure for the system.
3.6.3 Shock and Vibration
C.3.6.3 Shock and Vibration
Excessive shock or vibration may cause damage to solid
state equipment. Special mounting provisions may be
required to minimize damage.
Solid state systems usually have good resistance to
shock and vibration since they contain no moving parts.
However, at relatively high levels of shock or vibration,
circuit boards may disengage from mating connectors
if not restrained sufficiently. Circuit boards can crack,
components can come out of sockets or component leads
can break loose from a solder connection to the board.
Mounting position is usually of little significance to solid
state devices except in instances where air flow is required
3.7 The Need for Education –
Knowledge Leads to Safety
Planning for an effective solid state circuit requires enough
knowledge to make basic decisions that will render the
system safe as well as effective.
Everyone who works with a solid state control should be
educated in its capabilities and limitations. This includes
in-plant installers, operators, service personnel, and
system designers.
www.rosscontrols.com
15
Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation, and Maintenance of Solid State Controls
Section 4
Installation Guidelines
4.1 Installation and Wiring Practice
4.1.1
Proper installation and field wiring practices are of prime
importance to the application of solid state controls. Proper
wiring practice will minimize the influence of electrical
noise, which may cause malfunction of equipment.
User and installers should familiarize themselves with the
follow installation and wiring instructions in addition to
requirements of all applicable codes, laws, and standards.
The manufacturer of the device or component in question
should be consulted whenever conditions arise that are not
covered by the manufacturer’s instructions.
4.1.2
C.4.1.2
Electrical noise is a very important consideration in any
installation of solid state control. While wiring practices
may vary from situation to situation, the following are basic
to minimizing electrical noise:
A great deal of effort goes into the design of solid state
equipment to achieve a reasonable degree of noise
immunity. Filters, shielding, and circuit design are all used.
It is, however, impossible to design equipment which is
impervious to every form of noise found in the industrial
setting.
1. Sufficient physical separation should be maintained
between electrical noise sources and sensitive
equipment to assure that the noise will not cause
malfunctioning or unintended actuation of the control.
2. Physical separation should be maintained between
sensitive signal wires and electrical power and control
conductors. This separation can be accomplished by
conduits, wiring trays, or as otherwise recommended by
the manufacturer.
When installing a system using solid state technology it
is wise to assume that electrical noise exists and install
the equipment in accordance with the recommended
guidelines to minimize problems.
Also see section 3.4.1.
3. Twisted-pair wiring should be used in critical signal
circuits and noise producing circuits to minimize
magnetic interference.
4. Shielded wire should be used to reduce the magnitude
of the noise coupled into the low level circuit by
electrostatic or magnetic coupling.
1
5. Provisions of the 1984 National Electrical Code with
respect to grounding should be followed. Additional
grounding precautions may be required to minimize
electrical noise. These precautions generally deal
with ground loop currents arising from multiple ground
paths. The manufacturer’s recommendations should be
followed.
1
16
Available from National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch
Park, Quincy, MA 02269
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation, and Maintenance of Solid State Controls
4.2 Enclosures (Cooling and Ventilating)
C.4.2 Enclosures (Cooling and Ventilating)
Suitable enclosures and control of the maximum operating
temperature, both of which are environmental variables, may
be needed to prevent malfunctions of solid state control.
NEMA Standards Publication No. 250-1985, Rev. 2, May
1988, classifies enclosures by type number and specifies
their design test requirements.
The manufacturer’s recommendations should be
followed for the selection of enclosures, ventilation, air
filtering (if required), and ambient temperature. These
recommendations may vary from installation to installation,
even within the same facility.
Also see section 2.1 and 3.6.1.
4.3 Special Handling of Electrostatic
Sensitive Devices
C.4.3 Special Handling of Electrostatic Sensitive Devices
Some devises may be damaged by electrostatic charges.
These devices are identified and should be handled in the
special manner specified by the manufacturer.
Many problems due to electrostatic discharge (ESD)
occur due to handling of modules during installation or
maintenance.
NOTE: Plastic wrapping material used to ship these
devices may be conductive and should not be used as
insulating material.
In addition to specific guidelines provided by an equipment
supplier, the following general guidelines can help reduce
damage due to ESD.
1. Use a grounding bracelet if possible to minimize charge
build-up on personnel.
2. Handle a module by the edges without touching
components or printed circuit paths.
3. Store modules with ESD sensitive components in the
conductive packaging used for shipping the modules.
Also, use conductive packaging when returning static
sensitive modules for repair.
4.4 Compatibility of Devices with Applied
Voltages and Frequencies
Prior to energization, users and installers should verify that
the applied voltage and frequency agree with the rated
voltage and frequency specified by the manufacturer.
NOTE: Incorrect voltage or frequency may cause a
malfunction of, or damage to, the control.
C.4.5 Testing Precautions
4.5 Testing Precautions
When testing solid state control, the procedures and
recommendations set forth by the manufacturer should
be followed.
When applicable, instrumentation and test equipment
should be electrically equivalent to that recommended by
the manufacturer for the test procedure. A low impedance
voltage tester should not be used.
High voltage insulation tests and dielectric tests should
never be used to test solid state devices. If high voltage
insulation of field wiring is required, solid state devices
should be disconnected. Ohmmeters should only be
used when and as recommended by the equipment
manufacturer.
Testing equipment should be grounded; if it is not, special
Make-do test devices such as incandescent lamps or neon
lamps should not be used for checking voltages in solid
state systems. Incandescent lamps have low impedance;
the low impedance of these devices can effectively
change a voltage level from a logic “1” condition to a logic
“0” condition when attempting to make a measurement.
Unexpected machine motion can result if an output to a
controlled device is energized as a result. Neon lamps
do not respond to voltages typically used in logic circuits
(e.g., 32 volts DC or less). Use of a neon lamp tester could
lead to false conclusions about the voltage level present
in a circuit.
High input impedance meters are required to obtain
accurate voltage measurements in high impedance circuits.
Unless otherwise specified by the manufacturer, a meter
with an input impedance of ten megohms or greater is
recommended for making voltage measurements. The
meter must also have sufficient sensitivity to measure
logic level voltages; some meters do not respond to low
voltages.
www.rosscontrols.com
17
Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation, and Maintenance of Solid State Controls
4.6 Startup Procedures
C.4.6 Startup Procedures
Checks and tests prior to startup and startup procedures
recommended by the manufacturer should be followed.
Startup procedures can provide important benefits for
safety with new installation, or after modifications or
repairs. A “dry run” under controlled conditions can verify
proper installation and functioning of the control system
before it is turned over to operating personnel.
Many programmable solid state systems have the
capability for simulating operation in a mode known as
“test” mode or “dry run” mode. These modes allow a user
to check a program and correct obvious programming
errors with outputs disabled. Unexpected machine motion
and possible damage to workpieces and equipment is thus
avoided. These modes can also be used to verify proper
system operation after a repair.
Many programmable systems provide capability for “force
on” and “force off” of inputs and outputs. Use of these
functions can reduce troubleshooting and maintenance
time by enabling personnel to bypass certain operations
without physically operating switches on a machine.
Care must be taken when using “force” functions to avoid
exposing personnel to hazardous machine motions or
process operations.
For controllers operating a machine tool or robot, running
a part program at a fraction of the programmed operating
speed with a workpiece of soft material is considered “good
practice”. This allows an operator to observe possible
interference of tooling with the part and make corrections
to the program. A workpiece of soft material such as wood,
plastic, or machinable wax will minimize risk of tool damage
if there is a tool crash with the workpiece.
18
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation, and Maintenance of Solid State Controls
Section 5
Preventive Maintenance and
Repair Guidelines
5.1 General
A well-planned and executed maintenance program
is essential to the satisfactory operation of solid state
electrical equipment. The kind and frequency of the
maintenance operation will vary with the kind and
complexity of the equipment as well as with the nature of
the operating conditions. Maintenance recommendations
of the manufacturer or appropriate product standards
should be followed.
Useful reference publications for setting up a maintenance
program are NFPA 70B-1983, Maintenance of Electrical
Equipment, and NFPA 70E-1983, Electrical Safety
Requirements for Employee Workplaces.
5.2 Preventive Maintenance
C.5.2 Preventive Maintenance
The following factors should be considered when
formulating a maintenance program:
Lithium batteries are frequently used for memory backup
in solid state equipment due to their excellent shelf life and
high energy to weight ratio. Lithium is a highly reactive
metal that can cause burns if there is contact with skin.
The batteries are sealed so there is seldom a problem
of contact with lithium as long as reasonable care is
exercised when handling them. They should only be used
in their intended application and not subjected to rough
handling. When batteries are replaced in equipment, the
batteries removed should be disposed of in accordance
with supplier’s instructions.
1. Maintenance must be performed by qualified personnel
familiar with the construction, operation, and hazards
involved with the control.
2. Maintenance should be performed with the control out of
operation and disconnected from all sources of power.
If maintenance must be performed while the control is
energized, the safety related practices of NFPA 70E
should be followed.
3. Care should be taken when servicing electrostatic
sensitive components.
The manufacturer’s
recommendations for these components should be
followed.
4. Ventilation passages should be kept open. If the
equipment depends upon auxiliary cooling, e.g., air,
water, or oil, periodic inspection (with filter replacement
when necessary) should be made of these systems.
5. The means employed for grounding or insulating the
equipment from ground should be checked to assure
its integrity (see 4.5).
The Department of Transportation has certain regulations
that prohibit shipment of equipment with batteries installed
if the batteries contain 0.5 gram or greater of lithium. The
batteries must be removed from equipment and shipped
separately in a container approved by the Department of
Transportation. Additional Department of Transportation
restrictions apply to the shipment of lithium batteries.
NEMA Standards Publication No. ICS 1.3 – 1986,
Preventive Maintenance of Industrial Control and System
Equipment, is recommended for personnel responsible for
maintenance of equipment.
6. Accumulations of dust and dirt on all parts, including on
semiconductor heat sinks, should be removed according
to the manufacturer’s instructions, if provided; otherwise,
the manufacturer should be consulted. Care must be
taken to avoid damaging any delicate components
and to avoid displacing dust, dirt, or debris in a way
that permits it to enter or settle into parts of the control
equipment.
(continued)
www.rosscontrols.com
19
Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation, and Maintenance of Solid State Controls
5.2 Preventive Maintenance (continued)
7. Enclosures should be inspected for evidence of
deterioration. Accumulated dust and dirt should be
removed from the top of the enclosures before opening
doors or removing covers.
8. Certain hazardous materials removed as part of
maintenance or repair procedure (e.g., polychlorinated
biphenyls (PCB) found in some liquid filled capacitors)
must be disposed of as described in Federal
regulations.
C.5.3 Repair
5.3 Repair
If equipment condition indicates repair or replacement,
the manufacturer’s instruction manual should be followed
carefully. Diagnostic information within such a manual
should be used to identify the probable source of the problem,
and to formulate a repair plan. The level of field repair
recommended by the manufacturer should be followed.
When solid state equipment is repaired, it is important
that any replacement part be in accordance with the
recommendations of the equipment manufacturer. Care
should be taken to avoid the use of parts which are no
longer compatible with other changes in the equipment.
Also, replacement parts should be inspected for
deterioration due to “shelf life” and for signs of rework or
wear which may involve factors critical to safety.
After repair, proper start-up procedures should be followed.
Special precautions should be taken to protect personnel
from hazards during start-up.
Follow manufacturer’s instructions exactly when replacing
power semiconductors mounted on heatsinks since
improper installation may become the source of further
difficulties. Torque semiconductors or bolts retaining
semiconductors to the value specified using a torque
wrench. Too much pressure against a heatsink can
damage a semiconductor while too little can restrict the
amount of heat transferred from the semiconductor to the
heatsink and result in operation at higher temperature with
decreased reliability.
Exercise care when removing modules from a system
during maintenance. Failed modules are frequently
returned to the manufacturer for repair. Any physical
damage sustained during removal may result in more
expensive repair or render the module unrepairable if
damage is too great.
Modules with electrostatic sensitive components should
be handled by the edges without touching components
or printed circuit conductors. Use packaging material
supplied with the replacement module when shipping the
module to the manufacturer for repair.
When the scope of repairs exceeds the manufacturer’s
recommendations for field repair, the module(s) should
be returned to the manufacturer for repair. Doing so will
help to ensure that only properly selected components
are used, and that all necessary hardware and firmware
revisions are incorporated into the repair. Failure to make
necessary updates may result in safety, compatibility or
performance problems which may not become apparent for
some time after the repaired module has been placed back
in service. When firmware is protected by copyright law,
updates can be provided legally only by the manufacturer
or licensee.
Also see section 4.3.
5.4 Safety Recommendations for
Maintenance Personnel
All maintenance work should be done by qualified
personnel familiar with the construction, operation, and
hazards involved with the equipment. The appropriate
work practices of NFPA 70E should be followed.
Printed in U.S.A -1007
© Copyright 2007, ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Form A10325
Installation & Service Instructions
A10329
W66 Size 0 & W66 Size 00
Interposed Regulators
ISSUED: August, 2007
Supersedes: None
! WARNING
To avoid unpredictable system behavior that can cause personal injury
and property damage:
• Disconnect electrical supply (when necessary) before installation,
servicing, or conversion.
• Disconnect air supply and depressurize all air lines connected to
this product before installation, servicing, or conversion.
• Operate within the manufacturer’s specified pressure, temperature,
and other conditions listed in these instructions.
• Medium must be moisture-free if ambient temperature is below
freezing.
• Service according to procedures listed in these instructions.
• Installation, service, and conversion of these products must be
performed by knowledgeable personnel who understand how
pneumatic products are to be applied.
• After installation, servicing, or conversion, air and electrical supplies
(when necessary) should be connected and the product tested for
proper function and leakage. If audible leakage is present, or the
product does not operate properly, do not put into use.
• Warnings and specifications on the product should not be
covered by paint, etc. If masking is not possible, contact your local
representative for replacement labels.
Safety Guide
For more complete information on recommended application guidelines,
see the Installation Safety Guidelines section of Bulletin 600 (Form
A10309) or you can download the Installation Safety Guidelines at:
www.rosscontrols.com/rosslit.htm.
! WARNING
FAILURE OR IMPROPER SELECTION OR IMPROPER USE OF THE
PRODUCTS AND/OR SYSTEMS DESCRIBED HEREIN OR RELATED ITEMS
CAN CAUSE DEATH, PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE.
This document and other information from ROSS CONTROLS, its subsidiaries
and authorized distributors provide product and/or system options for further
investigation by users having technical expertise. It is important that you
analyze all aspects of your application, including consequences of any failure
and review the information concerning the product or systems in the current
product catalog. Due to the variety of operating conditions and applications for
these products or systems, the user, through its own analysis and testing, is
solely responsible for making the final selection of the products and systems
and assuring that all performance, safety and warning requirements of the
application are met.
The products described herein, including without limitation, product features,
specifications, designs, availability and pricing, are subject to change by ROSS
CONTROLS and its subsidiaries at any time without notice.
EXTRA COPIES OF THESE INSTRUCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE FOR INCLUSION
IN EQUIPMENT / MAINTENANCE MANUALS THAT UTILIZE THESE PRODUCTS.
CONTACT YOUR LOCAL REPRESENTATIVE.
The valves exhaust (coming out of its inlet passage) is directed to
manifold or subbase exhaust port “5”.
! CAUTION: The reverse valve porting utilized with
Dual Interposed Regulation will reverse the function
of 4-Way, 3-Position cylinder to exhaust and 4-Way,
3-Position inlet to cylinder valves. Utilize the opposite
function valve for normal operation.
The interposed regulator should be installed with reasonable
accessibility for service whenever possible. Repair service kits are
available. Keep pipe or tubing lengths to a minimum with inside
clean and free of dirt and chips. Pipe joint compound should be
used sparingly and applied only to the male pipe, never into the
female port. Do not use PTFE tape to seal pipe joints. Pieces have
a tendency to break off and lodge inside the unit, possibly causing
malfunction.
Air applied to the interposed regulator must be filtered to realize
maximum component life.
Lubrication
Factory pre-lubed. If lubricating in service, use paraffin based mineral
oil with 150 to 200 SSU viscosity @100°F.
! CAUTION: Do not use oils that are synthetic, reconstituted,
have an alcohol content or a detergent additive.
Application Limits
These products are intended for use in general purpose compressed
air systems only.
Operating Pressure Range: Maximum 145 PSIG (1000 kPa)
Ambient Temperature Range:
-15°C to 49°C (5°F to 120°F)
ANSI Symbol
Independent Dual Port Regulator with 4-Way,
3-Position, Closed Center
Common Port Regulator with 4-Way,
2-Position Valve
4
2
14
4 2
5 1 3
5 1 3
Independent Dual Port Regulator with 4-Way,
3-Position, Inlet to Cylinder Function
4
Independent Single Port Regulator with
4-Way, 3-Position, Closed Center
4 2
2
12
14
12
14
12
14
12
5 1 3
5 1 3
! CAUTION: Requires 4-Way, 3-Position,
Cylinder to Exhaust Valve
Introduction
Installation:
Follow these instructions when installing, operating, or servicing
the product.
(See Figure 1, Size 00 Interposed Regulator shown as example)
Installation & Operating Instructions:
An interposed regulator is used to provide regulated pressure to
individual valves in a manifolded valve arrangement. Two basic
modes of regulation are available as follows:
Single Interposed Regulation - Provides adjustable regulated air
pressure to the valve inlet.
Dual Interposed Regulation - Provides (2) separately adjustable
regulated air pressures, one to each of the valves exhaust passages.
!
Warning:
Not following these instruction may result in Interposed Regulator
damage or inadequate thread engagement, which may lead to personal
injury, property damage, or economic loss.
Important:
• Remove pressure and electrical connections before installation.
• All threads on tie rods and screws must be free of rust, water or other
debris, which could prevent finger thread engagement.
W66 Size 0 & W66 Size 00 Interposed Regulators
Step 1: Install Tie Rods
1. Install two Tie Rods (6) to the base, torque
finger tight.
2. Adjust tie rod height to 28.5/28.0 mm
(1.12/1.10 inch) as figure shows.
3. If finger tight height exceeds 28.5 mm (1.12
inch), use mechanical tightening as necessary
to get the proper height.
Max: 28.5 mm
(1.12 Inch)
Min: 28.0 mm
(1.10 Inch)
2
lowering the secondary pressure from 550 kPa (80 PSIG) to 410
kPa (60 PSIG) is best accomplished by dropping the secondary
pressure to 345 kPa (50 PSIG), then adjusting upward to 410
kPa (60 PSIG).
Service Instructions:
4
Note: “Base” could be a manifold, sub-base or
interposed flow control.
Step 2: Install Interposed Regulator
1. Lay the Interposed Regulator Gasket (5) on the Base. Make sure
the two rubber projections are face up and the orientation of the
gasket is correct.
2. Engage both Tie Rods (6) into mounting holes on Regulator
Body, lower the Regulator Body.
3. Carefully engage the Electrical Plug into the Base.
4. Continue to lower the Regulator Body by carefully engaging the
two rubber projections on the gasket into the appropriate holes
on the Regulator Body.
5. Press the Regulator Body by hand firmly. To confirm the gasket
is indeed attached to the Regulator Body, lift the Regulator Body
by about one half inch. Both rubber projections should remain in
the holes.
6. Lay the Regulator Body back on the Base.
Step 3: Install Valve
1. Locate Valve Gasket (7) on bottom of Valve Body.
2. Install valve onto Regulator.
3. Carefully engage the Valve Electrical Plug.
4. Using hex wrench, tighten two Screws (8) – torque 1.5 to 1.7 Nm
(13 to 15 in-lb) for Size 0, 0.9 to 1.1 Nm (8 to 10 in-lb) for Size
00.
Step 4: Leakage Check
1. Apply pressure to base and check for audible leakage at various
joints. If any are present, do not not operate the valve, repeat the
assembly procedure until satisfied.
1. Disconnect air supply and depressurize the unit.
2. Loosen nut on adjusting screw. Turn adjusting screw
counterclockwise until all downstream air is exhausted.
3. For Size 00 Regulator, remove Regulator Cartridge from block
and replace with a new unit. For Size 0 Regulator, remove
Regulator from base and replace with a new unit per installation
procedure.
4. Reapply pressure to unit and check for audible leakage at joints
or out bleed holes. If any are present, do not operate the valve.
Repeat assembly procedure until satisfied.
5. Adjust outlet pressure per Outlet Pressure Adjustment
procedure.
8
Valve
Electrical
Plug
2
Valve
Body
3
7
4
1
Regulator
Electrical
Plug
5
6
Note: If both a Interposed Flow Control and Interposed Regulator is to be
installed, the Flow Control should be installed between the Regulator
and the Base. Refer to Interposed Flow Control Installation & Service
Instructions (A10327) for Interposed Flow Control installation.
2
Base
Figure 1
2
1
Size 00 Common Port Interposed Regulator
(Valve & Base shown for reference only)
2
Component List
Regulator
Electrical
Plug
5
6
Size 0 Independent Port Interposed Regulator
Outlet Pressure Adjustment:
1. Before turning on the air supply, turn the adjusting knob
counterclockwise until compression is released from the
pressure control spring then turn on air supply. Proceed to
adjust the desired downstream pressure by turning adjusting
knob clockwise. This permits pressure to build up slowly in the
downstream line.
2. To decrease regulated pressure setting, always reset from a
pressure lower than the final setting required. For e xample,
The components listed below are for identification purposes only,
some of these components are available in various Interposed
Regulator Kits, some are not available due to special factory
assembly. Individual components are not sold separately since all
kit components should be installed when serviced.
Item
1
2
3*
4
5
6
7
8
Description
Regulator Body Assembly
Gauge
Adapter Fitting
Cartridge Regulator
Flow Control / Regulator Gasket
Tie Rods
Valve Gasket
Mounting Screws
* Alternating Fittings must be used in order to fit two Size 00 regulators to
each other.
For all Instruction Sheets, go to www.rosscontrols.com
A10326 - W66 Size 0 (26mm) & W66 Size 00 (18mm) ISO 15407 Valve Service
A10327 - W66 Size 0 & W66 Size 00 ISO 15407-2 Interposed Flow Controls
A10329 - W66 Size 0 & W66 Size 00 Interposed Regulators
Printed in U.S.A -0807
A10330 - W66 Size 0 & W66 Size 00 ISO 15407-1 Subbbase & Manifold
Installation
A10331 - W65 Size 1, 2 & 3, ISO 5599-1, 5599-2 Subbase & Manifold
Installation
© Copyright 2007, ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Form A10329
Installation & Service Instructions
A10324
Industrial Automation Wiring and
Grounding Guidelines
ISSUED: August, 2007
Supersedes: None
! WARNING
To avoid unpredictable system behavior that can cause personal injury
and property damage:
• Disconnect electrical supply (when necessary) before installation,
servicing, or conversion.
• Disconnect air supply and depressurize all air lines connected to
this product before installation, servicing, or conversion.
• Operate within the manufacturer’s specified pressure, temperature,
and other conditions listed in these instructions.
• Medium must be moisture-free if ambient temperature is below
freezing.
• Service according to procedures listed in these instructions.
• Installation, service, and conversion of these products must be
performed by knowledgeable personnel who understand how
pneumatic products are to be applied.
• After installation, servicing, or conversion, air and electrical
supplies (when necessary) should be connected and the product
tested for proper function and leakage. If audible leakage is present,
or the product does not operate properly, do not put into use.
• Warnings and specifications on the product should not be
covered by paint, etc. If masking is not possible, contact your local
representative for replacement labels.
Purpose
This publication gives you general guidelines for installing
an industrial automation system that may include
programmable controllers, industrial computers, operatorinterface terminals, display devices, and communication
networks. While these guidelines apply to the majority
of installations, certain electrically harsh environments
may require additional precautions.
Use these guidelines as a tool for helping avoid potential
electromagnetic interference (EMI) and transient EMI that
could cause problems such as “adapter faults, rack faults,
communication faults,” etc. These guidelines are not
intended to supersede local electrical codes.
This publication is organized into the following
sections:
• Raceway Layout Considerations
Safety Guide
For more complete information on recommended application guidelines,
see the Installation Safety Guidelines section of Bulletin 600 (Form
A10309) or you can download the Installation Safety Guidelines at:
www.rosscontrols.com/rosslit.htm.
• Mounting, Bonding, and Grounding
• Power Distribution
• Surge-Suppression
• Ferrite Beads
• Enclosure Lighting
• Avoiding Unintentional Momentary Turn-On of
Outputs
• Related Publications
! WARNING
FAILURE OR IMPROPER SELECTION OR IMPROPER USE OF THE
PRODUCTS AND/OR SYSTEMS DESCRIBED HEREIN OR RELATED
ITEMS CAN CAUSE DEATH, PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY
DAMAGE.
This document and other information from ROSS CONTROLS, its
subsidiaries and authorized distributors provide product and/or system
options for further investigation by users having technical expertise. It
is important that you analyze all aspects of your application, including
consequences of any failure and review the information concerning the
product or systems in the current product catalog. Due to the variety of
operating conditions and applications for these products or systems, the
user, through its own analysis and testing, is solely responsible for making
the final selection of the products and systems and assuring that all
performance, safety and warning requirements of the application are met.
The products described herein, including without limitation, product features,
specifications, designs, availability and pricing, are subject to change by
ROSS CONTROLS and its subsidiaries at any time without notice.
EXTRA COPIES OF THESE INSTRUCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE FOR INCLUSION
IN EQUIPMENT / MAINTENANCE MANUALS THAT UTILIZE THESE PRODUCTS.
CONTACT YOUR LOCAL REPRESENTATIVE.
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines
Raceway Layout Considerations
The raceway layout of a system is reflective of where the
different types of I/O modules are placed in I/O chassis.
Therefore, you should determine I/O-module placement
prior to any layout and routing of wires. However, when
planning your I/O-module placement, segregate the
modules based upon the conductor categories published
for each I/O module so that you can follow these guidelines.
Also, all conductors (AC or DC) in the same raceway
must be insulated for the highest voltage applied to any
one of the conductors in the raceway. These guidelines
coincide with the guidelines for “the installation of electrical
equipment to minimize electrical noise inputs to controllers
from external sources” in IEEE standard 518-1982.
Categorize Conductors
Segregate all wires and cables into the following three
categories (Table A). Refer to the publication for each
specific I/O module or block for individual conductorcategory classification of each I/O line.
Table A
Follow these Guidelines for Grouping Conductors with Respect to Noise
Group conductor cables fitting this description
Control and AC Power — high-power conductors that
are more tolerant of electrical noise than category 2
conductors and may also cause more noise to be
picked up by adjacent conductors
Into this
category:
Category 1
• AC power lines for power supplies and I/O circuits.
• High-power digital AC I/O lines — to connect AC I/O
modules rated for high power and high noise immunity.
• High-power digital DC I/O lines — to connect DC I/O
modules rated for high power or with input circuits with
long time-constant filters for high noise rejection. They
typically connect devices such as hard-contact switches,
relays, and solenoids.
Category 2
• Analog I/O lines and DC power lines for analog circuits.
• Low-power digital AC/DC I/O lines — to connect to I/O
modules that are rated for low power such as low-power
contact-output modules.
• Low-power digital DC I/O lines — to connect to DC I/O
modules that are rated for low power and have input
circuits with short time-constant filters to detect short
pulses. They typically connect to devices such as
proximity switches, photo-electric sensors, TTL devices,
and encoders.
• Communication cables (ControlNet, DeviceNet, RS-232-C
cables) — to connect between processors or to I/O
adapter modules, programming terminals, computers, or
data terminals.
Category 3
• Low-voltage DC power cables — provide backplane power
to the system components.
• Corresponds to IEEE levels 3 (low susceptibility)
and 4 (power)
Signal and Communication — low-power conductors
that are less tolerant of electrical noise than
category-1 conductors and should also cause less
noise to be picked up by adjacent conductors (they
connect to sensors and actuators relatively close to
the I/O modules)
• Corresponds to IEEE levels 1 (high susceptibility)
and 2 (medium susceptibility)
Intra-enclosure — interconnect the system
components within an enclosure
• Corresponds to IEEE levels 1 (high susceptibility)
and 2 (medium susceptibility)
2
Examples:
• Communication cables — to connect between system
components within the same enclosure.
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines
Route Conductors
To guard against coupling noise from one conductor
to another, follow these general guidelines (Table B)
when routing wires and cables (both inside and outside
of an enclosure). Use the spacing given in these general
guidelines with the following exceptions:
• Where connection points (for conductors of different
categories) on a device are closer together than the
specified spacing.
• Application-specific configurations for which the
spacing is described in a publication for that specific
application.
These guidelines are for noise immunity only. Follow all
local codes for safety requirements.
Table B
Follow these Guidelines for Routing Cables to Guard Against Noise
Route this category
of conductor cables:
According to these guidelines:
Category 1
These conductors can be routed in the same cable tray or raceway with machine power conductors of up to
600VAC (feeding up to 100 hp devices).
Category 2
• If it must cross power feed lines, it should do so at right angles.
• Route at least 5 ft from high-voltage enclosures, or sources of rf/microwave radiation.
• If the conductor is in a metal wireway or conduit, each segment of that wireway or conduit must be bonded
to each adjacent segment so that it has electrical continuity along its entire length, and must be bonded to
the enclosure at the entry point.
• Properly shield (where applicable) and route in a raceway separate from category-1 conductors.
• If in a contiguous metallic wireway or conduit, route at least 0.08m (3 in) from category-1 conductors
of less than 20A; 0.15m (6 in) from AC power lines of 20A or more, but only up to 100 kVA; 0.3m (1 ft) from
AC power lines of greater than 100 kVA.
• If not in a contiguous metallic wireway or conduit, route at least 0.15m (6 in) from category-1
conductors of less than 20A; 0.3m (1 ft) from AC power lines of 20A or more, but only up to 100 kVA; 0.6m
(2 ft) from AC power lines of greater than 100 kVA.
Category 3
Route conductors external to all raceways in the enclosure or in a raceway separate from any category-1
conductors with the same spacing listed for category-2 conductors, where possible.
Important: These guidelines assume that you follow
the Surge-Suppression guidelines (page 15). While
these guidelines apply to the majority of installations,
certain electrically harsh environments may require
additional precautions.
The use of the guidelines in Table B are illustrated in
Figure 1.
www.rosscontrols.com
3
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines
Figure 1 – Mounting Assembly Details
Category-1
Conductors
(AC Power Lines)
Category-2
Conductors
Conduit
Tighter spacing
allowed with conduit
Enclosure Wall
Conduit
Use greater
spacing
without conduit
Transformer
Tighter spacing allowed
where forced by spacing
of connection points
Category-2
Conductors
I/O Block
1771 I/O Chassis
Place modules to
comply with spacing
guidelines if possible
Mounting, Bonding, and Grounding
After establishing all layouts, you can begin mounting,
bonding, and grounding each chassis. Bonding is the
connecting together of metal parts of chassis, assemblies,
frames, shields, and enclosures to reduce the effects of
EMI and ground noise. Grounding is the connection to the
grounding-electrode system to place equipment at earth
ground potential.
4
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines
Mounting and Bonding the Chassis
You can mount the chassis with either bolts or welded
studs. Figure 2 shows details for:
• Stud-mounting a ground bus or chassis to the back
panel of the enclosure.
• Stud-mounting a back panel to the enclosure.
• Bolt-mounting a ground bus or chassis to the back
panel of the enclosure.
If the mounting brackets of a chassis do not lay flat before
the nuts are tightened, use additional washers as shims so
that the chassis does not bend when you tighten the nuts.
IMPORTANT
Do not bend the chassis. Bending the chassis might
damage the backplane and result in poor connections.
Figure 2 – Mounting Assembly Details
Back Panel
Mounting Bracket
or Ground Bus
Back Wall of
Enclosure
Back Panel
Welded Stud
Flat
Washer
Scrape Paint
Nut
Welded
Stud
Nut
Flat
Washer
Use a wire brush to remove
paint from threads to allow a
ground connection.
If the mounting bracket is
coated with a non-conductive
material (anodized, painted, etc.),
scrape the material around the
mounting hole.
Star
Washer
Stud Mounting of a Ground Bus or Chassis
to the Back Panel
Back Panel
Tapped
Hole
Ground Bus or
Mounting Bracket
Scrape paint on panel and
use a star washer.
Stud Mounting of the Back Panel to the
Enclosure Back Wall
Back Panel
Mounting Bracket
Bolt
Tapped Hole
Flat
Washer
Nut
Star
Washer
Flat
Washer
Nut
Flat
Washer
Star
Washer
Scrape Paint
Scrape paint on panel
and use star washers.
Bolt
If the mounting bracket is coated
with a non-conductive material
(anodized, painted, etc.), scrape
the material around the
mounting hole.
Bolt Mounting of a Ground Bus or Chassis
to the Back Panel
Flat
Washer
If the mounting bracket is coated with
a non-conductive material (anodized,
painted, etc.), scrape the material
around the mounting hole.
Alternative Bolt Mounting of Chassis
to the Back Panel
www.rosscontrols.com
5
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines
Figure 4 – Details of Ground Connection at
Enclosure Wall
Make good electrical connection between each chassis,
back-panel, and enclosure through each mounting bolt or
stud. Wherever contact is made, remove paint or other
non-conductive finish from around studs or tapped holes.
Enclosure
Wall
Scrape
Paint
Bolt
Bonding and Grounding the Chassis
With solid-state controls, proper bonding and grounding
helps reduce the effects of EMI and ground noise. Also,
since bonding and grounding are important for safety in
electrical installations, local codes and ordinances dictate
which bonding and grounding methods are permissible.
Ground
Lug
For example, for U.S. installations, the National Electrical
Code (NEC) gives you the requirements for safe bonding
and grounding, such as information about the size and
types of conductors and methods of safely grounding
electrical components.
Equipment-Grounding Conductor — In addition to
making good connections through each bolt or stud, use
either 1-inch copper braid or 8 AWG minimum stranded
copper wire to connect each chassis, enclosure and
central ground bus mounted on the back-panel. Figure 3
shows ground-bus connection details.
Figure 3 – Ground Bus Connection Details
Ground Bus
Mounting
Scrape paint on enclosure
wall and use a star washer.
Nut
EquipmentGrounding
Conductor
Star
Washer
Connect an equipment grounding conductor directly from
each chassis to an individual bolt on the ground bus. For a
chassis with no ground stud, use a mounting bolt (Figure 5).
For those chassis with a ground stud, use the ground stud
for this connection (Figure 6).
Figure 5 – Details of Ground Connection at Mounting
Bracket of Chassis with No Ground Stud
Back Panel
Mounting Bracket
Ground Bus
Equipmentgrounding
Conductors
Welded
Stud
Ground
Lug
Ground
Lug
Scrape
Paint
Tapped Hole
Flat
Washer
Nut
Bolt
Star
Washer
Grounding-electrode
conductor to
grounding-electrode
system.
Star
Washer
Figure 4 shows enclosure-wall ground connection details.
Use a steel enclosure to guard against EMI. If the enclosure
door has a viewing window, it should be a laminated screen
or a conductive optical substrate to block EMI. Do not rely
on the hinge for electrical contact between the door and the
enclosure; install a bonding wire.
6
Flat
Washer
If the mounting bracket
is coated with a
non-conductive material
(anodized, painted, etc.),
scrape the material
around the mounting hole.
For a power supply without a groundable power supply
chassis (such as a power-supply module or mini-processor
with an integral power supply), or a power supply with
a chassis that is not internally connected to its GND
terminal, use a 14 AWG copper wire to connect its GND
terminal to the ground stud or mounting bolt connected to
the ground bus. This will ensure an adequate ground for
noise immunity.
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines
Figure 6 – Typical Grounding Configuration
Enclosure Wall
See Figure 4
Ground
Bus
GroundingElectrode
Conductor
See Figure 3
To GroundingElectrode
System
PLC with
Power Supply
Equipment-Grounding
Conductors 8AWG
Equipment-Grounding
Conductors 14AWG
I/O Modules
DIN Rail
Power Supply
Chassis with
Power Supply
I/O Chassis Wall
14 AWG
Mini-processor with
built-in power supply
Ground
Lug
Power-Supply
Module
Nut
Star
Washers
Chassis
with 2 Power
Supplies
Ground
Lug
Star
Washer
14 AWG
Ground
Bus
Do not lay one ground lug directly on top of the other. This
type of connection can become loose due to compression
of the metal lugs. Sandwich the first lug between a
star washer and a nut with a captive star washer. After
tightening the nut, sandwich the second lug between the
first nut and a second nut with a captive star washer.
www.rosscontrols.com
7
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines
Some products have no visible groundable chassis and
no ground lug or ground terminal, but mount on a DIN rail.
The chassis of these products are grounded only through
the DIN rail. For these products, connect an equipmentgrounding conductor directly from the mounting bolt on the
DIN rail to an individual bolt on the ground bus.
Grounding-Electrode Conductor — Connect the
ground bus to the grounding-electrode system through a
grounding-electrode conductor. The grounding-electrode
system is at earth-ground potential and is the central
ground for all electrical equipment and AC power within
any facility. Use 8 AWG copper wire minimum for the
grounding-electrode conductor to help guard against EMI.
The National Electrical Code specifies safety requirements
for the grounding-electrode conductor.
Shielded Cables — Certain I/O connections require
shielded cables to help reduce the effects of electrical
noise coupling. Ground each shield at one end only. A
shield grounded at both ends forms a ground loop which
can cause a processor to fault.
Ground each shield at the end specified in the appropriate
publication for the product. Never connect a shield to the
common side of a logic circuit (this would introduce noise
into the logic circuit). Connect each shield directly to a
chassis ground.
For some communication network cables, the shield
connections are unique to the particular cabling system.
In some such cases, a DC short to ground is not
needed because a low-impedance AC path to ground
and a high-impedance DC path to ground are provided
internally at each node. Follow the specific instructions
in the publication provided for the specific communication
network cabling system.
Avoid breaking shields at junction boxes. Many types of
connectors for shielded conductors are available from
various manufacturers. If you do break a shield at a
junction box, do the following:
• Connect only category-2 conductors in the junction box.
• Do not strip the shield back any further than necessary
to make a connection.
• Connect the shields of the two cable segments to
ensure continuity along the entire length of the cable.
8
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines
Power Distribution
You can connect the power supply directly to the secondary
of a transformer (Figures 7 and 8). The transformer
provides DC isolation from other equipment not connected
to that transformer secondary. Connect the transformer
primary to the AC source; connect the high side of the
transformer secondary to the L1 terminal of the power
supply; connect the low side of the transformer secondary
to the neutral (common) terminal of the power supply.
Figure 7 – Grounded AC Power-Distribution System with Master-Control Relay
Disc.
L1
Suppressor1
1FU
L1
2FU
Incoming
L2
AC
L2
3FU
L3
To Motor
Starters
Enclosure
Wall
L3
H4
H1
H3
H2
Back-Panel
Ground Bus
Step-Down2
Transformer
Grounded Conductor
FUSE
X1
Multiple E-Stop
Switches
X2
Start
CRM
EquipmentGrounding
Conductors
Grounding-Electrode
Conductor to
Grounding-Electrode
System
Suppressor1
CRM
The I/O circuits form a net
inductive load switched by
the CRM contacts. Therefore,
a suppressor is needed
across the line at the load
side of the CRM contacts.
Connect When
Applicable
GND
Controller
Power
Supply
L1
N or L2
User DC
Supply
CRM
Suppressor3
Input
Module
Wiring
Arm
Output
Actuator
Output Module
Wiring Arm
Input
Sensor
CRM
+
–
To DC I/O
Actuators/
Sensors
Notes:
1 To minimize EMI generation, connect a suppressor across an
inductive load.
2 In many applications, a second transformer provides power to
the input circuits and power supplies for isolation from the output
circuits.
3 Connect a suppressor here to minimize EMI generation from
the net inductive load switched by the CRM contacts. In some
installations, a 1μf 220Ω suppressor or 2μf 100Ω suppressor has
been effective.
www.rosscontrols.com
9
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines
Connect one input directly to the L1 side of the line, on
the load side of the CRM contacts, to detect whether the
CRM contacts are closed. In the ladder logic, use this
input to hold off all outputs anytime the CRM contacts are
open. (Refer to your programming manual.) If you fail to
do this, closing the CRM contacts could generate transient
EMI because outputs are already turned on. To have
outputs turned on when CRM contacts are closing would
be analogous to squeezing the trigger on a hand tool as
you’re plugging it in.
Figure 8 – Ungrounded AC Power-Distribution System with Master-Control Relay
Disc.
Suppressor1
1FU
L1
L1
2FU
Incoming
L2
AC
L2
3FU
L3
To Motor
Starters
L3
Enclosure
Wall
H4
H1
H3
H2
2
Step-Down
Transformer
Back-Panel
Ground Bus
FUSE
X1
X2
1LT
FUSE
2LT
Multiple E-Stop
Switches
EquipmentGrounding
Conductors
Grounding-Electrode
Conductor to
Grounding-Electrode
System
Start
CRM
Suppressor1
The I/O circuits form a net
inductive load switched by
the CRM contacts. Therefore,
a suppressor is needed
across the line at the load
side of the CRM contacts.
CRM
Controller
Connect When
Applicable
GND
L1 Power Supply N or L2
CRM
User DC
Supply
CRM
Suppressor3
Input
Module
Wiring
Arm
Output
Actuator
Output Module
Wiring Arm
Input
Sensor
CRM
+
Notes:
1 To minimize EMI generation, connect a suppressor across an
inductive load.
2 In many applications, a second transformer provides power to
the input circuits and power supplies for isolation from the output
circuits.
3 Connect a suppressor here to minimize EMI generation from
the net inductive load switched by the CRM contacts. In some
installations, a 1μf 220Ω suppressor or 2μf 100Ω suppressor has
been effective.
10
–
To DC I/O
Actuators/
Sensors
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines
Common Power Source for I/O
Second Transformer
Unless each I/O of a module or block is individually isolated,
multiple I/O within the block or module share a common
terminal for one side of the power source. All I/O sharing
a common terminal must share a common power source
(i.e., from the same pole of a disconnect or from the same
transformer tap).
Certain manufacturer's power supplies have circuits that
suppress electromagnetic interference from other equipment.
However, isolate output circuits from power supplies and input
circuits to help prevent output transients from being induced
into inputs and power supplies. In many applications, power
is provided to the input circuits and power supplies through
a second transformer (Figure 9).
If a module or block has multiple commons, each common
and its I/O may be isolated from the other commons. In
that case, each common and its I/O can have a separate
power source. If each I/O is individually isolated, each I/O
can have a separate power source. If a module or block
has individually isolated I/O or multiple isolated commons
and multiple power sources are used, be certain that the
difference in potential between any two power sources does
not exceed the specified maximum continuous voltage that
can be applied between the channels.
Figure 9 – Power Supplies and Input Circuits
Receiving Power Through a Separate Transformer
Disc.
L1
L1
2FU
Incoming
L2
AC
Under-Voltage Shutdown
Suppressor1
1FU
L2
3FU
L3
L3
H4
H1
Each power supply with under-voltage shut-down
protection generates a shut-down signal on the backplane
when the AC line voltage drops below its lower voltage
limit. The power supply removes the shut-down signal
when the line voltage comes back above the lower voltage
limit. This shut-down is to guard against invalid data being
stored in memory.
To Motor
Starters
H3
H2
Step-Down
Transformer
X1
Because a capacitive-input power supply converting AC
to DC draws power only from the peak of the AC voltage
wave-form, the external transformer load (in VA) of each
power supply is 2.5 times its real power dissipation (in
Watts). If the transformer is too small, the peaks of the
sine wave are clipped. Even if the voltage is still above the
lower voltage limit, the power supply senses the clipped
wave as low voltage and sends the shut-down signal.
H1
X2
H4
H3
H2
Isolation/
Constant-Voltage
Transformer
X1
X2
To Power Supplies
and Input Circuits
To Output Circuits
Sizing the Transformer
To determine the required rating of the transformer add the
external-transformer load of the power supply and all other
power requirements (input circuits, output circuits). The
power requirements must take into consideration the surge
currents of devices controlled by the processor. Choose
a transformer with the closest standard transformer rating
above the calculated requirements.
Notes:
1 To minimize transient EMI generation when power is interrupted
by the interrupt switch, connect a suppressor across the primary
of the transformer.
For example, the external-transformer load of a powersupply module at maximum backplane load current is
140VA (2.5 x 56W = 140). A 140VA transformer could
be used if a power-supply module were the only load. A
500VA transformer should be used if there were 360VA of
load in addition to that of the power-supply module.
www.rosscontrols.com
11
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines
Isolation Transformer — For applications near excessive
electrical noise generators, an isolation transformer (for
the second transformer) provides further suppression of
electromagnetic interference from other equipment. The
output actuators being controlled should draw power from
the same AC source as the isolation transformer, but not
from the secondary of the isolation transformer (Figure
9).
Constant-Voltage Transformer — In applications where
the AC power source is especially “soft” and subject to
unusual variations, a constant-voltage transformer can
stabilize the AC power source to the processor and
minimize shutdowns. The constant-voltage transformer
must be of the harmonic neutralizing type.
If the power supply receives its AC power through a
constant-voltage transformer, the input sensors connected
to the I/O chassis should also receive their AC power
from the same constant-voltage transformer. If the inputs
receive their AC power through another transformer, the
AC source voltage could go low enough that erroneous
input data enters memory while the constant-voltage
transformer prevents the power supply from shutting down
the processor. The output actuators being controlled
should draw power form the same AC sources as the
constant-voltage transformer, but not from the secondary
of the constant-voltage transformer (9).
Ground Connection
When AC power is supplied as a separately derived
system through an isolation/step-down transformer, you
can connect it as a grounded AC system or an ungrounded
AC system. For a grounded AC system, connect one
side of the transformer secondary to the ground bus as
in Figure 7. For an ungrounded AC system, connect one
side of each test switch for the ground-fault-detector lights
to the ground bus as in Figure 8. We do not recommend
an ungrounded system. Follow local codes in determining
whether to use a grounded system.
When bringing AC power into the enclosure, do not
ground its raceway to the ground bus on the back-panel.
Connecting the raceway to the ground bus may cause the
processor to fault by introducing EMI into the grounding
circuit. Local codes may provide an exception for
permitting isolation from the raceway. For example, article
250-75 of the National Electrical Code has an exception
that explains the conditions under which this isolation from
the raceway is permitted.
12
Surge-Suppression
Transient EMI can be generated whenever inductive
loads such as relays, solenoids, motor starters, or motors
are operated by “hard contacts” such as pushbutton or
selector switches. The wiring guidelines are based on
the assumption that you guard your system against the
effects of transient EMI by using surge-suppressors to
suppress transient EMI at its source. Inductive loads
switched by solid-state output devices alone do not require
surge-suppression. However, inductive loads of AC output
modules that are in series or parallel with hard contacts
require surge-suppression to protect the module output
circuits as well as to suppress transient EMI.
Figure 10 shows three Examples of where to use
suppressors. In Example 1, although the motor-starter
coil is an inductive load, it does not need a suppressor
because it is switched by a solid-state device alone. In
Example 2, the relay coil needs a suppressor because
a hard-contact switch is in series with the solid-state
switch. However, in both Examples 1 and 2, we show a
suppressor on the motor and solenoid because it is an
inductive load switched by the hard contacts of the motor
starter or relay. Even if they have no interaction with
the control system, regularly cycled loads of this type
need suppression if conductors connecting to these
loads are: 1) connected to the same separately derived
system as that of the control system; 2) or routed in
proximity with conductors of the control system as per
the routing guidelines.
In Example 3, the pilot light has a built-in step-down
transformer that needs a suppressor because it is an
inductive load being switched by the hard contacts of a
contact output module; without suppression, the transient
EMI would be generated inside the I/O chassis. Lights with
built-in step-down transformers that are switched by hard
contacts external to any I/O chassis may not need to be
suppressed because the noise spike they can generate
may be only approximately one tenth that of a relay or
motor starter.
In all cases, the AC power coming into the I/O modules
must be switched by the CRM contacts. Therefore, a
suppressor is needed across the line at the load side
of the CRM contacts as shown in Figures 7 and 8. The
application (voltage, net load of I/O circuits) dictates the
specific suppressor needed across the line at the load side
of the CRM contacts.
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines
Figure 10 – Examples of Where to Use Suppression
L1
1MS
Solid-State
Switch
1MS
Suppressor
1MS
Suppressor
Suppressor
AC Output Module
1MS
L2
L1
L2
1M
Example 1:
An AC output module
controls a motor starter
whose contacts control
the motor.
L1
Although the motor starter is
an inductive load, it does not
need a suppressor because it is
switched by a solid-state device.
AC Output Module
L1
L2
The motor needs supressors
because it is an inductive load
switched by hard contacts.
L1
L2
1CR
1S
Solid-State
Switch
1CR
Suppressor
Suppressor
The solenoid needs a supressor
because it is an inductive load
switched by hard contacts.
The interposing relay needs a
supressor because it is an inductive
load switched by hard contacts.
Contact Output Module
L1
Pilot Light With Built-In
Step-Down Transformer
Suppressor
Example 2:
An AC output module
controls an interposing
relay, but the circuit can be
opened by hard contacts.
The relay contacts control
a solenoid.
Example 3:
A contact output module
controls an inductive load.
L2
The pilot light needs a supressor
because it is an inductive load
switched by hard contacts.
Figure 11 shows typical suppression circuitry for different
types of loads.
Figure 11 – Typical Suppression Applications
230/460VAC
Electrocube 1676-13
120VAC
3-Phase
Motor
Cat. No. 700-N24
For Small Apparatus (Relays, Solenoids,
and Motor Starters up to Size 1)
For 3-Phase Apparatus, a Suppressor is Needed
Across Each Phase
+
120/240VAC
–
VDC
Cat. No. 599-K04 or
599-KA04 or ITW
Paktron 104M06QC100
700-Nx
For Large Apparatus (Contacts up to Size 5)
For DC Relays
www.rosscontrols.com
13
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines
Surge-suppressors are usually most effective when
connected at the inductive loads. They are still usable
when connected at the switching devices; however, this
may be less effective because the wires connecting the
switching devices to the inductive loads act as antennas
that radiate EMI. You can see the effectiveness of a
particular suppressor by using an oscilloscope to observe
the voltage waveform on the line.
Ferrite Beads
Ferrite beads can provide additional suppression
of transient EMI. Fair-Rite Products Corporation
manufactures a ferrite bead (part number 2643626502)
which can be slipped over category-2 and -3 conductors.
You can secure them with heat-shrink tubing or tie-wraps.
With a ferrite bead located near the end of a cable (or
cable segment in the case of a daisy-chain or dropline
configuration) transient EMI induced onto the cable can
be suppressed by the bead before it enters the equipment
connected to the end of the cable.
Avoiding Unintentional Momentary
Turn-On of Outputs
Unintentional turn-on of outputs as the power source is
connected or disconnected, even if momentary, can result
in injury to personnel as well as damage to equipment. The
danger is greater with fast-response actuators. You can help
minimize the probability of unintentional momentary turn-on
of AC and DC circuits by following each of these guidelines
according to your specific application:
• Follow the surge-suppression guidelines in this
publication
• Follow the bonding and grounding guidelines in this
publication
• Do not unnecessarily disconnect the power source
from output circuits
• Where possible, turn off all outputs before using CRM
contacts to interrupt the output circuit power source
• Hold off all outputs anytime the CRM contacts are
open to be certain that they are off as power is
reconnected
Even if unintentional momentary turn-on does occur, the
effects can be minimized if:
Enclosure Lighting
Fluorescent lamps are also sources of EMI. If you must
use fluorescent lamps inside an enclosure, the following
precautions may help guard against EMI problems from
this source as shown in Figure 12:
• Install a shielding grid over the lamp
• Use shielded cable between the lamp and its switch
• Use a metal-encased switch
• Install a filter between the switch and the power line,
or shield the power-line cable
Figure 12 – Installation Requirements for Suppressing
Noise From Fluorescent Lamps Inside an Enclosure
• Actuators have a home position, i.e. defined by a
spring return
• For latching actuators, in the ladder logic, use nonretentive energize (OTE) instructions with hold-in (sealin) paths to maintain the established position until power
turn-off and leave outputs off initially at power turn-on
• Each input or other load device connected to an
output has an input-filter time constant no lower than
necessary for the application
After designing and installing your system following these
guidelines to minimize unintentional momentary turn-on
and any effects thereof, test the system by de-energizing
and then re-energizing the CRM relay (Figures 7 and 8).
Related Publications
Filter
Shielding-Grid
Over Lamp
14
Shielded
Cable
Metal-Encased
Switch
AC Power
Line-Filter or
Shielded
Power Line
For additional information regarding wiring and grounding
guidelines, refer to:
• Application Considerations for Solid-State Controls
(publication A10325) — this is an aid to the user of
solid-state controls who has considerable familiarity
with relay-type controls but may have limited electronic
experience and knowledge.
© 2007 ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines
• National Electrical Code (ANSI/NFPA 70) — Article 250
of this code provides information about the types and
sizes of conductors and methods for safely grounding
electrical equipment and components. Articles 725-5,
725-15, 725-52, and 800-52 restrict the placement of
different types of conductors in a composite cable, a
raceway, or a cable tray.
• IEEE Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial
and Commercial Power Systems (IEEE Std 142-1991)
• Grounding for the Control of EMI (by Hugh W. Denny
— publisher, Don White Consultants Inc., 1973)
• Electromagnetic Interference and Compatibility, Volume
3 (by R. J. White — publisher, Don White Consultants,
Inc., 1981)
• Military Handbook 419, “Grounding, Bonding, and
Shielding for Electronic Equipment and Facilities”
• IEEE Guide for the Installation of Electrical Equipment
to Minimize Electrical Noise Inputs to Controllers from
External Sources (IEEE Std 518-1982)
• IEEE Recommended Practice for Powering and
Grounding Sensitive Electronic Equipment (IEEE Std
1100-1992)
www.rosscontrols.com
15
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines
NOTES
Printed in U.S.A -0807
© Copyright 2007, ROSS CONTROLS®. All Rights Reserved.
Form A10324
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement